A JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE MADE INTO THE South Sea, BY THE BUCANIERS or FREEBOOTERS OF AMERICA; From the Year 1684 to 1689.  
Written by the Sieur Raveneau de Lussan.  
To which is Added, The VOYAGE of the Sieur DE MONTAUBAN, Captain of the FREEBOOTERS on the Coast of Guiney, in the Year 1695.  
LONDON: Printed for The Newborough at the Golden Ball in St. Paul's Churchyard, john Nicholson at the King's Arms in Little Britain, and Benj. took at the Temple-Gate near Temple-Bar. 1698.   

A Certificate given by the Governor of S. Domingo to the Author of this Journal, concerning his Service.  
The Sieur de Cussy, His Majesty's Governor of the Tortoise Island, and the Coast of St. Domingo.  
WE do certify, That the Sieur Raveneau de Lussan hath served in a Company of Fourscore and Four Men with the Sieur Laurence de Graff, in the Quality of an Ensign, against the Spaniards, His Majesty's Enemies; and that having gone into the South Sea▪ he fell into the Company of other Freebooters, from whence not being able to return, but by the force of their Arms; He has given upon those Occasions signal Proofs both of his Zeal and Courage. In Testimony whereof We have given him this Certificate▪ to which We have affixed Our Seal, and ordered Our Secretary to Countersign the same.  
Given at the Fort of Port-Paix, Le Cussy. the 17th. of May, 1688. By the governor's Command, Boyer.   

A Copy of a Letter written by Monsieur de Cussy, His Majesty's Governor of the Tortoise Island, and Coast of St. Domingo, to Monsieur de Lubert, Treasurer-General of the Marine, upon the Subject-matter of this Author's journal.  
SIR,  
I Have taken Notice from those Letters you have done me the Honour to write unto me the preceding Year, that you Interest yourself in the Affairs of the Sieur Raveneau de Lussan; Wherefore, Sir, I have thought it my Duty to Inform you of his Return from the South Sea, with Two Hundred and Sixty of his Comrades, who got clear out of that Country, by the performing of Wonderful Actions, the Particulars whereof I shall not enter upon, since he will have the Honour to give you an Exact and Faithful Account of them himself, being the only Person of all the Company that has kept a Journal.  
I was in hopes to have got him embarked in the King's Ship, called the Marine, which was to be gone in two days, and Monsieur de Beaugeau the Commander, promised me to give him his Table upon your Account: But the said Sieur de Lussan thinking the Frigate to be gone, stayed with meat Port-Paix, to wait an Opportunity of meeting with another Ship that should be bound directly for Diep. I heartily wish, Sir, I could meet with any Opportunity of serving you in these Parts, I should do it with exceeding Pleasure, as being with all Deference and Respect imaginable,  
SIR, At the Cape, May 7, 1688. Your most Humble, and Obedient Servant, De Cussy.   

A Copy of another Letter written by the said Monsieur de Cussy to the Father of the Author of this journal.  
SIR,  
I Cannot let your Son be gone, without testifying to you how much concerned I am in the Satisfaction and Joy you will have to see him return from so long and toilsome a Voyage, as I am confident of your being sorry at present, that I had not sent him home to you at the time you desired, which yet I should not have failed to do, had he not been absent, and at whose return I delivered him one of your Letters, which I always preserved safe with those of Monsieur de Lubert, He has no occasion to make use of me, tho' I have made him an offer of my utmost Service. I may say, without Vanity, that he has made the greatest and finest Voyage in our Age, and that he has seen Countries, which a great many People in the World content themselves to view in Maps, without desiring any other sight of them, tho' they had all the Riches thereof bestowed upon them for their pains. Besides the Pleasure you will have to see your Son again, you will have also that of hearing him Discourse, pertinently enough, of his Voyages and Adventures, there being no other besides himself of all the Company that can give an exact Account thereof, as having all along applied himself to keep a very Punctual Journal of all Transactions, which I am confident will be pleasing to my Lord Marquis de Signelay: I have myself the Honour to write to him concerning it, that so I might engage your Son to go and Present it to him, which perhaps otherwise he would not have adventured to do, out of the little Esteem himself has of his own Work, This is what offers itself at present for me to write to you, assuring you I should take a deal of Pleasure to find myself in any Condition to serve him, and that I am,  
SIR, Your most Humble, and most Obedient Servant, De Cussy. At the Fort of Port-Paix● May the 18th▪ 1688.   

CHAP I.  
A journal made by the Freebooters into the South-Sea, in 1684. and in the following Years.  
IT is no very uncommon thing for a Child that is a Native of Paris, 
The Author's first Adventures and Disposition.  to go and seek his Fortune abroad, and to entertain a fixed Design of becoming a Man engaged in hazardous Adventures. This City, within which most of the Wonders of the World are contained, and which is perhaps the greatest that can be met with, ought, in my Opinion, to have the Preference of any other upon the Face of the Earth. But who is he that can penetrate into the Secrets of Nature, and give a Reason for some sort of Inclinations she works in the Minds of Mortals? As for myself, I must confess I am not able to give an Account of the Depth of my Desires; and all that I can say, is, That I have always had a most passionate Disposition for Travel. Scarce was I Seven Years old, when, through some innate Notions, whereof I had not the Mastery, I began to steal out of my Father's House: It's true, my first Rambles were not far, because my Age and Strength would not allow them to be so; but they were so much the more frequent; and I have often given my Parents the trouble to look after me in the Suburbs, and that Place we call la Vilette: However, as I grew up, my Excursions were the larger, and by degrees I accustomed myself to lose a slght of Paris.  
This rambling sort of Humour was accompanied with another, which I dare not dignify with the Name of a Martial one, but was such as wrought in me an ardent Desire to see some Siege or Battle: I could not hear the Noise of the Drum in the Streets without those Transports of Mind, the remembrance whereof does still operate a kind of a vigorous Heat and Joy in me. It so fell out at length, that I met with an Officer, with whom I had but a slender Acquaintance, but my Warlike Genius quickly inclined me to make him my Friend. I looked upon him as a Person who could be very serviceable to me in my Designs; and it was with this Prospect I applied myself to manage him. The Siege of Conde being happily commenced at this time, and he being obliged to serve there with his Company, I made him the offer of a Sword that had hither to done neither good not harm to any Man, but whi●● I was passionately desirous to make use of. Here 〈◊〉 was that he gave me the first Instances of his Friendship, for he took me freely along with him, and kept me all the Campaign; at the breaking up whereof 〈◊〉 returned with him no ways discouraged, or weary 〈◊〉 War, as the greatest part of them are, who have had but just a Taste of it. And this I tell you was my first Adventure.  
The second was not quite so good, for the Success that attended it, though it was alike agreeable to my Palate, and according to my Heart's Desire, I happened to become a Cadet in the Marine Regiment, but I fell in to the Hands of a Captain, who was▪ wondrous skilful to drain the Children of the Family of their Money; so that this Campaign, wherein I hoped to have done the King some Service, was worn away in Expenses My Father gave more than he should, or I delerved to get my Discharge, and to set me once at full Liberty to take to what I liked best; It was not perha● his Inclination I should do so, but it was mine, and was not long to seek.  
God, who it seems, was not willing to make me 〈◊〉 of Conceit with the Trade, was so much the better Guide unto me at this time, as I was ill-guided before●● For Monsieur the Count d' Avegean, whose personal Merit has sufficiently distinguished him in the Body 〈◊〉 the French Guards, took me along with him to the Siege of St. Guislain, where I failed not to meet with new Pleasures in the use of Arms, though it were never so hot. There were a great many men's Lives lost at this Siege which yet did not cool the Desires I had to hazard m● own: And though my Parents, who could not well broo● this my gadding Humour, were in hopes the Fatigu●● of War would cure me of it, they were mistaken in th● matter; for I was no sooner got upon the Stones 〈◊〉 Paris, but I grew weary of being there. I had nothing but Voyages in my Head, and those that were longest and most accompanied with Dangers, appeared to m● to be the best. For a Person never to get out of his Native Country, and to be ignorant how the rest of the Earth stands, appeared to me a matter that should be appropriate to a Woman only; Whereas it was my Judgement, That a Man should never be confined to one Place, and that nothing could suit him better than to make himself acquainted with all those of his own Species. To travel by Land, I thought both long and difficult, and therefore I concluded I could sooner and more safely accomplish my Designs by betaking myself to the Sea; and now you find me ready to go on board.  
There was nothing omitted on the part of Parents that were full of tender Affections for an extravagant Child, to divert me from my Resolution; But as to Youngmen, such as I was, it may be said, as is usually done of Womankind, That what they will, God wills; and to say the Truth, I was overruled by my Inclination herein; wherefore when they perceived, that absolutely to oppose my Humour, would make me but the more opiniative; they proposed I should take a Voyage for S. Domingo, where I should find Friends and Protection in case of need; and as this exactly suited both with my Desires and Designs, and that provided I could get to Sea, I did not care whither bound; I very readily obeyed.  
Diep was the Place where I embarked, 
Embarks at Diep for America.  and from whence I parted on the 5th of March, 1679. with greater Satisfaction of Mind than I am well able to express: That Element; which, to the Generality of Men, seems very frightful, appeared to me the most amiable and delightful of any in the World. The Winds, if I May say so, wrought in me some Delight; for I found that almost every little Blast brought us happily onward on our Way: And I was so overjoyed to find myself in so desirable an Island, that I thought no more of the Hazards my Voyage made me liable to. Let no Man therefore be amazed thereat, if he finds none of them contained in my Journal. And seeing there are other Persons who have been particular enough in their Relation given of this Passage, I have this only to say, that I safely arrived, through the Mercy of God, at S. Domingo; and if any one has the Curiosity to follow me in my remaining Expedition, he must begin from thence.  
I continued there, however, for above three Years not only in order to see the Country, but thro' such Conjunctures as would not admit me to go out of it; I found myself chained there to a Frenchman; that was so far from deserving the Name of one, that his hardened Malice much better became a Turk. But what Misery soever I have undergone with him, I freely for give him, being resolved to forget his Name, which shall not mention in this place, because the Laws of Christianity requires it at my Hands; though as to matt●● of Charity he is not to expect much of that in me since he on his part has been every way defective in the Exercise thereof upon my Account. But my Patience● at last being quite worn out, as being weary of those Cruelties, whereof I saw no end, I made my Complaints to Monsieur de Franquesnay the King's Lieutenant, wh● acted as Governor since the others Decease; and who●● Generosity proved to be a Sanctuary to me, 〈◊〉 readily consenting to take me to his own House, whe● I stayed six whole Months.  
I had borrowed Money in the mean time, 
Resolvests turn Free-Booter.  and thought it was the part of an honest Man to repay i● My Parents would have been perhaps very willing 〈◊〉 have paid my Debts, but they could hear nothing fro● me, nor I from them; and the Letters they sent 〈◊〉 passed thro' such officious Hands, that they spared 〈◊〉 the Charge of Postage. I was therefore necessitated 〈◊〉 seek out some other way to free myself; and this found in meeting with that which satisfied the nature Inclination I had for travelling. I bethought myself 〈◊〉 making one of the Freebooters Gang, to go a Voyage with them, and to borrow for the Payment of 〈◊〉 Debts, as much Money as I could from the Sp●niards. Now these sorts of Borrow have this Advantage attending them, That there is no Obligai●● of Repayment, as in our Country, they being estee●ed the Product of a Just War; and seeing the place 〈◊〉 Action is beyond the Line, there is no Talk there 〈◊〉 making any Restitution: Besides which, we may a● observe in this place, that there was then a Ruptor between the Two Crowns, and that we had a so mal Commission from my Lord Admiral to infest 〈◊〉 Spaniards.  
There was no question to be made, but I could find a Captain that would receive me; and I was not long in making the Choice, since there was not many of them at that time to pitch upon. Laurence de Graff was the Man I most fancied, who would make a special Corsair; and though he had not been long arrived, all that he wanted, was to be gone as well as I. We were in a few hours time well satisfied with each other, and became such Friends, as those are wont to be, who are about to run the same Rifque of Fortune, and apparently to die together. This last indeed we should have reckoned upon with most appearance of Reason, but it was what we least thought of. My Departure took up all my Thoughts, I furnished myself with Arms and other small Necessaries, at the Charge of Monsieur de Franquesnay, who was very ready to advance me some Money, which I have paid him since, and whose kindness I shall never forget. At last the day came, and I must freely say, it was, in my Opinion, one of the best in the Course of my Life. On the 22d, of November, in the Year 1684. we departed from Pettit-Guaves, on the Coast of St. Domingo, to the number of 120 Men on Board a Prize taken some time before by Captain Laurence de Graff, from the Spaniards, which they sent as an Advice-boat from Carthagena on the Terra Firma of America, to Spain.  
Our Design was to go and join ourselves with a Fleet of Freebooters, which we were in hopes to meet with before the Havana, a great City in the Isle of Cuba to the North, and about fourteen Leagues distant from St. Domingo.  
We anchored on the 4th of December at the Tortoise Island to take in Water, and on the 6th sailed away in order to return to the Coast of St. Domingo, which is but Three Leagues off, and where we arrived the 12th, casting Anchor at Cape Francis, where we took in our full Store of Water and Wood We left this Place on the 17th, and were taken with a Northwind two Leagues from the Road in such a manner, that we lost our Shalloop, which was too big to be put upon our Gibbet. Towards Evening we sailed back to a Place of Safety, where we were obliged to stay Two Days waiting for a Canoe we had sent to buy at the Cape, from whence we came, such things a● we wanted for making up the Loss of our Chaloop.  
On the twentieth we made ready to endeavour to rejoin the Victorious, a Ship that came with ●● from the Cape, belonging to Nantes, and bound to the Isles of the Wind, which had on Board the Commander of St. Laurence, Lieutenant-General of the French Islands and the Coasts of the Terra Firma of America, and Monsieur Begun Intendant of Justice Policy, and the Finances of that Country, to who● we served as Convoy, left they should have been attacked by the Spanish Pirogues that Cruise thereabouts. And indeed we had a great deal of Reason to be concerned for the Safety of those Gentlemen who were in much Esteem with all the Colonies of these Islands, because of the good Orders they kept, the exact Justice they administered, and the Tr●● quility the People enjoyed under them; but we could not possibly set sight on this Ship, as not knowing wha● Course she steered.  
The three and twentieth we steered our own Course and in the Evening discovered a Ship to Leeward of us, to whom we gave Chase, but she braced 〈◊〉 to wait for us; and when we were come up 〈◊〉 her, we found it was Captain le Sure of Deep, who commanded a Flute called the Amerantha, whom 〈◊〉 quickly left, keeping our own Course. But on the Five and twentieth, which was Christmas-day, we ha● a great Calm till next day, when the Wind proving contrary, obliged us to put back to the Port 〈◊〉 Platta, on the Coast of St. Domingo, where we 〈◊〉 to the end of the Month.  
On the First of january in the New Year, 168● we doubled Cape St. Francis, and next day by 〈◊〉 in the Morning did the same by Cape Cabrott, 〈◊〉 we doubled that of Savona towards Noon, they being all situated on the same Coast, and that day one of our Men died.  
On the Fourth we sailed in sight of la Mona, next day coasted the Isle of Puerto Rico, and la Savona and then steered Southeast and by South, till the Eleventh, when we discovered the Isles, of Ave, to-towards which we bore till the Evening, and doubled them on the Twelfth about Eleven in the Morning, keeping still the same Course till we came to the Isle de la Roca; where there was also another Rendezvous of our Men of War to be, which we were going to seek out.  
On the Thirteenth, at Seven in the Morning, we discovered the main Land of America, and were becalmed next Day, which continued to the Fifteenth at Noon, when we had a fresh Gale, and steered North North-East till the Seventeenth, when about Moon-setting we descried Two Ships and Four Boats to Windward of us, about a Cannon-Shot's Distance, that had the Cape of us, which brought us upon Deck to make all ready.  
One of those Boats on the Eighteenth by break of Day, being a Tartane commanded by Captain john Rose, as not knowing us presently, came up and ha●ed us; and as our Captain had a Commission from the Lord High Admiral of France, the Count of Thoulouse, we made answer from Paris, and put out our Flag; But Rose who would not know us so, believing we had no other Intention in feigning ourselves to be a King's Ship, than to get clear off him, gave 〈◊〉 Two Guns to make us strike, insomuch that taking him really for a Spaniard, we knocked out the Head of Two Barrels of Powder, in order to burn ourselves, and blow up the Ship, rather than fall into the Hands of those People, who never gave us Quarter, but were wont to make us suffer all imaginable Torments, they beginning usually with the Captain, whom they hang with his Commission about his Neck: But one of the Two Ships came up with us in a Moment, and knowing what we were, gave us a Signal, which was so much the more Satisfaction to us, that instead of Enemies, which we took them to be, they proved to be not only Friends, but those very Ships we were in quest of, which obliged us to put in at the Cape, and spend that Day to visit one another.  
One of these Two Ships belonged to Captain Michael Landresson, and was called The Mutinous, but formerly The Peace; and the other to Captain Laurence de Graff, whose Name was The Neptune, but once The St. Francis, and which he had quitted, when he went in his Prize to St. Domingo to get a new Commission of the Governor, his own that he had being then expired. The first of these Ships carried Fifty Pieces of Cannon, and the other Forty four, and had both of them been Two Spanish Armadillas, who the Year before coming out of Carthagena, to take the Ships commanded as well by the Captains, Laurence and Michael, as those of Captains, john Quet and le Sage, were themselves taken by those, whom they were about to become Masters of: And as for the four Boats, they were commanded by other Captains, whose Names were Rose Vigneron, La Grade, and an English Traitor from jamaica; By them we were informed that they were watching in that Place for the Patach of Marguerita, and a Squadron of Spanish Ships, which they expected would sail that way, in order to take them.  
On the Nineteenth we resolved to quit that Post, and did all we could to get up with the Isle of Curassol, a great part whereof belongs to the Hollanders. We sailed in sight of those of Bonuaira and Roube●; and about Two in the Afternoon of the same Day, we chased a Flemish Boat that came from the Port of Guaira, on the Continent, and was returning to the Town of Curassol, Two Leagues to Leeward of which we anchored that Evening in the Port of Sanct● Barba.  
On the Twentieth we sent away a Boat, under the Command of La Garde, to the Town to ask the Governor leave to buy us Masts for Captain Laurence his Ship, that had lost them in an Hurricane near the Isle of St. Thomas. But this he absolutely refused, and shut up the Gates against us. Upon the Boat's Return, and Relation given us of the governor's Refusal, I carried him a Copy of our Commission, hoping to engage him by that means to grant us our Request; But he still persisted to deny ●s while a part of our Crew scrupled not in the mea● time to go ashore, and enter into the Town after having left their Swords behind them at the Gate.  
On the Twenty third our Ships weighed Anchor, in order to sail for Sancta Crux, which stands seven Leagues to Leeward of this Town, and in our Passage by the Fort we saluted it, who returned us Gun for Gun▪ But the Governor finding we were two Hundred Men of us in the Town, informed us on the twenty fourth by beat of Drum, that it was his Pleasure we should be gone, and return forthwith on board our Ships, and that he would give us Shallops to carry us thither, provided we paid him two Pieces of Eight a Man, I presently discerned it was his Will we should not go back by Land, because we must for that purpose cross a Lake that stands at the foot of the Fort, which he had forbidden us to pass; And this made me go and tell him, we gave him thanks for his Shaloops, that if we were minded to go by Sea to rejoin our Ships, we had Pirogues to carry us thither; and that we had no other design to get to them by Land, but for a walk's sake: To which he answered, That the Inhabitants there scrupled to let us see their Island; but for all that, he would not let us pass over the Lake, and so we were two days before we could reach Sancta Crux, where our Ships were waiting for us.  
We came afterwards to know the reason of the Governor's Displeasure against us, which was, that Capt. Laurence, and Captain Michael's Ships had taken two Dutch Ships before the Havana, that were fraught for the Spaniards, having two Hundred Thousand Pieces of Eight on board, whereof one half belonged to the Dutch Company, and the rest to the Spaniards. These last, with whom we were at War, being the only Persons that were pillaged, were pillaged, were indemnified by the Dutch, who had charge of the said Ships, and who shared with them the other one Hundred Thousand Pieces of Eight that belonged to their Company, which the Freebooters meddled not with, being at Peaco with that Nation; And they easily persuaded their Principals that all had been taken from them, and so we were punished for the Knavery these Dutchmen practised towards their own People.  
Though this Island of Curassol be well enough known in France, 
A Description of the Isle of Curassol.  I cannot but take notice, as I go along, that the Temperature of its Air is the same with that of St. Domingo, and produces the same sort of Fruits▪ that the Land is almost level throughout, and the Country very naked because of the little Wood that grows there, but almost barren in several places, and produces little to the owners besides Maes and small Millet, yet it is watered with several Springs and Rivers. The Town that stands upon it, is small but very nea●, being encompassed with an high though very thin Wall; There is a good and safe Port belongs to it, and the Fort that commands it as well as the Town is very regularly fortified; the Inhabitants are of several sorts of Religions, the exercise thereof being free, the chief of which is that of the Dutch, of the jews, as well as of others; each of whom have their respective places of Worship in the Town. The chief of their Trade consists in Sugar that grows there, and of Wool which comes from the Sheep which breed upon the place in great Numbers: Besides the Skins of these Animals, as also of a great many Oxen and Cows which they keep in the lowest and best watered Grounds of this Island, where it abounds in Pasture: they are altogether affected to the Spanish Nation, with whom they have the main of their Trade.  
On the twenty seventh we made ready and steered our Course for Capella Vella, which is on the Continent of America, where we designed to fix ourselves in order to wait for the Patach of Marguerita, whereof I have already spoken: The same day Captain Vigneron's boat left us to return to the Coast of St. Domingo, because they had not Men enough to make any thing of the Enterprise, there being no more than twenty on board her.  
Being come to the Cape by the thirtieth, we anchored there; and our next care was to set a Vigie or some Sentinels, to the Number of fifteen upon the top of it, to give us notice when they discovered the Patach but next day we thought it more adviseable to pursue this following method to get Intelligence: We sent on the first of February Captain Rose's Boat to the Mouth of the River la Ache on the Continent, inhabited by Spaniards, and about twenty Leagues distant from the Cape where we than were, under pretence of trading with them, but in reality with a design to make some Prisoners, that to we might be informed whether the Patach was passed by that way or no; for it was usual for her to take in part of her lading in that River.  
While we waited for the return of this Boat, I and some others went a shore to view and observe the Country about the Cape. I understood it was inhabited by a most cruel, barbarous and savage Indian Nation, who are neither Friends to, nor have Society with any other People whatsoever, no not even with the Spaniards themselves, who live round about them. They eat without any distinction whatever they can catch, and are afraid of nothing but Swords and the like Weapons; but as for Fire-Arms they matter them not at all; we were satisfied to have a sight of them as we returned, without having the Curiosity to make a trial of their Teeth, by going farther up into a Country, were there was nothing to be got.  
I am not able to forbear in this place to give a strange Example of what I am speaking, 
A strange Story of the Savages.  and of what this People can do, whom I take to be the oldest Freebooters of America. The Marquis of Maintenon, Governor of the Isle of Mary Gallant, who had the command of one of the King's Frigates called the Witch, having taken a Prize of fourteen Guns, which he went on Board, and finding himself one day separated from his own Ship, was constrained, in order to take in water, to cast Anchor at Boca del Drago on the Terra Firma of America, which was inhabited by the same Indian People as live at Cape la Vella. He brought his Ship as near the Shore as he could, and bringing all his Cannon to bear on one side, he sent under the Covert of them his Shalloop with two and twenty armed Men to fill their Casks with Water. Now those Savages lying in Ambush upon the Seaside, did not give the Shalloop time to land, but throwing themselves headlong into the Water, and rushing upon them in spite of the continual Fire made upon them from the Cannon of the Man of War, they carried her with the two and twenty Men for above fifty Paces to Land, where after they had killed them, every one took his man upon his Back, and moved them off; then they returned, and swimming to cut the Cables of the Ship to make her drive ashore, they hoped also to serve those on board the same Sauce, but as good luck would have it, they had time to lose their Sails and to make ready to put farther off from the Shore.  
On the second we put our Ships into a Careening-Posture, and on the eight Rose's Boat returned to us, and gave an account, that as soon as they had anchored at the Mouth of the River la Acha, they sent a small Canoe with six Englishmen in it ashore, they being of our Crew, and at Peace then with the Spaniards, who agreed with them, that next Morning about Sunrising, they would fire a Gun to give the other notice to come on board to traffic with them; That in the night they had put thirty men ashore to surprise those of the Spaniards that should pass to and fro; But that the Spaniards having discerned the Snare that was laid for them, fired all night, which gave all the Inhabitants the alarm; That next Morning our People fired their Cannon of Signal according to the Agreement, and put out English Colours, but it was to no purpose, for the Spaniards according to all appearance, had no inclination for those Goods they supposed we would trade with them in, so that our Men finding their design had miscarried, weighed Anchor and sailed away to join us.  
As we were of opinion at last that there was no hopes the Patach would pass that way, 
The Freebooters disagree and part.  we held a Council on board our Ship about forming another Design, but not being able to agree with Captain Laurence, (who was owner of two thirds of the Neptune) because he would have imposed upon us; there were fourscore and seven that quitted the Ship and went on board the Prize in which we came from St. Domingo, and so left him on the thirteenth. He weighed and steered his Course thitherward; Captain Michael, and Captain john Rose weighed also, and sailed for Carthagena, and we who were irresolute what way to take, followed the latter.  
On the 25th we had a hard Easterly Breeze, which carried us beyond a River that runs on the Terra-Firma, and is by the Spaniards called Riogrande, where we should have taken in Water which continues sweet within the Sea for three or four Leagues from the Mouth of it, for all it reins so little, and provided you take that which runs on the Superficies. About three of the same day in the Afternoon, we saw our Lady de la Poupla which is also on the Continent, and the 16th anchored at the Isles of St. Bernard, from whence we parted in the Eveninig with three Pirogues only, in order to get to windward of Carthagena, to endeavour to seek us some Provision which they continually carry to that place, and our Design had in effect the desired success.  
We returned on the 18th with seven Pirogues laden with Maes, 
They take some Prizes.  which we made good Prize: By the Spaniards that were in them, we understood, that there were two Galleons at Carthagena, and that the Spanish Flota was at Porto Belo, and that two Ships, one carrying twenty and the other twenty four Guns would quickly put out from thence; but we did not think fit to wait for them, because they could not assign to us any determinate time when they should sail.  
On the twenty second at Noon we weighed, and towards Evening discovered Point Picaron on the Continent, and the Isles of Palmas: About two Hours within the Night we doubled the greatest Point of these Islands. The next Morning, which was the twenty third, we found ourselves separated from Captain Michael and Captain Rose, and then it was we took a Resolution of attempting to cross over the Continent to the end we might get into the South-Sea: In order to which we sailed to the Bay of the Isle d'Or, which is inhabited by the Indians of Sambes, that so we might know of them (who were our Friends) what success the other Freebooters met with, who, we had been told, were gone thither some Months before.  
From the twenty third at Night to the twenty fourth we kept to the Cape, being afraid of entering into the Gulf of Arian, and that Morning by break of Day we made nearer the Shoar, to discover where we were, and upon trial we found it to be a Point of the Wind in that Gulf, which the Currents made us to double.  
Between this Gulf and Cape Matance happened a very remarkable Adventure; 
A strange story of a Spanish Soldier.  we had on board our Ship a Soldier belonging to the Spanish Galleons, whom we had taken to windward of Carthagena, in one of the Pirogues whereof we found the Maes before spoken of, who out of a despair to find himself made a Prisoner, though he was very kindly used, took a Resolution, as appeared by what followed, to throw himself into the Sea, to which end he went five or six times upon Deck without being able to put his Design in execution, and that in all likelihood, out of a secret resistance he found within himself to do it: But at last, after several Attempts, he effected the same, which exciting my Curiosity to inquire into the Circumstances thereof, I found he had put off a Scapulary or kind of Cloak he wore, and laid it under the Carriage of one of our Guns: And what is yet more extraordinary is, that contrary to what usually happens in such cases, the Body which fell down with full force into the Water, floated along time upon the Back by the Ship's side, though to our apprehension he did all he could to drown himself; But when out of Compassion to save his Life we threw out some of our Tackle for him to catch hold on, he not only refused to make use of them, but turned himself upon his Face and plunged to the bottom.  
On the Twenty fifth at Eleven in the Morning we arrived and anchored at the Isle d'Or, or Goldeu Island▪ and at the same time fired a Gun to give the Indian notice of our coming. Then we went ashore, to know what that Flag was we discovered at a distance from us, where we found three Men belonging to Captain Grognier and Captain Lescuier's Crew, who told us, that they had carried there because they would not go with the other Freebooters, who were on their Journey to the South-Sea, under the Conduct of those two Captains, and that as soon as ever they saw us, they had set up that Flag, as a Signal for us to come up to them.  
The Six and twentieth came some Indians with Letters on Board us, which were directed to the first Freebooters that should Anchor in that Road, to give them notice, that they were gone, to the number of an hundred and seventy Men to that Sea, and some small time before them an hundred and fifteen English; Besides which they also set us some Instructions how to demean ourselves towards the Indians through whose Territories we must pass, wherewith w● were fully confirmed in the Project we had already form of undertaking this Expedition: And though we were but fourscore and seven Men, yet we made ourselves ready to be gone. In the mean time some other Indians came also on Board us, by whom we were informed, that Captain Grogniet and Captain Lescuier were still in their Territories, and not yet gone to the South Sea, which made us write to them by one of those two Indians, to let them know that we were coming to them.  
On the Twenty seventh at Noon we saw Captain Mitchel and Captain Rose turn in to the same Port, which made us go presently on Board, to know what made them come in and Anchor in that Road. They told us they had been in Chase of a Spanish Ship named the Hardy come from St. jago on the Coast of Cuba and bound for Carthagena, but not being able to come up with her, they were come into this Port, as being the nighest, to take in Water. Then we shew●● them the Letters we had received, which wrought a Desire in many of them to come and increase our Number, insomuch that an hundred and eighteen Men quitted Mitchel's Ship, and the whole Crew of Captain Rose, being Sixty four Men, who burned their Vessel, when they had paid the Owners the price of it: We were not then for delaying, but on the Twenty ninth quitted our Ships and went ashore, where we encamped to the Number of Two hundred sixty and four Persons; but as to the Ship belonging to our particular Crew we left her in the Hands of Captain Mitchel rather than burn her.   

CHAP. II.  
Our Passage cross the Continent of America, to go to the South-Sea.  
SVnday the first of March, 
The Buccaneers pass over Land to the South-Sea, and other Observations.  in the Year 1685, after we had recommended ourselves to the Almighty's Protection, we set out under the Command of Captain Rose, Captain Picard, and Captain Desmarais, with two Indian Guides, and about forty mor● of that Nation, whom we took along with us for the ease of those who were most burdened amongst us. We could no● travel above three Leagues that day, and emcamped by a Riverside, after we had passed through a Country that presently discovered a terrible Aspect to us and then proved very difficult to travel in, because of the Mountains, Precipices and impenetrable Fore●● whereof it is full: And the Difficulty of our Journey was still the more increased by the great Rains that fell all the next Day. To say nothing, that in our ascending these Mountains which are of a prodigious height, we were clogged with the weight of our Ammunition, Arms, and other Iron-Tools we carried with us: Upon our coming down from these Mountains we got into a Plain, which though it were without any Tracts or Ways, yet appeared very easy unto us, but that we were obliged no less than four and forty times in the space but of two Leagues to cross the same River, which because it ran between ver● slippery Rocks, gave us a great deal of trouble to 〈◊〉 over it, being always in danger of falling.  
On the Fourth we lay in an Indian Carbet, which is a spacious sort of a Lodging, built almost like 〈◊〉 Barn, wherein the People are wont to meet together there we stayed next Day to go a Hunting, where we found great numbers of Deer, and all sorts of Birds: Amongst others we saw a kind of Animal which the Indians call Manipouryes, and we Trefoil because, as they go along, each of their Feet leaves the print of this Simple in the Ground. This Animal is as big as a small Bullock, but his Hair is not so long, and more slick, his Legs are fhort, he has the head of an Ass, but a sharper Nose, and walks in the bottom of the Water as well as on dry Land. They have here also a sort of Hogs, which they call Vents, because of an opening place they have in the form of a Navel upon their Backs. We may farther take notice of those Beasts they call Agoutills and Ovistitills, which both the one and the other of them are very like those Creatures we call Indian Pigs in France, but much bigger. The Monkeys of this Country are almost as big as Sheep, live in Forests, and seldom come down from the Trees, where they always find their Food. They are so hardy, that though you shoot them with a Fusil in the Head, or through both Shoulders, they shall not fall to the Ground, and many times for all you can do, they have so much cunning in their fall, as to twist their Tails, which are very long about a Branch of a Tree, where they hang and waste away, without any possibility of coming at them, because they generally make choice of the tallest Trees for the places of their Retreat.  
I cannot without smiling call to mind what I have done to one of these Animals, which after I had made several shots at him with my Fusil, that carried off part of his Belly, insomuch that his Guts came out, held himself by one of his Paws, or hands (if you will) to the Branch of a Tree, while he put his Entrails with ●he other into that part of his Belly that still remained whole.  
There was another of them whom I shot with a small Bullet cross his Nose, and who finding himself blinded with the Blood that gushed out, had so much industry as to wipe it off with the Leaves of the Tree thereon he stood. Here also we found Harats, which ●re a sort of Birds as big again as Parrots▪ to whom they are very like, even to the note they have: but ●heir Feathers are infinitely more fine, for their Wings ●nd Tail, which is very long, are of so lively and ●right-flaming colour, that you cannot for some time 〈◊〉 your Eye upon them without being dazzled. Here we saw those Fowls called Oecos, which are pretty like unto our Indian Turkey-Hens, but with this difference, that they have a small tuft of Feathers upon their Heads that resembles a Cock's Comb, and a round of yellow about their Eyes; they differ from one another in Colour; the Male's Feathers being inclinable to red, whereas the Female's are blackish, but they are never found asunder. Their Partridges are larger than our Europeans, and their Flesh is whiter but not so good, and their Note is different from ours. As to their Pheasants they are smaller than those in Europe, and their Flesh nothing near so palatable, but their Note is much the same. Besides these, there are in this Country a multitude of other Birds, with whose Names I think it needless to swell this Journal; because as the Islands of America are full of them, there is already an exact account given of them in those Relations that have been made of these Countries, and it's enough that I give a Description of such as are not to be found in these Islands, or of another kind: Yet I shall say this farther, that Lizzards breed here in abundance, and there are different Sizes of them. They are Animals that resemble pretty nearly those whom we call Cayements, of whom I shall have occasion to speak hereafter. Their Flesh is good to eat, and their Eggs, which are as big as Pigeons Eggs, have an excellent taft, and are much better than our Hens Eggs. This hunting-bout was a great Relief to us, against that hunger we had endured, because it was the first repast we had met with since our Journey; but this I reckon nothing in comparison of the miseries which we were to suffer in a vast number of other Adventures.  
At last, after six Days painful and wearisome travelling, even beyond all that can well be imagined we got to the River which the Indians and Spaniard call Boca del Chica, that discharges itself into the South Sea.  
On the seventh the Indians of that place carried 〈◊〉 to see Trees that were proper to make our Canoe● of, in order to get down that River into the South Sea; we presently fell to work upon them with 〈◊〉 Utensils and Iron tools, which we had brought along with us, after we had agreed with the Captains of these Indians for furnishing us in the mean time with Victuals, which consisted in Maes, Potatoes, Banames and Magniot-Roots, till we had done our work, upon condition that we gave them Cloth, Knives, Thread, Needles, Pins, Cissors, Hatchets, Bills, Combs, and such like small Wares, which are in great esteem with them: Though the Savages are not ignorant of the advantage that doth arise to them from these things.  
It was partly with these Toys that we lived, and kept a good Correspondence with them during our Passage through their Country; but what made the Conjuncture still more favourable unto us, was the Resentment they had at that time of the ill usage they had received at the hands of the Spaniards, against whom they were so incensed, that they begged our Assistance to be revenged on them. And had it not been for this, it would have been a very difficult task for us, if not impossible, to cross their Country against their will, not only because of their Numbers, which made them infallibly much stronger than we, but also by reason of the many Forests, and difficult Passages their Country's encumbered with, which we could not have gone through without we had some of themselves for our Guides. But for all this, we did not think ourselves so safe amongst these Men, but that we kept continually upon our Guard, because we were well assured they were such Wretches, as were at the Service always of those that gave them most; and that though they appeared one minute to be our Friends, they might become the next the Spaniards, who are nearer Neighbours to them. Their treacherous Dealings have proved fatal to some Freebooters, who have put too much confidence in them, when a small number of them passing through their Country, these People gave notice thereof to the Spaniards, and that they might give an exact account of their Number, they took them ●n a defile, and as they marched along, they put a Corn of Maes into a Callabass for every man that passed by, and when they had done, carried the Callabass to the Enemy, who thereupon took their Measures accordingly.  
There is no sign of Religion, or of the Knowledge of God amongst them; they holding that they have Communion with the Devil, and in short, when they would know any thing, they spend the Night in the Woods in order to consult him; and they sometimes foretold as some things, that have been true in the event in every particular Circumstance of the relation they had given us. They lead a wand'ring and vagabond Life, and fix their abode in no certain place. They generally erect their Ajoupas or Barracks upo● a Riverside, where they continue till they have spe●● what Sustenance they find thereabouts; and whe● that is done, they go and do the same thing upon another River, and in this manner spend the term 〈◊〉 their miserable Lives. They go naked, except it be that they cover a part of their Privities with a bit 〈◊〉 Silver or Gold that is made like a Candle-Extinguisher, and were I but satisfied that they had eve● seen such a thing, I should think they took their mode● from it.  
When they feast, or hold other solemn Meetings they put on a Cotton-Robe all of one Piece, and 〈◊〉 usual with them, in a vaunting manner, to have 〈◊〉 bit of Gold or Caracoly of an Oval Form, hanging 〈◊〉 their Nose, which is bored through, and with th●● they think themselves as fine as any in the World▪ As for the Womenkind, they cover themselves from the Wast downwards with an Herb or Cotton Cloth which they make themselves, and that they may appear ●iner, they colour their Faces with Rocou, which is a small Grain that dies a brown-red.  
On the twenty third, as we had finished the building of our Canoes, we had News brought us by a● Indian, who was returned from conducting the one hundred and fifteen English afore spoken of to the South Sea, whither they were gone before us; that they had taken, under the Command of Townsley their Captain, two Ships laden with Provision, coming from 〈◊〉. He brought along with him a Man of Captain Groignict's Crew, who was lost in the Woods a hun●ting, while his Comrades were making their Canoes i● the same River where we were building ours.  
On the twenty eighth we received News again by an Indian Captain, who had conducted Captain Groigniet, and Captain Esurier into the South-Sea, in a Letter which they sent us, that they would stay for us at Kings-Islands, and desired us to lose no time, but to come and have our share in taking of the Fleet of Peru, which they waited for▪ But for all the Expedition we could use, our Conoes' could not be finished before the last of March, when we drew them into the River.  
April the first we parted with fourteen Canoes carrying about twenty Oars apiece, guided by twenty Indians, who made use of this opportunity in order to participate of the Booty which they thought we were about to take from the Spaniards, as soon as ever we got into the South-Sea.  
We rested on the fourth to tarry for our Men, who were behind, and to mend our Canoes that were damnified by the Rocks and Flats we met with all along that River. It cannot be believed what pains we had to bring them to the great Water (as I may call it) for we met with places where they rested dry, so that we were in a manner forced to carry them. This day died one of our Men of the Bloody Flux, which was very rife amongst us, because we were forced to fast so long, and by reason of the hard Feeding we had, and our continual dabbling in the Water.  
On the fifth we put on, and about Evening found the River deeper, but so full of, and encumbered with Trees, which the Floods had carried thither, that our Canoes were in danger every Minute to be lost; and this day died two of our Men.  
On the sixth we got to the great Water, where the River is wider and deeper, and that day we spent on the Banks of it to dry our Sacks, which were wet through with the great Rains that fell the day before; another of our Men died this day.  
From hence to the eleventh we did all we could to get quickly to the Mouth of the River, 
Good news of Provision sent them by the other Freebooters.  where we were informed by an Indian, that was come in a small Vessel to meet us, the English and French Freebooters had sent a shore in a little Bay called Boca del Chica (that stands at the Mouth of that River) some Corn for our Refreshment, when we should get down thither; for they could gather very well by themselves, who had been so straitened there for Provision, whereabouts we must be, and indeed we had so little, that we were reduced to an handful of Raw Maes for each Man a day.  
The same Day we received farther News, and by other Indians, who gave our Guides notice to tell us that a thousand Spaniards being informed of our Descent, mounted up along this River by Land with a design to lay an Ambuscade for us: Hereupon we resolved not to stir, but in the nighttime, and that without noise, that so we might shun them, and this succeeded accordingly. But we fell into another encumbrance; and that was, we being Strangers in th●● Country, and knowing no more than our Guides how high the Tide flowed in this River, we were surprised with the coming in of it, and drove ou● Canoes and us very far, so that one of them was overset with a great Tree that had fallen into the River, and upon which the swiftness of the current threw it, but it luckily fell out that no one was drowned; they quitted it for the Arms and Ammunition that were lost; which could not but wo●● some trouble in us, to see our Men disarmed in 〈◊〉 Country, where we could not go, but must have much occasion to use them; but to deliver us 〈◊〉 this Inquietude, God was pleased to dispose of some of us, who left their Arms to those that had lost their own.  
When we were got clear of these Dangers, our Guides advised us to row gently, 
They escape the Spaniards.  for fear the Indian-Spaniards, who were our Enemies, should hear us▪ and who lay in wait to attack us, some League's th●● side the Mouth of the River, in a place called Lestocads▪ we took their Council and when we were got over against the said place, where the River is very broad we disposed of our Canoes in such a manner, that by the favour of the night they appeared to be much less than they really were. Now these Indian-Spaniard● having some Glimpse of us, asked who was there, and our Guides having answered, That what they saw, wa● nought but a few Boats belonging to them, with which they were going to fetch Salt into the South-Sea; by this wile we were spared the labour of engaging with those Rascals.  
On the twelfth in the Morning we cast Anchor, because the Tide came in, and was against us, and about ten made ready, but towards Noon the Heavens were overcast to that degree, that you could scarce see a Man from one end of a Canoe to the other, and this was followed with such excessive Rains, that we were afraid every Minute of being sunk, though we employed two men in each Canoe continually to throw out the Water; and during that time one of our Men died.  
The same Day at Midnight we got to the Mouth of the River, and entered into the South-Sea, 
Arrive in the South-Sea.  from whence we made directly for the Bay of Boca del Chi●a to see for the Provision which we were told was there, and which we found accordingly; but before this, we met with a Canoe of Captain Grogniet that waited for us, and two Barks at Anchor. They had been purposely sent by the English, both to tow our Canoes to the place where the Fleet of Freebooters were, and to bring us more Provision.  
On the thirteenth in the Morning we carried our Sick on board them two Barks for their better Accommodation, and then weighed Anchor, in order to sail altogether to an Island four Leagues distant from the Mouth of that River, where we refreshed ourselves for two days with the Provision the English had sent us, which was a mighty comfort to us.  
On the sixteenth we went off in order to find out the English and French Fleet, whose Rendezvous was to cruise either before Panama, or at the King's Islands which were not far from this River.  
We arrived at those Islands on the eighteenth, which stand thirty Leagues to the East of Panama, where we found the largest of them, to look more like the Continent than an Island, so spacious and mountainous it is: The same is inhabited by those Negroes whom they call Marons or Fugitives from the Spaniards, who upon making their escapes from their Masters at Panama▪ and the adjacent places have made this a place of Refuge. This day one of our 〈◊〉 died.  
We entered into this Sea at a very bad time, for about this height, there are some Years wherein it reins every day for the space of six Months and we happened to come thither exactly at such a Season.  
I should think it would have been proper in this place, before I proceeded to give a relation of our Adventures, to give a large and exact Description of the South-Sea, and this fourth part of the World, with which it is washed, and to set forth the Longitude and Latitude of the Places; But as 'tis my design to write of nothing but what was transacted by us there, 〈◊〉 that this Country is well enough discovered by the Geographical Charts that have been made of it, 〈◊〉 the Reader when he has occasion to be informed herein, have recourse to them. I shall content my 〈◊〉 with taking notice only, that all the Continent th●● respects the South-Sea, stands East and West, and most of the Islands North and South of it; and that 〈◊〉 runs from East to Southeast, to South and South-West▪ and from the West, to West North-West, and to the North-West.  
The Spaniards are the only Foreigners that possess these Countries, 
The South Sea described.  since the unjust Usurpation they have made of them from the Aboriges, over whom they made themselves Masters by such tyrannical and 〈◊〉 Methods as have been heard of throughout the World▪ They have good Towns upon the Seaside, which reach from the height of the Islands of Dom-Fernardez, that are situated at the Mouth of the Gulf of Magellan, or rather from Chily to the middle of a straight that is between the Terra Firma and the Isles of C●lynfornia, which the Spaniards call Mar-Berm●s● through which it's believed, a Communication may be had between the Northern and Southern Sea▪ without going about by the Straight of Anien; the chief of these Towns begin from the South, and 〈◊〉 A●rica, Sagna, Nasca, Pacha●ama, Lima, Cidade do 〈◊〉 R●yes the Port of Callao which is the place of embarking for this last, and where the King of Spain's Ships anchor; that is the Fleet of Peru, Truxillo, Paita Q●eaquilla, ●a Barbacoa, which is an open Mine from whence the Spaniards get a great deal of Gold, Panama, Realeguo, Tecoantepequa, Acapulco, and several others, that are as well Maritine as Inland Places.  
It's above ten Years since the Spaniards, who dwell on all this Continent, have not known what War was. Here they lived in a profound Tranquillity, and Fire-Arms was hardly in any use amongst them; but since the time that we found out a way to go and visit them, they brought the English from jamaica amongst them. But though they have a pretty many of them at present there, yet the Sequel of this Discourse will show that they are not much more warlike for all that than they were before: But the White Indians that inhabit a part of Chily, have been always their Enemies, and these are a People of prodigious bulk and Tallness, who almost infest them with continual War, and when they happen to take any of them, they take off the plate of their Breasts, as we do by a Tortoise, and cut out their Hearts.  
On the twenty second, which was Easter-day, their Fleet, who were gone before us into these Seas, arrived at the King's Isles where we were; they consisted of eight fail, which, together with the two Barks, they had sent to wait for our Arrival, made up in all ten Vessels. Of which take the following Account.  
The first served as Admiral, and was a Frigate carrying 36 Guns, 
A List of the Buccaneers Fleet and Commanders.  commanded by one Captain David.  
The next was instead of Vice-Admiral, had 16 Guns, and was under the command of one whose Name was Sammes.  
The third and fourth were two Ships commanded by Captain Townsley.  
The fifth was a Ship that could have carried thirty Guns but had none, and was commanded by Captain Groigniet.  
The sixth was a small Ship commanded by Bra●dy.  
The eighth was a long Bark commanded by a Quartermaster, with a Detachment of Men drawn out of the Fleet.  
And the ninth and tenth were the two Barks that came to meet us, whereof the one was commanded by Peter Henry, and the other by a Quartermaster.  
Of all these Commanders, Captain Grogniet was the only Frenchman, all the rest being Englishmen, except David, who was a Fleming. As to the whole number of our Men, they were computed at about eleven hundred, when they divided into two Fleets: It remains therefore now that I should say, according to the Information I have received from all that were engaged in this Enterprise, how all these Ships fell into their Hands, by what means, and at what time they came into this Sea.  
In pursuance therefore to the order before observed, I am to declare, 
A brief account of the English Adventures in these Seas hitherto.  that the English were the Owners of our Admiral, who in the Year 1682 on the Coast of St. Domingo, surprised a long Bark belonging to a French Captain, whose Name was Tristan, who was then with some of his Ships Crew ashore, waiting for a fair Wind to sail together, to make War upon the Spaniards by Commission from Monsieur Povansay, who was then Governor of that Island. The English, who was superior in strength, drove the French out of the Bark, with which they sailed to the Isle de la Torttille, whither a great many Ships go every Year to take in Salt. The next thing they did, was to take a Dutch Ship▪ on which they went all on board, and sailed afterward to the Coast of Guinee, where they took several Prizes more; but they reserved none of them save the Dutch Ship, which served as Admiral, and wherein they sailed, when we left the South-Sea, and was supposed to have been a Ship belonging to Hamburg. These English became Pirates under the Conduct of a Captain of their own▪ and grew so notoriously wicked by a great many odious Actions, performed not only towards Strangers, but even those of their own Nation, when they met with any of them, that to avoid being chased, which they would infallibly have been, they passed from the North to the South-Sea, by the Straight of Magellan.  
They kept company for about eight Months with a little Frigate of eighteen Guns, which they met with there in a short time after their Arrival, and whose Crew consisted of English, French and Flemings: But their good Correspondence with the Corsair was of no long Duration, for happening to have some difference with him, as he was one Morning giving the other the good Morrow, according to the English Mode, he saw all his Crew come upon Deck; whereupon the little Frigate, who sailed much better than the Pirate came up with him, and having brought all his Guns to bear, gave him a broadside, accompanied with a Volley of small Shot, and then bore away, having slain the Captain and twenty of his Men, in whose stead the rest of the Crew chose David beforementioned.  
That little Frigate of sixteen Guns, got into the South-Sea some time after the other, as also by the same Straight of Magellan. I was told by one of the Engineers on board her, that she belonged to his Royal Highness the Duke of York, and that under pretence of coming to treat with the Spaniards, she was sent upon no other account, than to take a Plan of those parts, the Situation of the Cities and Seaports. Now Captain David meeting with her, made Captain Suams come on board him, and threatened to take him, unless he would go and make Wa● with him; so that finding himself too weak to resist, he chose rather to comply with the Pirate, than be taken; and these two together took a great many Prizes, which, after they had taken out what was for their turn, they burned.  
About a Year after, Captain Townsley came over▪ Land with an hundred and fifteen English into these Seas, and at the King's Islands took two Ships laden with Provision and other Refreshments, whereof I have already spoken, coming from Peru.  
About a Month after, the Captains Groigniet and l' Escuier went also thither over Land with two hundred and seventy Men, and who, being informed that the English Fleet was before Panama, put ashore one night at Tavoga, an Island two Leagues off from whence they discerned a Ship on Fire, and by break of day they saw the English under fail They went on board them, and came to understand, that Captain David had taken a Ship called the Saint Rose, laded with Corn and Wine, bound from Truxillo for Panama; the Precedent of which last place had sent to him for to buy her, and in order thereunto, gave him the meeting at the Isles of Pericos, that are a League's distance from the Port. But instead of sending him the Money they had agreed upon for the Ship, he sent a Fireship to burn him, but the same, through the Cowardice and Ignorance of the Commander, spent herself without doing the other any hurt; and this made Captain David give the Saint Rose to Groignie and to l' Escuier's Ships Crew, who had already lost their Captain.  
As for the other five Ships commanded by Brands, Samely, Peter Henry, and two Quarter-Masters, they had been also taken from the Spaniards i● these Seas by the two first Frigates, who reserved them for those who came thither over Land. 〈◊〉 of all our Ships, there were none but the first two that had Guns, the other eight had none, they h●ving been Merchant Ships, that made use of no●● in the South-Sea, where no body but themselves had sailed a long time. And now having told you what passed before this Fleet came together; we shall now proceed to give an Account of our Adventures since our Junction.  
On the twenty fifth of April we took an Advice-Boat going to the Fleet of Peru, which was then 〈◊〉 Anchor in the Port of Callao, that was carrying some Packets from Madrid to Panama, and Letters from the Viceroy of Lima, wherein there was an account given how many Men of War, Fireships and Merchantmen the Fleet consisted of, and about what time the same might arrive at Panama. Next day we examined the Commander of the Advice-Boat, but we could get no particulars out of him, saving, that when he saw himself like to be taken, he had thrown the King of Spain's Packets, and a Cascet of Jewels overboard.  
On the twenty seventh we put the same Questions to the Pilot, who, according to the Example of his Commander, would make no Discovery, because they had taken an Oath together, rather to lose their Lives than to divulge any secret, or to let the said Packet fall into the hands of the Freebooters. On the 28th two of our Men died.  
On the Evening of the same day, 
Geeeks here, who they are.  we departed with two and twenty Canoes manned with five hundred men, in order to go and take la Seppa, which is a small Town seven Leagues to windward of Panama; and on the twenty ninth about ten in the Morning we discovered two Ships bearing up to us, which when they came near, we found to be two Pirogues manned with Greeks, which are a People composed of divers Nations, to whom the Spaniards gave this Name, and who serve them in their Wars. These they brought some time before from the North Sea to this Coast, to defend them against us, because they look upon them to be better Soldiers than themselves. We presently sent out two of our best sailing Canoes manned with twenty Men each to attack them. These Greeks▪ who quickly took us to be really what we were, i. e. Freebooters, made no delay to save themselves upon one of the Islands that stands in the Bay of Panama; but upon their going ashore, they lost one of their Pirogues, that split in Pieces, and left us the other; then they got upon a rising Ground, with their Arms, and as much Ammunition as they could save, and fought stiffly against us under a Flag of Defiance. And as the place where we landed, was exposed to their Fire from the Ground where they had posted themselves, and that the Ascent on that side where we stood was very difficult, 
Beaten by the Freebooters.  we were forced to take a great round to come at them another way, where we found our Passage much easier. At 〈◊〉 after we had fought at least for the space of an 〈◊〉 we constrained them to flee for shelter into the Woo●● took two of them Prisoners, besides their Colour and found between five and twenty and thirty sla●● upon the Spot.  
We were informed by the two Prisoners, th●● those who had escaped, could not be above an hundred men at most, that we might easily maste● them if we pleased, there being many wounded amongst them: They also told us, that they hi● an Account at Panama of a Re-inforcement th● was come from the North-Sea to the Fleet of Freebooters; That the Precedent of the Town had there upon sent an Advice-Boat to Lima, to engage the Viceroy to detain the Merchant Ships in Port, 〈◊〉 further order, and with all speed to send a Fleet 〈◊〉 Men of War to fight ours, and drive us out of those Seas: But the relation given by these two Prisoner we could not rely upon, since their Party had put 〈◊〉 a Flag of Defiance, they being three times the number of us.  
After this Advantage, 
The Buccaneers take Seppa.  and our rejoining the rest 〈◊〉 our Canoes, we continued to prosecute our design upon la Seppa; But as we were obliged before we could come at it to go about two Leagues up a very fine and large River of the same Name, and on who●e Banks they have Vigies or Sentinels always set, we could not choose but be discovered, and find the Town alarmed and ready to defend itself: Yet for all that, we fell furiously on, and too●● it with the loss only of one Man; but finding no great matter of Booty there, because they had saved most of their Effects, we returned to our Canoes again.  
As I shall have frequent occasion to make mention of the Word Vigie, it will not be improper in this place to take notice, that by Vigier is no other thing meant, than to set a Sentinel upon Land or Sea, and those who are thus set, they call Vigies. The Spaniards maintain a great number of them for all their Cities, Towns, and Villages; and even single Houses have Persons on purpose, whom they send to all the rising ground round about, and River-sides, where they have their Horses ready Night and Day, so that as soon as they discover an Enemy, they hasten to give the Spaniards notice of it; who forthwith prepare themselves not to fight. but to save their Effects.  
On the first of May we rejoined our Ships, who ●aited for us at a very pretty Island, called Sippilla, about a League distant from the Mouth of the River la Seppa, which makes up a kind of Canal, that forms the Bay of Panama, and do as it were, make a Bar all along, that divides the Channel into two parts, one to the East and the other to the West. Those Pleasures we met with ●n these parts, justly deserve a Remembrance, whereof I shall give a little Description in this place.  
I say then, 
A Description of the Islands in the Bay of Panama.  that all these Islands are so curious and delightful, that they are usually called the Gardens of Panama, and with very good reason, seeing all People of Note in that City, have each of them one of these Islands for themselves, and their Houses of Pleasure there also, with curious Orchards, watered with a great many Springs of running Waters, adorned and imbelished with a wonderful Variety of Flowers and Arbours of Jessamine up and down, and full almost of an infinite number of all sorts of the Fruits of the Country, among whom I have taken particular notice of four of them which are called Sappota, Sappotilla, Avocata, and las Cayemites.  
The first is a Fruit almost like unto our Pears, 
The Fruits growing there described.  of a different Size, whose Rind is Greenish, and contains in the midst thereof, two Kernels of an oval Form, appearing pretty polished and sleek, and are each of them, in the largest of these Fruits, somewhat bigger than an ordinary Nut: When this Fruit ●t ripe, it is very soft, and when the Paring is taken off, the Pulp is of a pure red Colour, very sweet, and of an admirable Tast.  
The second is of the same form as the other, but no bigger than a Russet Pear: It has an admirable taste, and under the Rind is of a whitish Colour.  
The third is of the same form as our Quinc●● saving that the Ri●d is greener: This fruit must be fully ripe, and very soft before it becomes good Food; and than it is that you find the Pulp of 〈◊〉 as white as Snow: The Spaniards eat it with Spoon as we do Cream, and indeed the taste thereof is mostly the same.  
The fourth is like a large Damason, and very savoury.  
Besides these and a great many more, when with this Country is peculiarly blessed; it produc●● also a great many of those Fruits that are commo● to Europe, as Apricocks, Pomegranates, Goyav● Juniper, Cocoe, Bananes, Figs of Provence, French and Spanish Melons, all sorts of Oranges, Citro●● and Lemmons, of which I shall give no Description no more than of the Trees that bear them; But those who would satisfy their Curiosity herein, may 〈◊〉 it in reading the History of the Antilles writ●● by Monsieur de Rochefort, in the Year 1668, 〈◊〉 was skilled therein, and gives a very good Account of them. All these rich Presents of Fruits and pure Water, of which Nature made us an offer in the●● Islands, were a wonderful Relief to us, after those Fatigues we had undergone in our Passage over th●● Continent: To say nothing of the plentiful Harve●● we had of Maes and Rice, wherewith we found these Islands covered, and which the Spaniards, I believe, did not sow with an intention we should enjoy them▪ But these same Islands that afforded us so many delights, wrought also afterwards some sorrow in us, 〈◊〉 which by and by.  
On the eighth of May in the Morning we sailed away, and passed by the old and new City of Panama; the old one was that taken by General Morga● in the Year 1670, whose Churches and Houses seemed to us to be finely built, as far as we could judge of them at such a Distance; there is none but the● new Town that is fortified, being defended with 〈◊〉 good Wall and several other Works, but that is only to the Seaward. This City is attended with an Inconveniency, that as it is situated at the bottom 〈◊〉 a Bay, and that the Sea ebbs very much in th●● Country, great Ships are left dry there, if they anchor nearer than a League to the place: We got as ●igh it as we could with our Colours and Streamers lose, and from thence went to anchor at Tavoga, which appeared to us, as if it were a little enchanted Island, so agreeable and delightful are those Houses and Gardens that are upon it.  
On the ninth we ca●lked all our Ships, and next day sent out our long Bark to cruise, in order to give us notice when the Spanish Fleet appeared in sight of us; and on the thirteenth we made choice of these Ships that should engage it. Captain David and Captain Grogniet were to board the Spanish Admiral, Captain Suam and Captain Townsley the Vice-Admiral, Captain Peter Henry and one of Townsley's Prizes, ●he Patach; our Fireship was to keep herself under the Quarter of our Admiral. Our other Ships were to attack the rest of their Fleet according to their Strength, and our armed Pirogues were to keep off the Enemy's Fireships.  
We heard this day a great many Cannon fired at Panama, the cause whereof we could not guests at; ●nd on the fourteenth we put ashore upon this I●●and of Tavoga forty Prisoners, who were very cum●●ersom to us, and then weighed to go wait for the 〈◊〉 at Cape Pin: But this was much out of Sea●●, since the Fleet, who was willing to spare us this Trouble, as well as that of attacking her, was already, without our knowing of it, arrived at Panama; having got in under the Covert of one of those pleasant Islands, through one of the two Channels which I said was form by them, and which hid ●hem from us while we cruised in the other Chan●el, through which we thought they would have ●●iled.  
As we knew nothing hitherto of this matter, 〈◊〉 that upon the return of our long Bark, she told 〈◊〉, she had discovered no Ships pass, we went and ●●hor'd at Kings-Islands, where the whole Fleet 〈◊〉 the usual Oath, that we would not wrong one ●●other to the value of a Piece of Eight, in case God 〈◊〉 pleased to give us the Victory over the Spaniards. 〈◊〉 the seventeenth one of our Men died.  
On the nineteenth we weighed and anchored between the great Island, and those in the East Channel, through which we thought the Fleet we expected would pass. On the twenty eighth another 〈◊〉 our Men died. Next day we made ready, a●● sailed for Cape Pin. On the thirty first we ga●● chase to two ships, whom we lost in the night, a●● which brought us back in the pursuit of them to the little Islands of Panama, where we anchored on the first of june; and the same Day we surprised tw● Greeks upon the Island, where we had beaten them when we went to take la Seppa.  
On the fourth we sent two Canoes to the Isle 〈◊〉 Sipilla, to endeavour to take some Prisoners, th● we might learn some News from them. There th●● took a Ship laden with Board's, which the Spaniar●● were carrying to Panama to build two Pirogues ●●stead of those we had taken. The Men told 〈◊〉 that their Fleet was got into Panama on the twel●● of May: That on the thirteenth they fired off a gre●● many Guns for Joy, and that as soon as they we●● refreshed, carreened, and manned, they would 〈◊〉 out to fight us, and would be ready in a sho●● time.  
On the seventh at Noon, 
They fight the Spanish Fleet.  Captain Groigniet, 〈◊〉 had anchored sarther from the Island than 〈◊〉 gave us a Signal, that he descried the Spanish Fleet consisting of seven sail; and this he did by lowering and raising his Flag seven times: We also 〈◊〉 our part made ready, and in doubling the point 〈◊〉 the Island where we had anchored, we discover●● seven great Ships coming up towards us, with a blo●●dy Flag in the Stern, and a Royal one on the Masts. Now it was that the hopes which our Cre●● had lost, when they understood the Fleet was 〈◊〉 into Panama, revived again, and the desire the had to enrich themselves at the others Cost, 〈◊〉 mated them to that degree, that most of them thr●● their Hats into the Sea, as thinking they had 〈◊〉 Spaniards already in hold. We put our Ships in ●●der, and then disputed the Wind with them, which was at that time got to the West. About three 〈◊〉 the Afternoon we all, except Captain Groigniet, 〈◊〉 the Weather-Gage of them, and he failed, because he waited for the coming up of his Canoe from the Shoar, and cast about twice. Our Admiral finding himself to Windward of the Spanish Vice-Admiral, who was separated from his own Admiral, gave us the Signal to follow him for to board him; in order to which, we lengthened our Spritsail, but our Vice-Admiral took in his Flag, as a Token he would defer the Engagement till next Morning, hoping that Groigniet would get the Weather-Gage in the Night: Towards Sunsetting the Spanish Vice-Admiral, who was to Leeward of us, saluted us with seven Guns without Ball, which was answered by our Admiral with a whole Broadside with Ball. But Night coming on, the Spaniards cast anchor, being better acquainted than we with the Currents ●hat run between these Islands, and they sent a small Vessel, that carried the Lantern, to anchor two Leagues to Leeward of us, in order to amuse and ●ause us to take false measures; And indeed we lay by all Night, that we might next Morning be to Windward of the Lantern, which we took to be the whole Fleet.  
On the eighth early in the Morning, we discovered our Error, and were all of us strangely amazed ●o find ourselves to Leeward of the Enemy's Fleet, except Captain Groigniet's Ship, and that of Captain Townsley, and his Prize which were to Windward: but it unhappily so fell out, that they were ●hips without Cannon: The Spanish Fleet having ●●st anchor again an Hour after Sunrising, we did 〈◊〉 we could to get the Weather-Gage, but their Vice-Admiral, who had his Anchor apeak, and his ●●ils but very slighty furled, quickly plied to the ●ind, which proving favourable to him, he bore immediately upon our Admiral. Our Vice-Admiral 〈◊〉 all he could to come to his Assistance, for the Spanish Guns had already incommoded him very much; ●ut his coming up, obliged the Enemy's Ship to bear 〈◊〉 to Windward, which we endeavoured to gain 〈◊〉 that day, though to no purpose; while the Spa●●ards in the mean while, under whose Cannon we ●●und ourselves, mauled us terribly, and this made our Admiral and Vice-Admiral to keep close together, and to resolve to die valiantly fight, rather than suffer any one Ship of the Fleet to be taken, though they could both of them have saved themselves if they pleased, they being much better Sailors tha● the Spaniards.  
Captain Townsley towards the Afternoon being to Windward of the Enemy's Fleet, sent his Pirogue on board our Admiral, to receive his Orders, while he that commanded it, had both his Legs shot off by a Cannon Ball. About two the Spaniards sent ou● a Ship of eight and twenty Guns to hinder Captain Groigniet to join us, as understanding by some Sp●niards, who had been our Prisoners, that he was the strongest in small Arms of any in our Fleet, and that they were so much the more fearful of him when they came to know his Crew consisted 〈◊〉 Frenchmen. At last finding ourselves towards Evening much battered with their Cannon (for the Spaniards would not come to boarding) we veered 〈◊〉 the favour of a Gale of Wind, to go and boa● the Spanish Vice-Admiral, that was the best Sail● and did us most harm: But we were no sooner u● moored, than that the Wind came about, which 〈◊〉 us much Damage, for we were just come upon 〈◊〉 Enemies Ship, who not observing the Wind, 〈◊〉 which we sailed, bore still upon us, so far, 〈◊〉 when we returned the second time, she was so 〈◊〉 us, that she was constrained to furl the end of 〈◊〉 main Sail, for fear of bringing her Foremast up●● our Counter, and this made us put out our Ca●●● which were upon the Tow that we might go bette● and in this manner we defended ourselves till Ni●●● approached.  
Peter Henry's Ship, wherein I was, having 〈◊〉 above an hundred and twenty Cannon 〈◊〉 was forced to make the best of her way, which 〈◊〉 Admiral and Vice-Admiral perceiving, they put 〈◊〉 Pirogues under sail, which they had all along 〈◊〉 to Windward during the Fight, in order to ●●tend us, because they saw we were in an ill con●●tion. The Enemy observing our working, sent 〈◊〉 of their small Ships in pursuit of us, but as we 〈◊〉 back upon her, she gave us eighteen Guns, and rejoined their own Fleet.  
Our Long Bark, having, during the Action, been sorely handled; her Crew was forced to leave her, and not having time to sink her, threw some Guns, which our Admiral had put on board her, into the Sea, and then saved themselves on board of one of our other Ships. Now the Spanish Prisoners, who we left behind, finding they were now at Liberty, plied to put themselves into the hands of the Spanish Admiral, but he taking this Bark for our Fireship, sunk her with his Cannon before she came near him, not thinking their own People were on board her.  
On the ninth we could see neither our own nor the Spanish Fleet, which made us steer for the Isle St. john de Cueblo, four and twenty Leagues to the West of Panama, where, by the favour of an Easterly Breeze, we arrived on the fourteenth; we ran ourselves presently ashore, and it was high time, for we had all along from the time of the Fight, five Foot of Water in the Hold: We lost no time to put ourselves in a condition to get up again before Panama, that we might know what became of our Fleet, about which we were in great pain, which we were put out of on the six and twentieth, when we saw them coming to an Anchor in the same place where we were, who told us they did not fight any more after our Departure from them. That the Spanish Fleet upon the ninth in the Evening, had anchored within Cannon Shot of ours, and that both the one and the other having made ready on the tenth, the Spaniards sailed away for the Port of Panama; that Captain David had been hard plied by the Spanish Cannon, especially with two Shots that carried off half his Rudder, but that he had no more than six of his Ships Crew wounded, and only one killed; that Captain Sammes was no less put to it, that almost all his Poop was swept off, that he had received several Shots between Wind and Water, that his Mate had his Head shot off with a Cannon Ball, and that he had no more than three Men wounded: And that in short, the other lesser Vessels had lost never a Man, and had but very few wounded. Here I may truly say, and without exasperating the matter, that it was a strange thing and next to a Miracle, that we, who were so few in number, and had such pitiful Ships of our own, should be able to bear the Fire of, withstand and fight so considerable a Fleet, in comparison of our own, consisting of such good Ships, and manned so well as that of the Spaniards was, whose Admiral was a Vessel of seventy Guns, though she had but fifty six mounted, because she was too old. Their Vice-Admiral had forty, though she was bored to carry sixty Guns; she was a very fine Ship and an excellent Sailor, but also old. The Patach was a Vessel of forty Guns, though she had no more than eight and twenty mounted. The Conserve had eighteen Guns, but was built as well as the Patach, to carry forty. The other three were almost as big; besides they had the advantage o● Fireships, on board of which they had planted Cannon, to the end that we might not take the● to be really what they were, and that so they might come near, and the more easily surprise us, than 〈◊〉 we were aware of them.  
If we had met with this Fleet, as we were in hope we should, before they got an addition of streng●● in Panama; or that we had had but only the Win● of them when we attacked them, I do not question but things would have appeared with another fa●● than now they did, and that we should have posse●● ourselves of their Ships to bring us back through the Straits with Wealth enough to live at ease, whi●●●ould have freed us all at once, after a continue Succession of Fatigues and Troubles, which w● were forced to go through for three Years longer, 〈◊〉 well in those Places, as in our return over Land 〈◊〉 the North Sea, but Divine Providence had otherwise ordered it.  
On the twenty ninth we parted from the Isle 〈◊〉 St. john, to the number of three hundred Men 〈◊〉 five Canoes, in order to go and surprise the Tow● of Pueblo Nuevo, that was six Leagues off, thinking we should get some Provision there, whereof now 〈◊〉 began to be in need. Being landed on the thi●● first, we took a Sentinel, but another escaped, which was the occasion of our being discovered. We were obliged, in order to get at this Town, to go up a very fine River two Leagues, and to make use of the flowing of the Tide for that purpose; Before we came at it, we found a Retrenchment made for its Security, but ill guarded. The Town is none of the best situated, though it stands upon the Riverside, being surrounded every way with Marshes: We found neither People nor Victuals there, and so we left it on the third of july; and next day as we returned with our Canoes to rejoin our Fleet, we gave Chase to a Bark, which we took, and on the fifth we got to our Ships.  
The English and we had a difference in the Descent we made upon this Town, 
The English and French fall out and part.  for they being more numerous than we, would take the advantage of us, and be Masters of the whole, and that so far, that Captain Townsley would have taken Captain Groigniet's Ship away, which Captain David had given him, and give him his own for her: But as he found he had to do with men, who though inferior in number, would not tamely be thus put upon, he was forced to give over his Pretensions; Yet we finding still that they continued to pretend to the same Dominion over us, we separated ourselves from them to the number of an hundred and thirty Frenchmen without reckoning Captain Groigniet's Crew, who were two hundred more, and after having banded ourselves apart, we landed upon the Island.  
One of the chief reasons that made us disagree, was their Impiety against our Religion, for they made no Scruple when they got into a Church, to cut down the Arms of a Crucifix with their Sabres, or to shoot them down with their Fusils and Pistols, bruising and maiming the Images of the Saints with the same Weapons in Derision to the Adoration we Frenchmen paid unto them. And it was chiefly from these horrid Disorders, that the Spaniards equally hated us all, as we ●●me to understand by divers of their Letters that sell into our Hands, which I have got rendered into French, as may be seen by and by.  
On the ninth the English weighed, and came to anchor about five or six Leagues to Leeward of the place where we were building our Canoes, to fit up others for themselves in Lieu of those they had lost as well as we, during the Fight with the Spanish Fleet. We laid out for Trees fit for our purpose, and to that end went into a Wood, which in these parts grows near to the Sea, of which we chose the largest, which commonly are those Trees called Mapou and Acajou, and are withal very tender and easy to be wrought, among them we found some so large, that the single Trunk, after being hew● and made hollow, could carry fourscore Men.  
While we were buil●●● our Canoes, a Centinel, whom we had set on a very high Tree growing on the Seaside in our Island, as well for discovering, le●● the English, who knew we were employed about our Canoes, should come to take away our Ship, as to observe if any Spanish Ship should sail between the main Land and the Island whereon we were, came to tell us on the fifteenth, that he saw a Ship out at Sea, steering South-West and by West, which put us presently upon making ready to come up with her: We found her to be a small Vessel commanded by Captain Willnet an Englishman, whose Cre● consisted of forty English and eleven Frenchmen, 〈◊〉 whom we had never heard any thing till now: B● they told us, they had a long time ago passed o●● I and into these Seas, and that lately they had take● a Ship laden with Corn out of the Port of Sansonne which is on the Continent, and the place of embarking from Guatimala, thirty Leagues to the East o● the Isle of St. john, and that going from thence towards the South-Coast, they understood that th● Viceroy of Lima had sent a Spanish Fleet on purpose to chase and beat the Freebooters, which ga●● them to understand there were others besides th●● in these Seas; and that upon the good News th●● were come in quest of us, in order to have a share 〈◊〉 taking of that Fleet, which they believed infallible but that they understood, when they came befo●● Panama, where they were in hopes to meet with 〈◊〉 that the fight was already over, and that we we●● gone to the Isle of St. john: The other English, who, as I have already said, were gone to anchor about five or six Leagues to Windward of us, had also sent out a Canoe to know what this Bark was, which came up with her as soon as we, and this made us very uneasy; for this Bark being laden with Provision, those English influenced these new Comers so far, that they took them to anchor in the same place where they were, except the eleven Frenchmen, who left them and stayed with us.  
This Island of St. john Cueblo is about twelve Leagues in Circumference, 
A Description of St. John Cueblo, etc.  standing East and West, and North and South, five Leagues distant from the main Land, and separated by a narrow Channel (which is indeed no other than an Arm of the Sea running in between two Lands) It is not inhabited, very mountainous, full of Wood, and watered with very fine Rivers. It stands in no stead to the Spaniards, besides supplying them with Masts for their Shipping, which they have here in great abundance. When we stopped upon that Island, we were in hopes to have fared well, so well stocked it was with Deer, Monkeys, Agoutills, Lizards, and Banks full of Tortoises; but we were deprived of these Advantages by two Inconveniences we laboured under; The first whereof was, that the English in less than fifteen Days had made such a Destruction of these Tortoises, that but very few of them landed; The other respected our Hunting, which after we had followed for a few days at first, we were bound to decline; for having stayed in this place longer than we designed, we were under a necessity of preserving our Powder for fear, should we have spent it, the Spaniards would have been quickly upon us, so that we stayed a whole Month upon this Island to the number of three hundred and thirty Men of us with eating no more than two Tortoises in eight and forty Hours, and in seeking some Fruits in the Woods wherewith to subsist, and with the eating of which some of us died, as not knowing the Nature of them.  
There are a sort of Serpents upon this Island whose stinging is so dangerous, that if any one has not 〈◊〉 certain Fruit by him, which he is to chew, an presently to apply to the Wound, there is no escaping present Death for him, as we found by Experience by some of our Men whom we lost in this manner, and who, in their dying endured terrible Pains through the Activity and Violence of that Fire which this Poison kindled in their Bodies. The Tree o● which this Fruit grows, is to be found upon the same place, as well as in the other parts of this Country, being, as to its Leaves and Height very like unto our Almond-Trees; But its Fruit resembles Sea-Chesnuts, though it's of a greyish, Colour, and of a somewhat bitter taste, enclosing a whitish Almond in the midst thereof. It's chewed altogether before the Application is made, and is known by no other Name than the Serpents-Seed.  
Here also about two or three Leagues up the Country, you have a great many Cayemans', which are a kind of Crocodiles, that live both in the Sea, Rivers, and on dry Land, and are of that ravenous Nature, that some of our Men have been devoured by them.  
On the seven and twentieth the English, who had left us, sent a Quartermaster to us to know whether we would join ourselves with them, as supposing they were too weak, to go and take the Town of Leon, on which they had form a Design. And here we must acknowledge, that extreme Misery is so terrible a thing, that it is almost impossible, when an opportunity presents itself of being delivered, that it should be let slip, notwithstanding all the Repugnancy of our Reason to the contrary. We had left the English by reason of their Impieties, which we could not endure, and now we were ready to comply with the Proposals they had made us of rejoining them again. The Provision was on their side, and this was a charming Bait for People that were ready to perish with Hunger. We presently asked them for some Victuals: And as we had but one Ship that could not hold us all, that they should give us another, because we were not willing to be dispersed on board their Ships, as before, but this they would not agree to. In the mean while as we were resolved not to recede here-from, Famine forced thirty of our Men to join themselves with the English as being unable to bear with the Fasts we were forced to keep. And on the fourth of August four of our Men died.  
On the ninth, when we knew the English were gone, we embarked to the number of an hundred and twenty Men on board five Canoes commanded by Captain Groigniet, and lest two hundred on board our Ship, and upon the Island, whom we ordered to build more Canoes, and afterwards to cross over to the Continent.  
Having made a Descent there on the thirteenth, we came to an Hatto, which is a kind of a Farm, where the Spaniards breed their Cattle: It was in the Neighbourhood of a Town called St. jago, which is twenty Leagues distant from St. John's Island. The People we found in this Hatto we made our Prisoners, among whom, was the Master, who showed and conducted us to take a Sugar Plantation in the River of St. jago, where we were discovered. We sounded our Prisoners one after another in order to know whether they understood any thing of our Separation from the English, by telling them we came from the North-Sea, and that they should show us where the Freebooters were, which they said were come into these Seas. They answered, they were gone to St. John's Island to repair the Damage the Fleet of Peru had done them, together with other Circumstances, which we knew better than they, without telling us one word of what had happened between the English and us: Hence we conjectured they knew nothing of the matter, and we could have been very well content that all the Spaniards knew as little as they, for fear our Disjunction might render them more forward to attack us.  
After this Intelligence, we dispatched away a Canoe which we had taken in this River, to carry our Men some Victuals, which we had found in this Hatto, and to acquaint them, that we were going towards Panama, to see whether we might meet with an opportunity of seizing some Barks, that so we might get out of St. John's Islands; Because, as I have already said, our Ship was not big enough ●o hold us, and that as soon as the Canoes were ready, they were to go and take Pueblo-Nuevo, in order to get some Provision wherewith to subsist till our return.  
On the fifteenth we went ashore forty Leagues to Leeward of Panama, and though we had no Guide, we got by Cock-crowing to a very pretty Estancia as they call it, which was a loan House, and where we took fifty Prisoners of both Sexes. Among these, there was a young Man and Woman of Quality, who promised we should have a Ransom for them, and whom we carried to the Island Ignuana, a League's distance from the great one, and where there is no other but Rain-Water to be had, which stands in the Cavities of the Rocks.  
We stayed for the forementioned Ransom till the eight and twentieth, when it was duly paid us, and then went off, being first informed, that about eight Leagues to Windward, there was a River, wherein were two Barks laden with Maes, which on the nine and twentieth in the Morning we boarded and took. From thence we resumed our Course to 〈◊〉 and rejoin our Men in St. John's Island, where we arrived on the third of September. Here they told us, that an Hundred of them, whereof ninety eight were come back, had gone on the five and twentieth of the preceding Month, to Pueblo-Nuevo, as we had ordered them, where they arrived on the seven and twentieth; and though they were discovered by the Sentinels of the Town, they made themselves masters of it, and stayed there two days for all the continual and various Attacks made upon them by the Spaniards. That the Commander of the place came with a Trumpet to speak with them, and asked, why they carried White Colours seeing they were English (so he took them to be) but without satisfying his Curiosity in the point, they constrained him to be gone from whence 〈◊〉 came. That eight of them being gone some distance from the place of Arms, there were two of the number massacred by an hundred and fifty Spaniards, who seeing so small a Company together, bravely fell upon them; But with all the advantage they had, they could not hinder the other six to recover their Mainguard, who fought retreating with extraordinary Vigour.  
On the fourth we put out with six Canoes; and an hundred and forty Men on board, whereof we detached two to go to the Hatto, we had taken on the eleventh of August, to look after the Ransom of the Master, whom we kept Prisoner, and with the other four returned to that Sugar-Plantation in St. jago, in order to get some Sugar-Cauldrons, whereof we had occasion. There we were informed, that the Governor of St. jago came thither after our Departure the first time we took it, with eight hundred Men. We stayed in this place till the ninth, expecting the Answer of a Prisoner whom we had sent to the Governor, and by whom we sent him word, that if he were minded to advance with his eight hundred Men, we were ready; but hearing no news of him, we departed thence, after our two Canoes had rejoined us; and on the eleventh arrived on board our Ship and the two Barks at the Island of St. john.  
On the fifth we carreened our Ships and took in Water and Wood; we would have left this Island, had it not been for the continual Rains that fell and lasted eighteen days, and such bad Wether, that it was impossible for us to appear upon Deck, having never seen the Sun all this time: And for this reason it is, that the Spaniards call the distance between the Bay of Gurgona, and this Island of St. john, The Droppings of the South-Sea. You have but four Months of good Wether here throughout the Year, and they are December, january, February, and March; the other eight Months are incommoded with great Rains, which falls almost without any Intermission, and which besides the bloody Flux it brings, is so pernicious, that if a Man has been wet with it two or three times, if he do not presently shift himself, it breeds large Worms between his Skin and his Flesh, in form somewhat like unto a Quill, and about half a finger long.  
The Wether clearing up, on the fourth of October, we mended our Sails, which were almost rotten, and made ready to be gone. And the same Day we had one of our Men stung in the Leg by a Serpent, who died of it presently, as not having taken care to provide himself with the remedy we have spoken of.  
On the eighth we made ready and sailed for Realeguo, which is both a Port and Town an hundred and fourscore Leagues to the West and by North West of the Isle of St. john, and two hundred and sixty West of Panama. We had a small South East Wind till the eleventh, and on the twelfth and thirteenth we steered West North West, and that Evening descried Land. On the fourteenth we had a boisterous South Wind, which made us take in all our Sails, till Midnight, and then came a Calm, till the seventeenth, when towards Noon we were surprised with a South West Blast, attended with great Rains, which separated us from our two Barks: It blew so very hard, that the Sea appeared presently very frightful, and put us so to it, that we began to be very apprehensive we should be all cast away: But the Wether, (as God would have it) proving fair again, we spent the nineteenth to set our Vessel in order, as well as to mend our Sails with our Shirts and Drawers, wherewith we were already but very indifferently provided. Towards Evening we discovered Land, and knew it to be the Bay of Caldaira, whereof I shall give an account by and by. On the twentieth we sailed in sight of that of Colebra; from thence we had moderate Wether, and a Southeast Wind; and on the one and twentieth we got to the Height of the Morn's, which the Spaniards call Papegaya's.  
On the two and twentieth we found ourselves over against Realeguo, a place very remarkable for the high Mountains that surround it; and especially for a high Sulphurous Hill that burns continually, and whose Smoke reaches a great way, but the Tides next Night put us twenty Leagues to Windward of it. On the four and twentieth we put out four Canoes with an hundred men in them, in order to take some Prisoners, that we might receive some Information concerning this Coast, where we never were before.  
On the five and twentieth we put to the Shoar and landed, and after a March of three Hours, came to an Hatto, where we surprised the People, who gave us to understand, that the English had taken the Town of Leon, and burned that of Realeguo: That the Inhabitants of Legoria, Granada, Sansonnat, St. Michael, St. Salvador, and Villa-Nueva, which are Neighbouring Towns to the two forementioned ones, had sent a considerable Re-inforcement of Men to those of the Town of Leon, who yet durst not attack the English, who stayed there three whole days; during which time they had sent several Messages to these Reinforcements to require them to fight in the Race Savana, which the other still refused, saying, they were not yet all come together, that is, that they were hitherto no more than six to one, and that they stayed till they were doubly increased.  
On the six and twentieth, one of our Quarter-Masters, who was a Catalonian by Birth, 
One of the Buccaneers Quarter-Masters deserts to the Spaniards.  fled to the Spaniards, which hindered us at this time from going to take the Town of Granada, of which I shall speak in its due place, for we did not doubt, but that he had given them an account of the Design we had form upon that place.  
On the seven and twentieth we went on board our Canoes again, and made for the Port of Realeguo, where the Rendezvous of our Ship was to be: We could land no where all along the Coast, because the Sea breaks with so much Violence there, when 'tis a Southerly Wind, that it is impossible to come near it. However six of our Men swum with a design to fill some Casks with Water, which we were in want of, but they could not do it, for the Spaniards followed us by Land all along the Bank, and so it sell out, that one of our Men was unfortunately drowned.  
On the first of November we arrived at the Port of Realeguo, where we found our Ship at Anchor. There are two Passages to this Port, whereof that to Windward is best. It's very narrow, and besides this, has two Morn's or little Mountains, that form the two points thereof. Upon one of which the Spaniards had a design to build a Fort. There is a very fine River runs into this Haven, that bears the same Name with the Town, It's safe from any Winds, and contains within it ●ive Islands that are very good to carreen Ships in; there are but three Leagues from thence up the River before you come at the Town: But before we got there with our Canoes, we met three very strong Retrenchments, that had been made for its Security upon the River's side, about a Quarter of a League distant one from another, and which the English had half burnt. ●●bout a Musket Shot from the Town, the Spaniar●● had very fine Docks, where they build their Ship●. It's washed with this River, and stands in a very fine Country, watered with several other Rivulets; and both its Churches and Houses, though then ha●● burned, appeared to us to have been beautiful enough. We are also farther to take notice, that that River we have spoken of, has eight Arms, by which you may conveniently convey any thing to the Village● Sugar-Plantations and Hattoes, whereof this Country is full, and which belongs to the Burghers as well of this Town as of the neighbouring one's, of which L●on, that is not above four Leagues off, is situated 〈◊〉 a very curious Plain. On the second we went to take two of those Hattoes, from whence we carrie● some Victuals on board for those who were carree●●ing our Ships.  
On the ●th. we departed to the number of an hundred and fifty Men, to go and seize the Sentinels of the Town of Leon, and having surprised them on the eighth, they informed us there were two thousand men in the Place, who yet not trusting to their numbers, had taken all their moveables, and carried them to a place of safety. We returned on Board on the ninth, and next day set out to go to a great Sugar-Plantation, two Leagues distant from this City, where we arrived at Midnight, but found no Soul living there, the People being gone for their security to the Town, upon the report that was spread abroad, that we had taken some Sentinels. But as we were upon our return from this Sugar Plantation to go on Board again, our Van Guard met with a Detatchment of Horse, upon whom they fired, and made them fly, but the Captain was made a Prisoner, who upon our questioning of him, told us, that he had heard of us a long time since, but not knowing what Language we spoke, we had been taken for a Company of two 〈◊〉 and fourscore Mulatos, who were looking out to fight us, knowing we were ashore, and who would be at that Sugar Plantation that Evening; we asked the Captain what they were he had headed, and he answered they were a Troop of Horse who guarded the Embarking Place belonging to that Sugar Plantation, 〈◊〉 that the Governor of the Town coming to know 〈◊〉 were come to the Port of Realeguo, had given them orders to retire in such a manner, as gave us to understand that our Enemies kept a very good Guard, when they had nothing to be afraid of, and that they would draw off as soon as ever they saw us near, and in effect, we found them to be exactly the very same as represented to us: For surely if they had had but any thing of Resolution and Courage, being as numerous as they were in respect to us, they could ha●e easily cut us off, is often as we made any descent upon them, and thus many times we found our Safety to proceed from their Cowardice, as much as from our own Courage.  
On the 13th. the same Company of an hundred and 〈◊〉 Men, left our Vessels to go take a Burrow Town three Leagues above the City of Realeguo, whose Name was Pueblo Viego; we passed through this Place, which we found to be quite deserted by its Inhabitants, because of the Excommunication they had thundered out against themselves.  
Some perhaps will be surprised to hear of this extravagant humour, 
An odd way of Excommunication among the Spaniards of America  but there is nothing truer, then that when the Free Booters have several times taken the same place from them, their Prelates after excommunicati●● and cursing the same, quit it entirely, and will not bury even their Dead whom we killed, as supposing the● for the foresaid Reason unworthy of Christian Burial▪ On the 14th. in the Morning we arrived at Pueblo Vir●● from whence their Sentinels had discovered us since the 13th. in the Evening, so that we found the Enemy ●●trenched in the Great Church, and about an hundred and fifty Horse upon the place of Arms. 
The Freebooters take Pueblo Viejo.  We presently fell to work, and after some Discharges, we put th●● to slight, but those that were within the Church, held 〈◊〉 about half an hour longer, and then made their 〈◊〉 through a door that was behind the Vestry which 〈◊〉 had not secured. We stayed a day and an half in 〈◊〉 place, and carried away all the Provisions we could 〈◊〉 hands on, upon the Horses which we had, and our 〈◊〉 Backs, and on the 16th. arrived on Board our Ship. 〈◊〉 the 18th. we returned to take an Estancia, which was 〈◊〉 League and an half from the said Town, and the Ma●●● whom we took Prisoner told us, that the day we 〈◊〉 away, six hundred Men lay in Ambush for us, on 〈◊〉 way by which we were to pass; but that with●●● knowing it, we had returned by a different Road. 〈◊〉 the 21st. we went on Board with our Prisoner, 〈◊〉 promised us some Provision for his Ransom; and 〈◊〉 day we put another Prisoner ashore to endeavour 〈◊〉 procure it us with all Expedition.  
On the 24th. came a Spanish Officer, who brought a Letter from the Vicar-General of the Province, (and all appearance) by order of the General of 〈◊〉 Rica, 
An amusement of the Spaniards.  who sent us word there was a Peace made between the Crowns of France and Spain for twenty year that they were joined together to make War up the Infidel's. That therefore we ought to commit 〈◊〉 farther Hostilities, and that if we had a mind to 〈◊〉 to the North Sea, we might come safely unto them, 〈◊〉 have our passage into Europe in his Catholic Majestic Ca●leons: We gave them an answer suitable to the Proposal, being well enough acquainted with the 〈◊〉 Disposition of the Spaniards towards us, who by the false pretence, thought to have seduced us to come 〈◊〉 more readily among them, who understood the extreme Misery we had endured, by one of our People of whom we made mention before, and who ran away to them to be freed from the long fasts he was forced to with us.  
On the 24th. we careened our Ships, and the next day put thirty Prisoners ashore, part of whom we gave their Liberty to, and on the 28th. we made ready to return and go in quest of our two Barks whom we had appointed to rendesvouz at the Isle of St. john de Cueblo, in case we were separated from one another. As we were going out of the Port, the Spaniards gave notice by the Fires they made all along the Coast, what Course we steered. On the 3d. of December, we found ourselves got above an hundred Leagues out at Sea, whither an North-East Breeze had driven us; we bore again towards I and, and on the fifth went ashore; We sent out three Canoes furnished with seventy Men, to cross the bay of Colebra, and to endeavour to get some Provision along the Coast, as also to discharge our Ships of so many Months, there being but too little Victuals left 〈◊〉 those who remained behind, and who went to the 〈◊〉 of St. john: For as to the Provision, we were able to get together, while we were ashore in the Port of Rea●●●●, there was no great quantity of it, for the Spani●●ds knowing of our coming, had carried it up far into the Country, whither we durst not go and fetch it with 〈◊〉 ●ew Men as we had with us, as not being yet sufficiently acquainted with their Cowardice.  
From Realeguo to Panama, there are a great many lit●●e Ports which you must be well acquainted with before you can find them, for the Mo●th of them is very 〈◊〉, and if you once do miss them, it's absolutely ●●possible to get ashore along the Coast, the Sea being 〈◊〉 always boisterous, and very high upon the blowing 〈◊〉 the least Southeast and South-West Winds upon 〈◊〉.  
I have observed this difference betwixt this Sea and 〈◊〉 of the North, that let the Wind be never so violent, 
A Remarkable difference between the North and South Sea●  〈◊〉 soon as ever it ceases, the Sea proves as calm as if it 〈◊〉 never blown, whereas in the other, for all the Wind allayed, it continues several days in the same violent ●●●ation, as when it blew hard. I have also taken 〈◊〉, that the windy storms that are form to Leeward, are much more dangerous in the former, that those that come from the Windward; but in the other, 'tis contrary, where a Ship generally esteems not herself to be in danger, but from those that arise to Windward o● her, at leastwise, if the Wind be not subject to a very great Variation; to which we may add one difference more, that the South Sea is pacific enough upon the main, and very turbulent upon the Coast, and That of the North is oftentimes very impetuous far out, and almost always calm near the Shoar.  
The South Sea breeds in divers parts of it a very great number of Serpents, in colour like spotted Marble, and are generally about two foot long; their sting is of 〈◊〉 venomous and kill a Nature, that when a Man 〈◊〉 once stung by them, there is no humane Remedy 〈◊〉 can secure him from a sudden Death, and that which 〈◊〉 indeed very surprising, in regard to these Creatures 〈◊〉 that when the Sea by the boisterousness of its War●● throws them upon some Bank or other, though they 〈◊〉 not go out of the Water, yet they no sooner touch the Sand, but they presently die.  
On the Ninth, having still kept our course along 〈◊〉 Coast, we put fifty Men in three Canoes ashore, to 〈◊〉 and take the Town of Esparso, which is three Leag●●● from Caldaira, and is the place that serves for a Port 〈◊〉 it; we took the Sentinels about the third Part of 〈◊〉 way, who told us, that besides the Inhabitants of 〈◊〉 Town, there were five hundred Men whom they 〈◊〉 sent for, to come to their Assistance from Carthage, 〈◊〉 the Alarm given them by our two Barks that had anchored in this Bay, from which they were but just go●● Upon this Intelligence, we bethought ourselves, considering the smallness of our Number, to put off this ●●pedition to another time, and so returned with all 〈◊〉 but in such want of Provision, that we were forced kill and eat the Sentinels Horses, after four days 〈◊〉 abstinence; and this sort of Fasting, which was not 〈◊〉 first that we had used, did not prove to be the last 〈◊〉.  
Caldaira is a Bay that bears the name of six 〈◊〉 that stand about three Leagues to the East of 〈◊〉 Mouth of it, 
A description of the Bay of Cald●ira.  and upon the Bank of the place of emb●● king belonging to Esparso: This Bay, which by 〈◊〉 Geographers is called Nicoya; is one of the finest 〈◊〉 in the World; though the mouth of it be large, yet in lieu of that, it is at least a dozen Leagues within Land, and comprehends a great many Islands of different sizes within it; there is none but an Easterly Wind that can hurt it; the bottom of the Bay is open, by means of very fine Rivers that run into it, and by which you may ascend to several Villages, Hattos and Sugar Plantations, whereof this Country is full. You may choose your place of Anchorage, according to the length of the Cable, that is from six Fathom, increasing to any Hundred, and the bottom is very good: I forgot to observe that the six Magazines of Caldaira, whereof I have spoken, were partly built by the Inhabitants of Carthage, who make use of that for their Port, for facilitating the Traffic they drive with those living on the Coast of Peru, before we came to terrify them.  
Having on the 10th. gone on Board our Canoes, we went to a great Bananery that stood in the same Bay; it's a set of Fruit Trees which they call Bananiers, and the Fruit thereof Bananes, with which we loaded our Canoes for our subsistence. As we went ashore, we took the Centinel of the little Town of Nicoya, from which finding ourselves at some distance, we did not then think fit to go up to it, and so we directed our Course for Point B●rica, where we arrived on the fourteenth: That is a very pleasant and delightful place, and among other ●●ings, we could not but admire a walk consisting of five rows of Coco-Trees that run along the Bank for above fifteen Leagues in length, and that in so orderly a manner, that though the same be no more than the bare work of Nature, without any additional help from Art, they seem as if they had been all planted on a Line.  
This Fruit, which upon several occasions was so delightful to us, grows upon the stock of a Tree, that is a kind of Palm, twenty or five and twenty Foot high: Its 〈◊〉 a Nut, but without making any Comparison of the begness of it, for there are some of these Fruits that weigh twelve or fifteen Pounds, the Shell is very hard, and thick enough; it's wrapped up in a kind of thick covering, made up all of Filaments, with which the Spaniards use to caulker their Ships, it being much better than Tow, which rots in the Water in less than an Years time, whereas the other is fed by it and waxeth Green. If you bore an hole in this Nut, there runs out a quantity of greenish Liquor, which somewhat resembles the colo●● of Whey, but of a sharpish taste, and pleasant enough and when the Shell is broken, we find under it a Kernel, or what is equivalent thereto, of the thickness of a Man's Finger, very white and nourishing, which sticks very close to the inside. We left this place on the twentieth, keeping our Course still all along the Continent.  
On the 22d. having no Victuals to eat, we put sixty Men in our three Canoes ashore, to go seek some for 〈◊〉 and after travelling● the space of a League, we took a very curious Hatto, with two Prisoners, who 〈◊〉 us we were within a League and an half of the l●●tle Town of Chiriquita, and that there were six hundred Men in it, which made us seize with all expedition upon as much Victuals as we could, to carry it to the plan where we had left our Canoes, but in our return thi●●●● we found four hundred Horse in the way whom we fought with all along retreating, till we came to the Seaside, They challenged us again and again, and defied us a threatening Language to go to their Town, which we did not fail to do some days after. In the mean time we but away for the Isle of St. john, where arriving on the first of january 1686, we found our Ship and two Barks a Anchor.   

CHAP. III.  
The Free Booters' Voyage to the South Sea 〈◊〉 1686.  
ON the fifth of january, in the New Year, we parted in the number of two hundred and thirty Men 〈◊〉 eight Canoes, to go and face the Townsmen of Ch●●quita, and to give them the Visit they had de●yed 〈◊〉 do. And so it was, that this Island of St. john being ●bout twenty Leagues from them, we went ashore 〈◊〉 the sixth, about t●n or eleven a Clock at Night, without being discovered, but as we had no guide with us we marched on till day light without seeing any Bo●●. We hid ourselves on the seventh, all the day in a Wood, but as soon as night approached, we came out and put 〈◊〉 without discovering any body, till the eighth in the Morning when we concealed ourselves again in another small Wood, and spent all the day in that place, during which time we came to know that we had mistaken our measures, by going ashore on that side of the River, whereas we should have gone on the other: This was cold comfort to people so fatigued as we were; however as soon as it was Night, we made no more ado, than to return to our Canoes, wherein we passed that River: when we were got on the other side, we took the Town-Watch, by whom we were informed, that the Spaniards had conveyed away all their effects, upon our being at their Hattos.  
On the 9th. we got to Chiriquita two hours before day, 
The Buccaneers take Chiriquita.  we surprised all the Inhabitants who were for two days at variance with one another, about going the Rounds, and after we bade secured our Prisoners, we told them, that belonged to us, and that we were come to s●are them the Labour: We surprised also their Court of Guard, where they were at play, and as soon as they saw 〈◊〉 amongst them, they flew to their Arms to defend themselves, but as it was a little too late, we eased them of▪ that trouble also. Of them we learned, that there was a small Frigate up the River, which having touched in going out upon a Bank of Sand, that lay at the mouth thereof, was forced to go back, and so put the Provision which was her lading ashore.  
About two in the Afternoon we perceived some Spaniards in a House at some distance from the Town, which made us send five of our Number to fetch them out, but when we drew near, those whom we had seen, having showed themselves for no other purpose then to draw us out, disappeared, and presently about an hundred and twenty more came out of a little nook where they had concealed themselves, and beset us in such a manner, that finding no likelihood of escaping, we resolved never to be taken alive, but to sell our Lives ●s dear we could; to which end we immediately stood back to back, that we might face the Enemy every way, and in this posture we fought them above an hour and an half, at the expiration whereof there being no more than two of us in a condition to fight, God was pleased that some of our Men who were upon the Guard should come to our Relief, being driven thither by the Firings, for they thought before they heard these ●ryes, that we were exercising ourselves in shooting at a Mark. When the Enemy saw this Reinforcement come, they made such haste to go away, that it was impossible to overtake them: this succour coming in so seasonably, did infallibly save our Lives, for the Enemy having already killed us two Men, and disabled another, it was impossible we should hold out against such a shower of Bullets as were poured in upon us from all sides. And so I may truly say, I escaped a scouring, who could no● be kept from being murdered, and that without recciving as much as one Wound, but by a visible hand of protection from Heaven. The Spaniards left thirty Mo●● dead upon the spot, and thus we defended ourselves as desperate Men, and to say all in a word, like Fre●● Booters.  
We burned all the Houses in the Town this day, 
They burned it.  lest under the Covert of them, our Sentinels might be surprised, and that the Enemy might come to insult us i● the Night; when we had so done, we retired into the great Church, where they durst not come to attack us, but contented themselves to give us some Musket sho● from time to time, and that from a great distance.  
Chiriquita 
Chiriquita described.  is a small Town that stands in a Plain of Savanas, from whence the sight is bounded almost every way with no other than small, but very pleasant Thickets: There are several Rivulets that traverse it in divers places, and afterward gently glide into these Savan●● to water them. It's surrounded with a great many Ha●●tos, and they drive no other Trade, but in Tallow and Leather: the Port or embarking place belonging to it is on a pretty large River, from whence you must ascend about a League to come at it. There is but one way to come in at its Mouth, and the Spaniards themselves with out a B●oy will not venture to enter it; there are three Leagues by Land from this embarking place to the Town, and that through so pleasant a way, that none but such as we were, could be weary of it, who had no other thoughts then to get Victuals to satisfy out hunger which bore hard upon us, when we were going to take this Town; having eaten nothing from the Fifth, when we left our Vessels, till the Ninth, that we took it.  
On the 10th. we left the place, taking our Prisoners along with us, to wait for the ransoming of them upon an Island that is within the same River, making choice rather of these places for that purpose, than of the Continent, and where being obliged for a long time to stay for the Money, we should give the Spaniards thereby 〈◊〉 opportunity to gather all their force together, and to pay us all at once, by overpowering us with Numbers; whereas these Islands to which they could not come any other way then in Shaloops, and that openly, put us out of care to reimbark according to the measures they took by Land. When therefore we returned to our Canoes, which waited for us at the Port of Chiriquita, we found the Inhabitants of that Town had laid an Ambushcade for us, but we beat them off, and after the Enemy had 〈◊〉 retired, they sent us a person to demand their Prisoners, whom they said they would recover or perish in the attempt. We told the Messenger we were very ready to give them up, if they would come and meet us in the Race Savana to take them, and that if they fired one single Bullet at us, they should have no quarter, which so humbled their Pride, that we saw no more of them.  
As soon as we were got to the forementioned Island, we sent part of our Canoes to look after the Cargo of the small Frigate which the Spaniards of Chiriquita gave us information of, where they found above an hundred Men entrenched; but they could not hinder our Men from possessing themselves of what they went in search for Among the Baggage they found some Letters, that among other things, gave us to understand, that the Admir●● of the Peru Fleet who was returned to Lima, had been b●rnt with all ●or Crew, which was at that time four hundred Men, by a Thunderbolt, and this was so much the more surprising and admirable, that no Man living could remember to have heard any Thunder in that Country, no more then to have seen it Rain.  
On the 16th. The Ransom for our Prisoners came, and after we had set them at liberty, we returned aboard our Ship, which rid then at Anchor at St. John's Island. On the 20th. we concluded among ourselves, it was necessary we should build large Pirogues, seeing we could make no farther use of our Ship, for want of Sails, and we had nothing left to make them with, and still were less able to take Ships from the Spaniards, on this Western Coast, where they had put an entire stop to their Navigation, since we were come thither. O● the 22d. we made choice of tall Trees to make our Canoes and Pirogues of, upon the Banks of a curious River, which we knew to be in the Island.  
On the 27th. we descried seven sail of Ships out a Sea, which made us fit out five Canoes to go and 〈◊〉 what they were, and as we doubled one of the Points of the Island, we discerned twelve Pyrogues, and th●● long Barks, who coasted it all along. We took the●● presently to be the Fleet of Peru, that was come in qu●● of us; we gave our Men notice of it without delay, and at the same time, resolved to put all we had on Board our Ship, into our Bark, and to go into that River where our Docks were, there to wait the coming of our Enemy, where they could not come to attack us, without losing a great many Men. This project we put forthwith in Execution, and after we had abandoned our Ships, which could not be brought into that River, we ran h●● ashore, lest the Spaniards should have any Benefit of in and put her into a sailing Condition, being very well assured of ourselves, that they did not want Sails, as we did for that purpose.  
On the 28th. our Sentinels came to give us Noti●●, that six Pirogues plied along the Shoar, which made 〈◊〉 at the same time put an hundred and fifty Men to lie i● Ambush on both sides the River, and then we set 〈◊〉 with two of our Canoes, from whence after we had seen them, we feigned to run away by going back, to engage them to give us chase; But they suspecting a stratagem in the case, bore directly upon our Sh●p that was run aground, upon which they fired very sur●ously, though there was none left within it but only a poor Cat, which they perceiving, they bravely boarded and burnt her, for the sake of the Ironwork that belonged to her, which is a Commodity as rare as 〈◊〉 dear in some parts of Peru. On the first of February, the Spanish Fleet sailed away, and left us at ease to ●●nish our Work, upon which we spent the remainder 〈◊〉 the Month.  
We understood afterwards that the Admiral of this Fleet had orders to put some Field-pieces ashore to demolish those Fortifications which they thought we had made upon the Island, being induced to believe it was so, by by the report the Prisoners, which we sent them, made of our Intentions. We to impose upon them, having asked whether there were any Masons among them that could do our Work, and sometimes obliged them to give as Brick for their Ransom, though we had no need of them: there were no less than fourteen of our Men died in the Month of February.  
On the 14th. of March we departed from the Isle of St. john with our two Barks, an half Galley of 40 Oars, ten great Pyrogues, and ten small Canoes, all built of Mapou-Timber, except our two Barks; we gained the Windward point of the Island to take a review of our Men, and found ourselves weaker by no less than thirty Persons, since our separation from the English: But we form a design anew at the same time which had been put by for above four Months, which was to go and take the Town of Granada, distant now from us, about two hundred Leagues. To effect this Work, it was necessary we should be furnished with Provision wherewith to subsist us during the Voyage, and we having none, this made us send away our half Galley and four Canoes, to seek for some at Pueblo Nueoo while the rest of the Company went to ●arry for us at the Isle of St. Peter, which is two Leagues to Windward of the River Chiriquita, and to finish somewhat that was still wanting to the complete Equipment of our Canoes.  
On the 6th. of April, about three hours before daylight, we were got near to the River of Pueblo Nuevo, 
They fight the Spaniards by Sea.  and by a clear light of the Moon we discerned a small Prigat at its Mouth, as also a long Bark, and a Pyrogue. We came within Pistol shot of them, as supposing them to be our English Freebooters, from whom we had separated. But we found ourselves quickly mistaken, for after we had haled them, they answered us with an entire Volley of great and small shot, which made us now conjecture that they were, and it was too true, a detachment left by the Spanish Fleet in that place, when they left us at St. John's Island, as a guard to two small Ships, which we knew they were lading with Provisions at the Port of this Town, in order to transport the same to Panama. Our mistake was the reason that we had twenty Men disabled to fight, by this first Discharge of the Enemy, before we know well where we were, but after we were a little recovered out of the surprise this adventure put us to, we fought them stiffly for the space of two hours, though we had the use of no other Arms than our Fuzees, and not one Cannon to discharge upon them; And they on their part defended themselves so much the more vigorously in that they believed, we, after such a surprise as we had been exposed to, would quickly slacken our Courage and give way. They did all they could to make ready during the Fight, but we hindered them, and no Man could appear in the Shroud● but we brought them down, as well as their Granadeer from their Round Tops. But finding the light of the Moon now gone, we put off out of the reach of the●● Cannon, as well to take care of our wounded Men, which amounted to thirty three, besides four who were killed out right, as to wait for day light, in order to terminate this Affair, which we were not willing to leave undecided. But the Enemy did in the mean time retire under the covert of a Retrenchment, which I have said already, they had upon the Banks of this River, where the Country People who had heard the noise of the Fight in the Night, were also come, which made us conclude, that if we went to attack them in that place, we could not have that advantage there, we had resolved to take of them; So upon approach of day, we steered our Course to go and rejoin our Canoes at the Isle of St. Peter, where we arrived on the Eighth.  
On the ninth we found ourselves in great want of Victuals, having now nothing at all to eat, and this 〈◊〉 us hard to it, more especially our wounded Men, who● we sent by our half Galley, (for their better conveniency) on board our two Barks, whom we had appointed to Rendesvouz in the Bay of Boca-del-Toro. When this was done, we went ashore to a Town ten Leagues to Leeward of Chiriquita, where finding none, we left it, and on the Eleventh in our return to our Canoes, we found, in order to strengthen us under the languishment which Hunger had reduced us to, a regale of an Ambuscade of five hundred Men laid for us, against whom for all our weakness, we made so good a defence, that we obliged them to leave us free Passage, but yet not without the loss of two of our Men. We went on Board in the Evening, to go join our Barks in the Bay of Boca-del-T●ro, where we arrived the thirteenth, and went ashore; spending, our Time to the sixteenth in hunting more especially for the subsistence of our wounded Men, and here we found the same sort of Deer and Birds, as I have taken notice of in our passage over the Continent, in great plenty.  
On the same day we departed for the Bay of Caldaira, after having renewed our Enterprise upon the little Town of Lesparso, of which I have already spoken, On the 19th. being arrived in the Bay, we went ashore two hours before Day light, and reached the Town; About Eleven in the Morning, we found the place was in a manner entirely abandoned from the time we had taken the Sentinels, who, as I have already observed, diverted us from going thither by the account they gave of the Reinforcement that was come to them from Carthage: However we took some Prisoners, who told us all the People were retired to this last Town, which is four and twenty Leagues off; so that finding our endeavours all frustrated, we returned on the 20th. to the Sea side to rejoin our Canoes.  
Lesparso is reckoned to be three Leagues distant from the Seaside, and the way thither very bad, you cannot travel the length of a Gun-shot in even Ground, but the same is every where rugged, and full of little Mountains and Hills, though beyond them the Country appears to be very good and delightful. The Town is built upon an Eminence, from whence one may easily see all that comes in and goes out of the Bay; This Town is in a manner encompassed with a Rivulet that runs round it: Between it and Carthage, are very curious Plains, with royal ways made through them, and that as well as any in Europe.  
On the 21st. we victualled ourselves with the Fruit of a Bananery in this Bay, wherein our two Barks came to join us, and next day we summoned our People ashore upon this Island as well to consult how we should attack the Town of Granada, which we had a design upon, as to take an account of what powder they had, as fearing many of them might use it in hunting: Here we enacted orders whereby those were condemned to lose their share of the Booty got in the place, that should be found guilty of Cowardice, Violence, Drunkeness, Disobedience, Theft, and straggling from the Main Body without orders. When this was over, we left the Bay the same Evening, and a strong Easterly Wind surprising 〈◊〉 in the Night, separated our Vessels from one another: At break of day, we told thirteen Sail, wherewith we were amazed, knowing we had no more than a dozen, and this made us give our Canoes the signal to chase, as well as we, that Vessel that did not belong to us, be● when we had continued the chase for about an hour● time, we perceived five more, and having come up with the foremost, we understood 'twas Captain Townsley ca●● from the Coast of Acapulao: He had left his Ship ● the Cape, over against the mouth of the Bay, where we had been, and went with his five Canoes to find out some Bananes, having very little Provision on Board. He told us that Captain David, with his Fleet was on the 〈◊〉 thern Coast, and that Captain Suams with his Ship was gone to the East Indies.  
We finding ourselves now to be the stronger Par●●, called to mind their former imperious dealings with us, and to show our Resentment of it, 
The French oppress the English in their turn, but agree again  we made him and his Men who were in the other four Canoes Prisoners▪ We boarded his Vessel immediately, of which having made ourselves Masters, we made a shame of taking ● away, but our design being only to frighten them, 〈◊〉 left them for some time under the apprehensions of danger they were in. Then we let the Captain know we were honester Men than he, and that though we had the upperhand, yet we would not take the Advantage of revenging the Injuries they had done us, and that we would put him and his Men in possession of what we had taken from them four or five Hours before. This moderation which we exercised towards them, together wit● their being informed by some of our Crew, of a des●● we had upon the Town of Granada, engaged them to desire we would take them in to be our Associates in the Enterprise, and they being an hundred and fifteen 〈◊〉 number, we readily consented to such a Reinforcement as must needs be useful to us.  
On the 25th. we departed all together French and English in our Pirogues and Canoes, leaving their Ship and our two Barks under the covert of Cape Blank, which is twenty Leagues to Windward of the place where we were to go ashore, and gave orders to those that were appointed to guard them, to sail away six days after, and to coast it till they came to an Anchor, at the place where we should leave our Canoes.  
On the 7th. of April we went ashore on a flat Coast, to the number of three hundred and forty five Men, under the conduct of a very good Guide, who lead us cross a Wood that we might not be discovered. We marched on Night and Day till the Ninth, but notwithstanding all the precautions we took, we could not hinder our being discovered by the Inhabitants of the Town of Granada, who were fishing in a River about fifteen Leagues off, and though they made all the hast they could to advertise the Spaniards of our March, they could not have been there time enough to have given the People Notice to remove all their effects, considering the expedition we used to follow them, had not they (unhappily upon our account) notice given them of us three weeks before by the Inhabitants of Lesparso, who having seen the great number of Canoes we had, as we passed by there, grew suspicious of our design.  
The fatigue we had undergone during our March, together with the sharp Hunger that pressed us, obliged us to halt and rest the Ninth in the Evening in a great Sugar Plantation, that is about four Leagues distant from Granada, and was in our way thither. It belonged to a Knight of St. James', who upon our arrival, we failed in take Prisoner, our Legs being at that time much more disposed to rest, then to run after him. On the 10th. we set out, and upon our approach near the Town, we observed an Eminence above it about a League off, and two Ships upon the lake of Nicaragua, that carried, as we were since informed, all the wealth of the Town into an Island two Leagues off. We took a Prisoner in a Village that was in our way, who told us the Inhabitants of the Town had entrenched themselves upon the place of Arms, and compassed it with a strong Wall, since our Quartermaster who had run away to them, had given information that we designed to come amongst them: He told us farther, that that Place was guarded with fourteen pieces of Cannon, and six Petereroes, and lastly, that they had detatched six Troops of Horse to 〈◊〉 our rear while our Front should be engaged with the Spaniards, if so be we should come up to them.  
This Information which doubtless would 〈◊〉 terrified any other but Freebooters, did not reta●● our design one Minute, nor hinder us, about two in the Afternoon of the same day to come up to the Town, where at one entrance into the Suburbs, we met with a strong party lying in Ambush for us, whom after an Hours Engagement, we fell with that Fury 〈◊〉 that we made our way over all their Bellies, with the loss only of one Man on our own side, and from thence entered the Town, where we made an halt to wait for the Answer of several of our Company, whom we had detatched to go round and take Observation of a Fo● which we saw in a direct Line from the Street, by which we entered. Presently after came a party to inform us, that it was a square Fort, and that besides the Street we were in, they had also observed three more, that 〈◊〉 out to the other three sides of that Fort, by which the Enemy could discover whatever came towards the● through those avenues which were moreover all commanded by their Cannon and small Arms.  
We were not long in debate what we should do; ● could easily see we were too few to make our attack●● those different ways all at a time. Wherefore after● had got together all those whom we had sent out to 〈◊〉 who for some time had been detained by some light ●●mishes; we made ourselves ready to fall on through 〈◊〉 Street alone where we than were, and 'twas well we 〈◊〉 so, for if we had dispersed ourselves through the other● the Horse which were in the rear of us, and observed our Motion, would not have failed to he● us in, whi●● they durst not do while we kept all together.  
After we had exhorted one another to fall on bravely we advanced a round pace towards the said Fortification▪ As soon as the defendants saw us within a good Can●●● shot of them, they fired furiously upon us, but observ●● that at every Discharge of their great Guns, we 〈◊〉 them down to the Ground, in order to let their sho●● over us, they bethought themselves of false 〈◊〉 them, to the end we might raise our Bodies after 〈◊〉 tham was over, and so be really surprised with the● true Firing. As soon as we discovered this Stratagems we ranged ourselves along the Houses, and having g●●● upon a little ascent, which was a Garden-plat, we 〈◊〉 upon them from thence so openly for an hour and● half, that they were obliged to quit the Ground, to which our hardy Boys, who were got to the Foot of their Walls, contributed yet even more than the other, by pouring in hand Granades incessantly upon them, so that at last they betook themselves to the Great Church or Tower, but they wounded us some Men: As soon as our People who were got upon the said Eminence, perceived that the Enemy fled, they called to us to jump over the Walls, which we had no sooner done, but they followed us: And thus it was that we made ourselves masters of their Place of Arms, and consequently of the Town, from whence they fled, after having lost a great many Men. We had on our side but four Men killed, and eight wounded; which in truth was very 〈◊〉: When we got into the Fort, we found it to be a place capable of containing six thousand fight Men, it was encompassed with a Wall, the same as our Prisoner's gave us an account of; It was pierced with many Holes to do execution upon the Assailants, and was well stored with Arms. That part of it which looked towards the Street, through which we attacked it, was de●●ded by two pieces of Cannon, and four Petereroes, to 〈◊〉 nothing of several other places made to open in the Wall, through which they thrust instruments made on purpose, to break the Legs of those that should be so 〈◊〉 as to come near it, but these by the help of 〈◊〉 Granadeer, we rendered useless to them. After we 〈◊〉 sung Te Deum in the Great Church, and set four ●●ntinels in the Tower, we fixed our Court of Guard in 〈◊〉 strong built Houses, that are also enclosed within the place of Arms, and there gathered all the Ammunition 〈◊〉 could get: Then we went to visit the Houses, where●●● we found nothing but a few Goods and some Provi●●● which we carried into our Court of Guard.  
Next day in the Evening we detatched a party of an 〈◊〉 and fifty Men, to go and find out some Wo●●● that we might put them to Ransom, and some Boo●● which we were told they had in the Sugar Plantation ●eague off of the City: But they were gone by the 〈◊〉 we got thither, as not believing themselves safe in at place, so that our Party came back re infecta: The 〈◊〉 day we sent a Prisoner to the Spaniards, to require 〈◊〉 to ransom the Town, or else we would burn it; ●●ereupon they sent a Monk to treat with us, who said the Officers and Inhabitants were in Consultation about it, but that one of our Men whom they had taken as be lagged behind, through weariness upon the Road, without the Officer that brought up our Rear, his having taken notice of it, assured them we would not burn it, because our design was to pass some Months after to the North-Sea, by the Lake there, and to furnish ourselves in this Town with necessaries for our Journey, which we should not meet with if we fired the Place: So that the said Man having given them such assurance, they would no longer trouble themselves about giving an Answer to the Proposal we had made for their ransoming the Town, 
They fire Granada.  which at last constrained some of us to set fire to the Houses out of mere Spite and Revenge.  
The opportunity which now offered itself unto us of passing through the Lake to the North-Sea, was not at this time over favourable, and we should not have failed to make use of it, if we had had Canoes ready in this place to go and take two Ships, and the wealth of the Town, which the Inhabitants had carried for the better securing of them into the Island which I have already said was in the said Lake; which would have put a full end unto the Trouble we had been in from the time we failed of seizing the Flo●a before Panama; But the term of Dangers and Miseries which our destiny had still in store for us, being not yet come, we could not take the Advantage of so favourable an Opportunity to get out of those parts of the World, which though very charming and agreeable to those who are settled there, yet did not appear to be so to an handful of Men, as we were, without Shipping, the most part of our time without Victuals, and wandering amidst a multitude of Enemies, against whom we were obliged to be continually upon our Guard, and who did all that in them lay to deprive us of Subsistance.  
Granada is a large and spacious Town, situated in a Bottom, 
Granad● described.  inclining to the Coast of the South-Sea, whose Churches are very stately, and Houses well enough built: They have several Religious Houses there, both of Men a●d Women: The Great Church stands at 〈◊〉 of the ends of the place of Arms; The Country thereabouts is very destitute of Water, they having no other 〈◊〉 than only the Lake of Nicarague upon the side whereof the City is built, and round about which you may see a great many fine Sugar Plantations, which are more like unto so many Villages, then single Houses, and among the rest is that belonging to the Knight of St. James', where we lay in our March to the Town, where there is a very pretty and rich Church.  
On the 10th. we left the City, and took along with us one piece of Cannon, with sour Petereroes, as not questioning but we should meet with Opposition in our way, before we came to the Seaside, from which we were near twenty Leagues distant, and therein we were not deceived; seeing the Spaniards waited for us, to the number of two thousand five hundred Men, within a quarter of a League of the Town, and presently charged us: But not dreaming that we had brought any of their Artillery along with us, they were so terrified when we had fired two Cannon shot upon their first Ambuscade, that they left us a free passage in this place only, for though they saw a great many of their Men sprawling upon the Ground, they ceased not all the way at certain distances to lay new Ambushes for us, where they had no more success then at first. We took one of them Prisoners, who told us, there was a Million and an half of pieces of Eight long since ordered for the ransoming of their Town, in case the same should be taken, and that the same was buried in the Wall, so as that it could not be seen: But we had no inclination to go back in search of this Money, seeing we found difficulty enough to rid ourselves out of the Hands of so considerable a number of Enemies as we had already to deal with.  
We were forced that Evening to leave our Cannon behind us, after we had first nailed them up, for the Oxen that drew them were dead for want of Water, having traveled several Leagues through very great heats, without one drop of Water, and through such a Dust, as choked both Man and Beast. But we reserved our Petereroes, which were carried by Mules, who could better bear this inconveniency. At last we lay in a very pretty Village, called Massaya, that stands upon the side of the Lake, but from hence to the Water there is so great a descent, that a Man of full growth appears to be no bigger than a Child: We were received by the Indians in this place with open Arms, but the Spaniards that had retired thither, knowing the extreme thirst wherewith we were afflicted, had spoiled all the Water that was in the Village, hoping thereby to reduce us to such necessity, that we might go by Night to drink to the Lake that so they might lay some Ambush for us: But these Indians that came to meet, and pray us not to burn their Village, remedied this Evil, in assuring us, they would supply us with whatever we had occasion for, as long as we stayed there, and particularly with Water. Taken with this their Submission, we granted them their request, so much the more willingly, seeing they gave us to understand upon several occasions, that they were more our Friends, than they were the Spaniards.  
All these Indians 
The misery of the Indians.  are a miserable People, whom the Spaniards endeavour to reduce and bring under their Subjection by little and little, with a feigned gentleness practised towards them, to make them forgetful of those Cruelties and Tyrannies they had heretofore exercised in those parts, and which they are not wanting still to keep in remembrance. They have at present a pretty number of them there, whom they have brought down from those Mountains where they had refugiated themselves and brought them to submit in this manner. They have given them places to build Burroughs and Villages upon, but all their Labour redounds to the advantage of the Spaniards; So that being used as Slaves by them, they are so weary of their Dominion, and the Barbarity showed them, by being made use of as Pallisadoes by the Spaniards when they fight us, that if we had been People fit to receive them; as often as they made an offer to take our parts, we should have form a very considerable Army, and it is certain, that if they had but Arms and Protection, they would have infallibly shaken off the Yoke of their pitiful Masters, being three times more in number than they.  
We rested only one day in this place, to refresh our wounded Men, where two died of the Cramp, which 〈…〉 all their Nerves, 
〈…〉  this is so malignant a Distemper in this Country, that when it seizes upon a stranger that is wounded, it will certainly kill him: This same day came a Father to us from the Spaniards, to redemand another Father from us, who was one of our Prisoners, who had taken up Arms against us, and had his Pockets full of poisoned Bullets: We required in exchange for him one of our Men, whom they had taken, which they would by no Means agree to, so that we carried the latter along with us, as far as the Seaside.  
On the 17th. we left this Burrow, and lay in another place three Leagues beyond it, from whence we passed next day, and as we came out of a Forest to enter into a Plain, we discovered five hundred Men upon an ascent, waiting for our coming, commanded by the abovementioned Catalonian Quartermaster, that had deserted us: They had put up Bloody Colours, to signify they would give no quarter, which obliged us to lay by our white Colours, and display our Red as well as they. We marched directly to the place where they were without stopping, though they fired very thick upon us, and when we came within Musket-shot, we detatched our Vanguard to beat them off their Ground, which they did with wonderful Bravery; Here we took about fifty Horses, the Enemy in their flight, cowardly left part of their Arms behind them, besides their dead and wounded Men, by which last we understood that these People were the reinforcement which the Inhabitants of the Town of Leon had sent to the Assistance of Granada against us, and who were returned home.  
After we had rested about an hour, we continued our March, and lay at a little Town which the Inhabitants had forsaken. On the 19th. we lay in a Hatto, and the next day in an Estancia, where we rested some days to refresh ourselves, and to salt our Provisions to carry on Board our Ships, where we knew very well there could be no Victuals left. I always went before with an advanced Party of fifty Men, to go and inform those who looked after our Vessels with our Return. On the 26th. the rest of our Men came to the Seaside, where we re-imbarked all together, and understood that four of our Men wounded in the Fight at Pueblo Viego were dead, but more for want of Sustenance than their Wounds.  
On the 27th. we sailed for Realeguo, and on the 28th. anchored in that Port, where upon our going ashore, the Sentinels of Pueblo Viego discovered us, but that did not ●inder us to proceed and arrive at the place about Noon; The Spaniards who had heard of our coming, fled every where, but the heats are so excessive in these parts, that you cannot travel there this time of day, and this made us go and see rather for some shade or tufts of Grass whereon to set our Feet, then to run after the Enemy, however we took some Prisoners. We tarried there but two days, and after we had gathered as much Provision as we could find in the Houses, and sent out a party to see for some Horses, whereof they brought us an hundred, we departed on the first of May, and carried our Provision to the River side at Realeguo, where our Canoes were, who carried the same afterwards on Board our Ships, while we went out to seek for more, that so we might get together a good quantity, and not be obliged to consume it as we brought it in.  
On the 2d. we went to a Sugar Plantation to fetch off six Caldrons which we brought away next day, and on the fourth set out for a Burrow two Leagues from Realeguo, which they call Ginandego, which some of the Inhabitants a few days before prayed us by way of Raillery to go and Visit, as thinking themselves sufficiently secured by a Rerrenchment cast up at the Avenue leading to it, and that was defended by two hundred Men: We got thither on the fifth, by break of day; But being discovered by the Sentinel, he carried the Spaniards notice thereof, who gave us no occasion to desire them to quit it, after they had given us a few Musquet-shot; so that to punish their Rhodomontades, we burn▪ the place down to the Ground: We took one of their people Prisoner, by whom we understood that the Coregidor of Leon, who was very desirous to drive us away from that Coast, had ordered all the Tements, as soon as we got to any Place, to burn all the Provision they had, which to our sorrow was but to well executed, not only here, but every where else, and was the cause also of that Hunger and extraordinary toil which we were forced to endure in these Seas, as long as we stayed there.  
The same day about Noon, came about eight hundred Men into a Savana from Leon to fight us, the Sentinel which we had placed on the top of the Steeple, rung the Alarum-Bell to give us notice to get together, and come out of the Houses where we were dispersed: Whereupon we marched in a body of an hundred and fifty Men, with red Colours to fight them, but as they could not endure to let us come within Musket-shot of them, for they fled without any more ado, we were obliged to retire, and on the 6th. went away to go on Board our Ships, which we careened next day, as we also cleaned our Canoes.  
On the 9th. we had a consultation together, about what way we should take, and here we found ourselves of two Opinions, one party was for going up before Panama, being in hopes they had begun their Navigation again, as knowing we were far enough from them; But the rest represented, that many times they had such Years on that Coast, whereof that might be one of them, that eig●t Months thereof was sad Wether, in respect to excessive Rains, and Southerly Winds which reign there, and that therefore it would be more advisable to go lower Westward, and winter upon some Island or other, and there to wait for fair Wether.  
Now these different Sentiments were pursued by us, 
They disagree and steer different Course ●  and every Man having made choice of his side; Next day our Surgeons had orders to give in an account of those among the wounded, who were crippled, to the end we m●ght make them Satisfaction before we divided. They told us we had four Men crippled, and six hurt, to which we gave six hundred pieces of Eight a Man, and a thousand to those that were crippled, as it was our constant custom in those Seas, and it was exactly all the Money we had got together, that was applied to that use: We made a Division of the Barks and Canoes on the 12th. and we found ourselves to be an hundred and forty eight Frenchmen, ready to go up towards Panama (without comprehending the English under Captain Townsley,) and the same number of French failed also to the Westward. Next day our Provision was shared amongst us, and now it was that we divided into two parts; those who were for the Westward, put themselves under the Conduct of Captain Grogniet, and we that were bound for Panama, were commanded by Captain Townsley; And then we went to Anchor at an Island (half a League distant from that we left) to take in Water and Wood: On the sixteenth, Captain Groignet sent us his Quartermaster to desire us to put none of our Prisoners ashore, for fear they should give the Spaniards notice of our Separation, for as he had a design to make a Descent upon them, he was apprehensive that such a Discovery would make them more 〈◊〉 and hardy to oppose him.  
On the 19th. we made ready, and sailed for Panama▪ with Captain Townsl●y's Ship and o●e Bark: We steered East-South-East, to South-South-East, and to South-South-West, till midnight, when we were overtaken with a Storm, which made us lie by till the 20th. at Noon, when the Wether proved fair, than we steered East-South-East, to the 23d. when we anchored in the Bay of Colebra to take in Water. We spent that day there to take Tortoises, which are to be found in great numbers in that little Bay●h They are of different sizes, and we found one sort of them so large, that one was enough for fifty Persons to feed upon in a day. On the 24th. we put an hundred and fifty Men ashore, in order to find out some Town or Burrough, we having no Guide with us that knew this Country, and after we had walked a League or thereabouts, we alight upon three Ha●toes very near one another, where finding Edibles enough, we s●aid till the 26th. when we returned on Board; Then Captain Townsley proposed we should go and take the Town of Villia, which is 30 Leagues to Leeward of Panama, to which all of us agreed, and that Evening we weighed, having a Wind blowing from the Land, which served us till the 27th. at Noon, when it blew very hard from the Southeast, accompanied with Rain till the 28th. in the Evening, when it began to allay, we were favoured all the 29th. with a Westerly Wind, and that Evening were brought in sight of Cap● Blanch. On the 3●th. the Wether was fair enough, but on the 31st. two hours before Day light, it grew very boisterous, so that we were forced to put in for that Cape; we had a Thunderbolt fell upon the end of ou● great Sail Yard, which did no more than crack it: Having moderate weather on the first of Iu●e, we steered East-South-East, and next day about Noon, had a sight of Land, but it was so hazy, that we could not tell where we were, however we steered East by Southeast, to come near. The Wether being now somewhat cleared up, we found we were between the Bay of Boca-del-Toro, and the Point called Barica, when we sailed South and by Southeast, to put out to Sea, and then bore to the North-East, that we might reach the Isle of St. john de Cueblo.  
On the 7th, we put in at the Isle of Montosa, six Leagues to the Southward of that of St. john; We set out three Canoes, with which we coasted round about this last, and our Ships anchored at another little Island, which is half a League to the East: While we were going round St. John's Island with our Canoes, we found nothing there but one of our Prisoners, who having made his escape from us when we were there, and being not able to get to the Continent, returned to us: On the 10th. we went back to our Ships, and next day took in our store of Water and Wood, and cleaned our Ships: There arose the succeeding Night a North Wind that tore our Cables, and made us think we should be thrown ashore; But as good Luck would have it, it came about and gave us an opportunity to make ready, and to cast Anchor farther from the Shoar. By the favour of the Lightning we discovered our Canoes, and ●ound their Ropes also broken, and that the Waves were throwing them ashore also, unless we had saved them, though we could not hinder one of them from being s●aved to pieces.  
On the 13th. we made ready, and sailed for La Villia, with a West-South-West Wind, made Land on the fifteenth, and knew it to be the Cape called Morn a Puercos, than we bore off to Sea with a hard Wind till the Evening, when the Wether grew so very bad, that we did nothing till the 18th. but let our Ships drive with a South-West Wind, having terrible Rain all the while till Noon, when the Wether grew better, and being cleared up, we dicserned three Rocks, which are called the Three Brothers, standing three Leagues to Leeward of the Bay of Villia, whither we were going. On the 19th. we saw the Point M●●a, which is Leeward of that Bay; We sailed all Night Northward to get to the Shoar, and next Morning at break of day, we found ourselves within five or 〈◊〉 Leagues of it, when we furled all our Sails except our Spritsail: Next Evening we went on Board our Canoes, and put on all Night after we had given our Ships orders to lie by, 
The Buccaneers take La Villia, and a very great Booty  and wait for us at the mouth of the Bay where we were.  
On the 21st. in the Morning we discovered the place where we were to go ashore, and cast Anchor till Night came, as we also took down our Masts, for fear they should be discovered from the Shoar, and then made our selves ready to Land, which we did on the 22d. 〈◊〉 hour before day: But Experience telling us we had 〈◊〉 time enough before us to get to the place before day light appeared, we put three Leagues off where we anchored, having no where in this Bay above fifteen Fathom Water. That Evening we made for the shoar● again, which we could not recover before Midnight, because the Currents were against us. After we had 〈◊〉 Footing, we marched to the number of an hundred and sixty Men directly to the Town, and took one 〈◊〉 two Spaniards, whom we found on the way, who told us that he was sent by the Alcaide Major to watch 〈◊〉 the Seaside, because they had seen a Ship and a Bark aloof off, which yet they were so little alarmed with, 〈◊〉 they had increased their Guard with no more than twenty Men: We continued our march, and for all the Expedition we were able to use, it was an hour after Sunrising, before we could get to the Town, where we sound no resistance, half of the People●being then at Mass: 〈◊〉 Men and Women we took three hundred Prisoners, 〈◊〉 whom we understood there were three Bark● in the River on which the Town was situated. We sent presently out a party to take them, but the Spaniards having lo●● no time, sunk one of them, hid the Sails and Rudder ● the other two, and cut down their Masts by the middle so that the Party going on further, gave notice to 〈◊〉 of us, whom we had left to take care of our Canoe● which they found at Anchor at the River's Mouth, 〈◊〉 we had taken Villia; We gathered together that day 〈◊〉 Merchandise which the Fleet had left in this Town computed by the Spaniar● to be worth a Million and 〈◊〉 half, and to the value of fifteen Thousand pieces 〈◊〉 Eight in good Silver, which was an inconsiderable 〈◊〉 to what we should have found there, if the Spaniards in all these Countries, who are always apprehensive 〈◊〉 of the visits of the Freebooters, had not hid their Treasures out of our sight, many of whom chose rather 〈◊〉 be killed, then to discover the places where they 〈◊〉 buried them.  
On the 24th. we sent a party of fourscore Men 〈◊〉 conduct a like number of Horses laden with Bales 〈◊〉 Goods to the River side, where we knew there were 〈◊〉 Canoes belonging to the Spaniards, on Board of which after they had put them, they were to bring them to the River's Mouth, where ours were, but one of our Men sent upon this occasion, was taken by the Enemy: The same day we sent a Letter to the Alcaide Major (as they call him) in order to know whether he would ●ansom the Town, and buy the effects we had seized: He sent us Answer, that all the Ransom that he took up●● him to give us was Powder and Ball, whereof he had a great deal at our Service: That as to the Prisoners we had taken, he committed them to the hands of God; ●●d moreover, that his People were getting together as 〈◊〉 as they could to get the honour to see us. Upon the receiving this Answer which angered all our Men, 〈◊〉 fired the Town, and went our ways to lie in a place where our Booty was kept by our fourscore Men, which was about a quarter of a League off: We were alarmed several times that Night, and on the 25th. put the best and finest effects on Board the two Spanish Canoes, because we could not carry off all. For our own Canoes, as we have said, were at the mouth of the River, on Board of which we could have laden 〈◊〉 rest, but they durst not come up thither because of the Ambuscades of the Spaniards who had already killed them a Man, as they were endeavouring to come up to 〈◊〉 pursuant to the orders we had before left with them: Wherefore having laden the two Spanish Canoes, we 〈◊〉 nine Men on Board them, and the rest guarded them by Land all along the River side, while six hundred Spanish did the same on the other side, without being discovered by us, because of a great many Trees, Bushes and Thickets, that grow along the Banks thereof. When we had marched on about a League, we came to a 〈◊〉 so full of these Trees and Thickets, that we could 〈◊〉 pass it, so that we were obliged to take a turn about which brought us off from the River side about two hundred Paces, which was the occasion, as you will hear, of the loss of all our Booty, and the Death of some of our Men.  
As we quitted the place where we lay, we ordered those who had the charge of our Canoes to stop in this River, 
The Spaniards surprise and retake the Booty.  at a place where there were three Spanish Barks, to the end we might endeavour to bring them away; but when they came there, they were suddenly surprised with 〈◊〉 Ambuscade, of which the Spaniards were never niggard to us, and as they defended themselves against them, the Current of the River drove them beyond the three 〈◊〉 and consequently far from us, which was exactly 〈◊〉 they would have, for as soon as they saw them in a 〈◊〉 where we could not relieve them; they discharged 〈◊〉 Musket shot at them, with which they killed four 〈◊〉 wounded one: The rest made their escape to the 〈◊〉 side of the River and abandoned their Canoes, which dozen Indians who swum the River, carried to the 〈◊〉 niards, who cut off the Head of one of our Men, 〈◊〉 was only wounded, and set it on the top of a Pole, 〈◊〉 we might see it, as we came down the River.  
After we had finished the Tour we had taken, 〈◊〉 drew near the River again, and being to come to 〈◊〉 place where the three Barks were, and not finding 〈◊〉 Canoes, we thought they were still behind; but abo●● an hour after, we saw three of those who had the 〈◊〉 of them, coming through the Thickers towards us, 〈◊〉 gave us a Relation of the Disaster that befell them, 〈◊〉 said that as they passed the Woods, they found 〈◊〉 Rudders and Sails of those three Barks, in two of whi●● we embarked ourselves all together, and sent out 〈◊〉 stantly fifty Men by Land before us, to seek out 〈◊〉 Sails and Rudders, giving them a Signal, that we wou●● fire off three Guns, and that they should answer us 〈◊〉 as many, to show where they should find us, to the 〈◊〉 they might join us there. But at the same time that 〈◊〉 fired our three pieces, we heard the report of abo●● five hundred, which made us immediately conclude 〈◊〉 Men were attacked, wherefore we delayed not to go 〈◊〉 shore in order to relieve them; but by the time we ca● up, the Engagement was over, and had not the River be●● between them and us, the matter had not been ended 〈◊〉 We found one of our People in this place, who had 〈◊〉 bed out of our Vessels, after we had brought away 〈◊〉 Ship tackle that were hid in the Woods.  
After we were embarked, we asked the Captain 〈◊〉 Horse of Villia, that was our Prisoner, where it was 〈◊〉 Spaniards could lay other Ambuscades for us; he answer it might be about the River's Mouth, and not only 〈◊〉 but that we should mistrust all those places, which seethed to give them any advantage over us, and then 〈◊〉 came to an Anchor, because of the coming in of th● Tide.  
On the 26th. we went ashore at the place where they 〈◊〉 Killed our Men the day before, we found the two canoes dashed to pieces, and the Bodies of our Men ●hom they had wounded in several places after they 〈◊〉 dead: One of them they had thrown into the Fire, 〈◊〉 put the others Head upon a Pole, as we have said ●●ready. These Objects so enraged our Men, that they 〈◊〉 off at the same time four of their Prisoners Heads, 〈◊〉 they set up also upon Poles in the same Place. ●hen we took the Bodies of ours to bury them on the 〈◊〉 side, and before we got thither, we were forced ●●ree times to go ashore to break through the Ambuscades ●ll for us all along the River, at the mouth where●● we found also that we were warned of by the Cap●●●n of Horse aforesaid, but we happily freed ourselves ●●om it, though with the loss of three Men, and one ●●unded. At last we rejoined our Canoes, where one 〈◊〉 our wounded Men died soon after.  
The River of Villia is very large, 
La Villia River described.  and at Low-water breaks at the mouth of it as on a flat Shoar, about a ●●ague to Windward stands a great Rock, which Night 〈◊〉 Day, and at all Seasons, is covered with a vast num●er of Birds called Frigates, Maubies, and great Goziers', 〈◊〉 live altogether by fishing: Great Ships cannot enter to this River, they being obliged to anchor within ●●non shot in the Sea, but for Barks of about forty 〈◊〉, they can go up a League and an half within it: 〈◊〉 Port or place of Embarking belonging to Villia, is 〈◊〉 a League and an half higher, and the Town a quar●●● of a League distant from it, it's very well situated, 〈◊〉 its Churches are almost fallen to Ruin, though they 〈◊〉 very rich on the inside: Its Streets are very strait, 〈◊〉 the private Houses pretty well built, on the out 〈◊〉 of it are a great many Hattos, accompanied with ve●● fine Savana's: The Town of Nata which is the nigh●●, stands seven Leagues distant from it.  
On the 27th. came a Person on Board us to redemand 〈◊〉 Prisoners, with whom we agreed for ten thou●● pieces of Eight ransom, and threatened to cut 〈◊〉 all their Heads, if they did not send us the Money by 〈◊〉 29th. But instead of that, he returned to tell us, that 〈◊〉 Alcaide Major had seized upon those of their Peo●●●, who were our Prisoners whom we had sent ashore 〈◊〉 get wherewithal to ransom their Wives, in revenge whereof we presently cut off the Heads of two Prisoner's and gave them the Messenger to carry to the Alcaid● telling him, if he sent us no other answer, we wo● cut off the Heads of the rest, and after having put 〈◊〉 Women upon an Island, we would go to take himself: 〈◊〉 same Person in the Evening returned to tell us, that 〈◊〉 the Ransoms would come, and that besides them, th● would bestow upon us ten Beefs, twenty Sheep, an● two packs of Meal, the least whereof usually weigh● an hundred pound, every day as long as we stayed.  
On the 30th. they brought us back the Man, who they had taken, in Exchange for the Captain of 〈◊〉 that was our Prisoner; and as they show themselves 〈◊〉 fond of having French Arms, they pretended to 〈◊〉 lost them that belonged to our Man, for which we 〈◊〉 them pay four hundred pieces of Eight: They propose● to buy them one of the Barks we had taken from the● and agreed with us for six hundred pieces of Eight, a● one hundred pound of Nails, of which we stood in 〈◊〉 need, whereupoon we delivered her up, after we 〈◊〉 first taken out her Tackle and Anchors. They also ●●quired a Passport from us, that we would not retake 〈◊〉 Bark, in case met with her out at Sea, but only the 〈◊〉 wherewith she should be laden, which we also gave th●  
Next day in the Evening they brought us the ten th●●sand pieces of Eight, 
They receive the Ransom of the Prisoners.  as had been agreed upon, than 〈◊〉 weighed, in order to go anchor at a place that served 〈◊〉 a little Port to an Hatto, where they were to give us 〈◊〉 hundred and twenty faulted Beefs: We departed fro● thence on the fourth of july, and anchored at 〈◊〉 Isle of Iguana, to see and get us some Water, not 〈◊〉 ring to go and get us any on the Continent that 〈◊〉 guarded with four thousand Men: But after we had ●●●sed in some places, and found that the Water was bra●●ish, we resolved rather than we would die for thirst, make a descent with two hundred Men on the 〈◊〉 Firma, in order to procure us some in spite of the S●●niards, whom we found about an hundred paces from 〈◊〉 Seaside lying upon the Grass, and after a short Fig● put them to flight, seeing we were a People would ●●●zard all for a small matter: This being over, we presently filled some Casks with Water, and reimbarked again.  
On the 7th. we weighed Anchor and sailed for the King's Isles, and on the 9th. anchored at Morn a Puer●● fourteen Leagues to Leeward of the Island Iguana ●o take in more Water, there being no Body there to oppose us: We departed on the 10th. with a favourable West-Wind, and that day one of our wounded Men died. On the 13th. we discovered an Island called Galera, which is to Leeward of all the King's Islands, and on the fourteenth we began to perceive the Currents that reign all the year round between those Islands, which made us 〈◊〉 farther off to Sea. On the 15th. we had a North-West Wind, a fresh Gale which brought us near Land, and three days after which was the 18th. discovered Cape 〈◊〉, and kept all day the at Cape, for fear of being discovered by the Inhabitants of those many Islands that were round about us.  
On the 21st. in the Evening we went on Board our canoes, and landed at Midnight, but for all the Pre●●tion we had taken, we were discovered by the People▪ that were fishing for Oyster Pearls, which are to be and in great numbers, sticking to the bottom of the ●ocks that are round about these Islands: On the 22d. 〈◊〉 the Evening we discovered from one of these Islands ●here we had made a descent, a Ship under Sail, to 〈◊〉 we gave chase, and came up with her two hours before day light, when without any more ado we board●●▪ and made ourselves masters of her: The Men on 〈◊〉 told us the Inhabitants of Panama did not think 〈◊〉 were so near, and that as we had come from the king of Villia, they believed we had chose rather to 〈◊〉 gone and wintered at St. John's Island, where they ●●ought still we had built a Fort, grounding their persuasions upon those shams, I have before observed, we 〈◊〉 formerly made, and still did as we found occasion. They told us also that six and Thirty English and French were come from Peru in a Bark, with an intention to 〈◊〉 by the way of the River Boca-del Chica to the North 〈◊〉, but that the Spaniards having intelligence thereof, from the Indians, with whom they had made Peace, since they had granted us passage through their Country by 〈◊〉 same River into the South-Sea, went out to meet ●●em in great numbers, had defeated the greatest party, 〈◊〉 brought one Prisoner to Panama: Moreover, that too English Parties consisting of forty Men each, having an intention to pass from the North to the South-Sea, had been all of them Massacred but four, who were still Prisoners at Panama; and lastly, that there was a Bark in the River of Boca del Chica, that tarried for eight hundred Pounds in Gold, dug up in the neighbouring Mines in order to carry it to Panama.  
On the same day we returned on Board our Ships, and sound them at Anchor by the greatest of the King's Islands, and ordered our Carpenters to make an Half-Galley of the Bark we had taken on the 26th. We put some Questions afresh to the Captain of the said Bark, who told us, they were in daily expectation at Panama of the Arrival of two Ships laden with Meal, which were to carry also the Pay of their Soldiers from Limas; ●upon which Information we sent out our Half-Galley, which was now finished, to scout without the Islands; On the 30th. we departed with our Canoes, and went ashore upon one of these Islands, where we surprised a Person that was come from Panama, whose Master was Captain of those Greek Pirogues, whereof we have formerly spoken, who came on purpose thither to be taken, to the end he might endeavour by Artificial ways to lead us into a Snare of which I am ready to give ● an account. This Man immediately pretended a great deal of sincerity, in telling us several things, which he knew we were not ignorant of, and some others, which we could not quickly and easily come to know; and among the rest, that there were in the River of Seppa, two Merchant Barks, and a Pirogue with sixty Indians ●o Board, whom the Spaniards had armed since they made a Peace with them; That besides, the Governor of Villia had acquainted the Precedent of Panama, that one of our Men whom they had taken, had assured him that thirty more of us, who had not been informed, of the Peace, and good▪ understanding, there was between the Indians and the Spaniards, were about to pass from this Sea to that of the North, by the same way we all of us had come into the South-Sea; And that upon this Information, the Precedent had sent an hundred Men into the River of Boca del Chica to wait for them: But to compass his Design, which was to draw us under the Forts of Panama, he told us in the last place, that they had a little Frigate which came laden into that Port, and a Gaily that was sent out every Evening upon the solved to take the Advantage of this Information which we took to be candid and real, and not to neglect this opportunity of getting some Vessels for ourselves, whereof we stood in great need.  
On the 1st. of August we sent our Galley for this purpose into the River of Seppa, 
The Greek Captains Stratagem discovered, and he killed▪  in order to take one of the Barks our Captain spoke of, and at the same time we departed also with four Canoes to go and seize those Ships in the port of Panama, being accompanied by our Greek Intelligencer, who intended to be our Guide upon this occasion. He brought us two hours▪ before day light before the Town, and as the Moon shone very bright, we stayed for some Cloud to obscure it, to facilitate our approach undiscovered to the Ships in the Port, whereof we saw one already, which to our thinking had her Sails lose: And here was the lure and snare to which the Captain lead us, but by the effect of mere chance, or rather our own good Fortune, we turned away to a Ship which we unexpectedly saw going out of the Port, and gave her chase, believing the same to be the Galley that usually went out to scout, as we had been told: We took her without a Gun shot, and upon Examination of the Captain who commanded her, he discovered unto us, that the Precedent of Panama had sent us a Greeck, who was to suffer himself to be taken by us, and to whom he had promised a very great Reward, if he succeeded in the project he had form of destroying us, that the means that had been agreed upon to effect it, were to bring us under the Forts of that Town, alured with the hopes of taking those Ships there wherewith he had amused us, and whereof that which seemed to us to have her Sails lose, was but a shame Ship, a Pistol shot from the Port, which was built upon firm Land, of ●orty Planks ill set together, in which they had set up Masts, and adorned her with some Sails: And as this was the most apparent Object, and the first that offered itself in sight; it was not to be questioned, but that we who must believe the same to have been on the Water, being deceived with the darkness of the Night; would not have sailed (being so greedy as we were to take her) to row up to her, where our Canoes must infallibly run far ashore, and that in the time that must necessarily have been spent in getting them off, the Spaniards would have leisure to fall upon us, where they did not doubt, but so great a number of Men as they had in so considerable a Town as that was, would quickly overpower and destroy us.  
This Information which came so seasonably, that it saved us from the certain danger we were going to throw ourselves into, was not so advantageous to our Greek Captain, who being known by the Captain of the Bark, for the same Person, of whose treachery he had now advertised us; we paid him for his Trouble, by sending him to the other World, where he designed to have sent us, after which we went to take the Island of Tavoga, which had been reinhabited since we had left the Coast of Panama.  
From the second at Night to the third, we left this Island, and went to take that of Ottoqua which is two League's North and South from it, and which we found peopled again: We made ready on the fourth to go and join our Galley, whom we had appointed to Rendesvouz at the Isle of Sipilla, but we found her in our passage with a Prize she had taken, being one of the Barks that were in the River of Seppa, from whence in coming out, she had met with an Ambuscade that killed her two Men, and broke the Arm of another.  
On the fifth we saw five Sail between Tavoga and Panama, we presently bore up to them, and found they were our own Ships that had given chase to a Bark come from Nata, laden with Provision. The Master thereof finding he could not defend it, threw himself into the Water and swum ashore, after he had made some discharges with his small Arms upon them: On the sixth we went with our Prizes to Anchor at Tavoga, and from thence writ to the Precedent of Panama, that if he would not give up the five English and French Prisoners, he had in that place, we would cut off the Heads of fifty Spaniards we had in our Hands: But hearing no News of him, on the seventh we weighed, and sailed for the king's- Islands: We anchored on the ninth, to stop the Leaks of our Ships, and while that was doing, we departed with our Galley and four Canoes for the River Boca del Chica, as well to be informed whether it was true, that the ●●dians of Sambe had made Peace with the Spaniards, as we had been assured, as to go and burn all that was built of the Town called Terrible upon this fine River, that it might be a defence to a Gold Mine they had near. We went also to fight the hundred Men, which the Greek told us lay in wait for thirty of our Free Booters that were to pass into the North Sea.  
On the 11th. we arrived at the mouth of the River Boca del Chica: We lay at Anchor there till Midnight, when we weighed, and as the Sea swollen, we suffered ourselves to be carried up the River at the pleasure of the Current. About two in the Morning our Guide still believing we were far from the place whither he was conducting us, made us put on apace, which did us great harm, for instead of going to surprise others, we were surprised ourselves; For about a quarter of an hour after, we saw Fire, but there was no going back now, for the River made a Bow, from whence the rapidness of the Tide coming in, threw us in spite of our Teeth upon these Fires, which we came quickly to know were kindled by those hundred Men we were in quest of, for they presently asked us from whence our Canoes were bound, and being answered by our Guide pursuant to our Order from Panama, they asked again who was the Commander, and we being long in pitching upon a Spanish Name, they gave us a full Volley: But two Petereroe-shot which we made at them, having forced them to quit their Ground, we passed on, and Anchored out of the reach of their Arms, to wait for the ebb of tide, that we might get out again, for as we could find no place to go ashore above them, for the Country was full of Marthes', except at the place where they were, we resolved to take them lower down, and so an hour before day light we went back before their Entrenchment, after we had put all our Men under Deck, and fired four Peterero-shots, wherewith we saluted them so opportunely, that we wounded them a great many Men, and they made no great firing upon us.  
On the 12th. 
The Buccaneers beat the Spaniards out of their intrenchments at Boca del Chica.  we took a small Vessel upon this River, wherein were three Indians; then we went ashore with an intention to attack the Spaniards from behind their Intrenchments, which commanded the River only; But they presently sent out their Pirogue to take ours, which made us expeditiously return on board our Vessels to defend them and to alter the manner of our attack, by resolving to go to them before their Court of Guard, at the Foot whereof we went ashore in spite of all the fire they made upon us, which lasted not long: For our Petereroe and Musket-shot killed them a great many Men, which made them quickly fly and leave us their Entrenchment, where we found a great many Dead and Wounded Men, and took some Prisoners, among whom there was one named Alfier. He was an Indian, who out of a blind Zeal he had for the Interests of the Spaniards, took us for them as we were going on board our Canoes, and reproached us highly, but we quickly disabused my Gentleman, letting the Traitor know, to whom we had before been so kind in our passage by the same River, that we were become his Enemies since he was become ours, and then put him out of a condition ever to serve the Spaniards or to injure us.  
Those whom we took Prisoners, informed us that we were discovered at the New Town Lafoy Terrible, and confirmed the account we had before of the Massacre of the three parties already mentioned, as well those who would have gone to the South-Seas, as the other who were minded to return by the way of that River to the North. Within this Entrenchment we found a Letter writ by the Precedent of Panama, to a Campmaster that commanded in the Town La Terrible, which is as follows.  
When the Enemy took La Villia, 
The Precedent of Panama's Letter to a Camp Master.  one of their Men was taken, who gave us information that thirty Men were to set forth by the way of the River Boca del Chica to return to the North Sea, as believing there was still a good understanding between them and the Indians. I have sent you three hundred Men to defeat those Enemies of God and Goodness; be sure to keep upon your Guard, be afraid of being surprised, and your Men will infallibly be gainers in defeating of them.  
Here it may be said that the Prisoners whom we took, were highly useful to us, as well by giving us means to subsist in these parts, as to deliver us from a great many ' Ambushes and Dangers, whereinto had it not been for them, we must have fallen; witness this same, where the Spaniards would have spared our thirty Men the pains of going to the North-Sea: At last when we had burnt their Court of Guard, we took their Pirogue with some pounds of Gold-dust we found there, and then went down the River: As for those three Indians whom we took in the Boat, we sent them to tell their Comrades, that we had killed him who was with the Spaniards, but that we had given them quarter, because they were not amongst them, and this we did to endeavour to make them kind to us, and so disunite and separate them from the Spaniards.  
Being got down on the 13th. at Noon to the mouth of the River, we met with one of our Barks, whom we had ordered to come and attend us thither. Those within her told us, that while they waited there, two Indian Pirogues being deceived with the sight of three or four Spanish Prisoners whom they had put upon the Deck for that purpose, came of their own accord and delivered themselves up into their Hands, with some Pounds of Gold they had found there; and that one of those Indians who bore great sway amongst his own Nation, had a Commission from the Precedent of Panama, to arm several Pirogues, and to make War upon us: We weighed that Evening, to go and join our Ships that were cruising between Cape Pin, and Kings Islands, and there we waited for those of the Spaniards, who, we were told, were to come from Lima.  
We got on Board our Ships on the 17th. in the Morning, and that Evening in our Passage by the King's Islands, anchored to leave our Bark there to be Careened: Our people during our Absence, had p●t forty Prisoners ashore upon one of these Islands, who accidentally happening to meet with 〈◊〉 Canoes, which the Spaniards had hid thereabouts, they made use of them to get off, and to go to Panama to inform the Governor of the course we were to take, and that the Ships we had left there were but weakly manned, which induced the Precedent to send some force to attack them: But God was pleased so to order it, that we were returned with them to the rest of our Company.  
On the 20th. we made ready to go to cruise about Tavoga, and that Evening anchored before the Port of Panama, in order to learn some News: We saw two Ships in the Road, whither the Town Canoes went and came all along without Intermission; but not dreaming they armed them against us, we anchored on the 21st. at Tavoga.  
On the 21st. by break of day, 
They took two Spanish Ships  we descried three Sail just upon us, which we could not discover before, because of one of the Points of the Island, which kept them out of our Sight, insomuch that one of our Ships that had not time to weigh Anchor, slipped her Cable. As soon as they saw us make ready, they gave us some Guns, and as they had the Weather-gage, they did not spare to make use of the advantage they had over us. We made five racks to get to Windward of them, and they could not hinder us, but they lost the wind for want of Resolution, not daring to pass between the Island of Tavaguilla and a Rock, where there was indeed passage for no more than one Ship, but we ventured it, and at last got the Weather-gage: We fought them till Noon, and knew not on which side the advantage lay, and though they plied our Decks very close, we still persisted to keep them clear of them, which was the occasion that they lost a grand opportunity of mending their tackling. We threw a great many Granades into their biggest Ship, one of which had so good an effect, as to set fire to some loose Powder they had, which burned a great many Men, and this brought the Fight to end sooner than otherwise could have been expected: For we came up at the same time with the said Ship now all on Fire, and boldly boarded her, where notwithstanding the vigorous resistance they made from the Stern, whither they had all retired, we at last forced them to beg for quarter, and made ourselves master of the Ship: At the same time one of our Barks boarded one of theirs, and took it: The third that was a kind of a Galley, who stayed to the last, before she began to make her escape, as trusting to her good Sailing, soeing herself now pursued by our Galley, and two Pirogues, ran herself ashore, where she presently staved to pieces, and but very few of her crew were saved.  
They had in their little Frigate fourscore Men killed and wounded, out of an hundred and twenty that were on Board: As for the Bark there were no more out of seventy, than eighteen unhurt: Neither could we see above ten or a dozen in all that swum ashore from the other Vessel that was staved: All their Officers were either killed or wounded, and among others, the Captain, who received five Musquet-shot. He was the same Person that fought so stoutly at Pueblo Nuevo, where he had received five more, and that had also laid an Ambuscade for us at La Villia: But this last engagement rid us of him, for he died some time after.  
While we were busy in mending the rigging of those Ships we had taken, and throwing the Dead overboard we discovered two Sail more come from Panama, which bore up towards us, whereupon we interrogated our Prisoners, in order to know what they should be: They said they did not question but this was the relief they sent them: At the same time we bethought ourselves of a stratagem to amuse and make them believe we were taken, which was by putting up Spanish Colours in our own Ships and in the Prizes, with English and French ones under them▪ As soon as these two Ships approached, they came up to our Ship, who received them quite after another manner than they expected: 
They decoy two Spanish Ships more.  Being thus surprised, they fired upon us with precipitation, and made off towards the little Frigate which they supposed still to be theirs, who calling to them to lie by, and the others not doing it, they threw some Granades into one of their Barks, which sent her to the bottom, while one of our Pirogues boarded the other, wherein they found four packs of Cords, but all of the same length, which they had made ready to eye us up with: But they reckoned their Chickens before they were well hatched, and these Ropes was the occasion that no quarter was given to those in the Bark, where they were found: We afterwards read the Commission of the Captain of the little Frigate, which imported he should chase us as far as St. john's Island, and that when they boarded us, they should spare none they found upon Deck, but only our Surgeons whom they were willing to save; and that Troops of Horse should march along the shore to take care that none of us made our escape to land in any Canoe.  
On the 23d. as we sailed away to go Anchor at Tavoga, we discovered another Sail going back to Panama, whom we chased and took: She was a Shalloop whom the Precedent had sent to fetch off our Anchor, which we had not time to hale● up the day before, which he came to know by the means of a Canoe, who passing that way, saw the Buoy. But for all the fatigues we had undergone in these Adventures we could not but scoff and laugh at the Precedent, who had sent us Ropes to hang his Men, and also sent away to take this Anchor, wherewith to Anchor our Ship in his Port, which he believed his Men would bring in: We anchored this Evening at Tavoga.  
We had but one Man killed in all the Fight, but there were twenty of us wounded, among whom was Captain Townsley, who died most of them of their Wounds: On the 24th. one of our Men died, and the same Evening we sent one of our Prisoners to the Precedent of Panama to carry him a Letter, wherein we required his giving up the five Freebooters who were his Prisoners, and to send us some Medicines for (as we said) the use of his own People, (though in truth it was for our own) we also complained heavily of the little quarter they had given to the three parties whereof I have spoken, whom they had inhumanly Massacred. He sent to us that Night the Commander of Seppa, who spoke a little French, with the following Letter.  
The Precedent of Panama's Letter.  
Gentlemen,  
I wonder that you who should understand how to make War, 
The Precedent of Panama's Letter to the Freebooters.  should require those Men of me that are in our Custody: Your rashness hath something contrary in it, to the Civility wherewith you ought to treat those People that were in your Power: If you do not use them well, God will perhaps be on our side on another occasion: And as for the little quarter you complain we have given, you see the contrary by those that have been in our Hands for some time past: If you please to put our Men you have in your power ashore, we will take care to have them cured of their Wounds.  
We ordered the said Officer to carry him our answer by word of Mouth, that if they would not send us our Prisoners, we would send them the Heads of all the Spaniards in our Possession. On the 25th. we weighed Anchor, and sailed away, for fear they should for an Answer, send a Fireship, as they had done by the English two Years before, and burn us: On the 26th. in the Morning we Anchored at the Isles of Pericos, that are not above a League distant from Panama. Towards Noon we discovered a Ship under Sail, and sent out our Galley to know what she was; It was our own long Bark that was come from Careening, wherein were sixty Men that were not present in the Fight. This day two of our wounded Men died, tho' all of them were but slightly wounded, which is no matter of wonder, for all the Spaniards Bullets were poisoned.  
On the 27th. in the Morning came one to us from the Bishop, (who concerned himself much in this Business, for he had stirred up the Precedent to fit out Ships against us) who brought us a Letter, which in substance was the same that follows.  
The Bishop of Panama's Letter.  
Gentlemen,  
THough the Precedent of Panama hath writ to you very inconsiderately, 
The Bishop of Panama 's Letter to the Freebooters.  I earnestly desire you to shed no more of the Innocent Blood of those that are in your Power, all of them having been engaged by constraint to make War against you: The Precedent obeys the King's Orders, who forbids him to restore any Prisoners of War; I'll do my endeavour to get the Men released, take my Word and rest satisfied.  
I am to acquaint you that all the English are Roman Catholics, that there is now a Church at jamaica, and that those four that are with us, having changed their Religion, are willing to live amongst us.  
This we saw was only a Pretence to detain our Men, ●nd this sly refusal, together with the Trouble we were ●n, for the loss of those who died continually of their Wounds, through the violence of the poison that had got into them, forced us, though with Reluctancy to resolve to send twenty of his People's Heads to the Precedent in a Canoe, and ordered him to be told, that if by the 28th. he did not send us all our Men, we would send him the Heads of all the rest of the Prisoners. I confess this was a violent way of proceeding, but we ●nd no other method left us to bring the Spaniards to Reason, and we knew them to be a People, who without we had showed this Resolution, would despise, and be so much the more bend to ruin us in a short time, by how much the more indifferent we showed ourselves, for they are usually no otherwise courageous, then when they believe their Enemies are of a dastardly Nature.  
On the 28th. betimes in the Morning came a Person on Board, who brought us our five Men, whereof four were English, and the other a Frenchman, together with some refreshments for the wounded Men, and a Letter to this purpose.  
The Precedent of Panama's Letter.  
I send you all the Prisoners I had in my Power, 
Another Letter of the President's.  and if there had been more, you should have had them delivered; But as for those that are in your Custody, I'll leave that to be managed according to your own Honesty and the practice of War.  
Hereupon we sent him a dozen of the most wounded amongst their Men, and writ to him the following Letter.  
A Letter for the Precedent of Panama.  
HAD you used us in this manner when we sent to you for the Releasement of our five Men whom you sent us, 
The Buscaneers Letter to the Precedent of Panama.  you would have saved the Lives of those Wretches, whose Heads we have sent you, and whose Death you have been the occasion of: We give you a dozen Men by way of Exchange, and require Twenty thousand pieces of Eight for the Ransom of those that are still behind: But in default thereof, we shall put them out of Condition to send us poisoned Bullets again, which is so manifest a contravention of the Laws and Maxims of a just War, that if we were minded to punish according to the rigour of those Rules prescribed thereby, we should not have given one Man of them quarter.  
Our five Men whom the Spaniards gave up to us, farther confirmed us in the account we had of the Massacring of the three forementioned Parties in the River of Boca del Chica, whereof they themselves were Eye-witnesses. About twelve a Clock of the same day, which was the 28th. we weighed, and anchored again at Tavoga to take in Water: And whilst Matters were concluded on between the Spaniards and us in respect to the ransoming of their people, we required they should come to a Treaty with us, which they consented to, and sent us daily divers Canoes full of Merchandise and other Refreshments, all which we had Dog-cheap of them, except Meal, Biscuit, Meat, and other Provisions which they Kept back, the reason whereof might be easily guessed at.  
On the 29th. their Messenger returned, who gave us an account that he had been about the City to get the Ransom, and that they had not got above six thousand pieces of Eight together, but as we were eager to be gone, we told them they must send us ten thousand pieces of Eight, or else we would go into the City to fetch them the effect of this blustering was, that on the first of November came a Canoe to tell us, that a Bark would bring us next day the Sum we demanded; and on the second, two of our Men died.  
As we saw nothing coming from Panama, we made ready and entered into the Port, and when we had hung o● our main Flag, we fired a Gun, they answered our Signally putting up a white Flag upon one of the Bastions of the Fort, to give us notice that the Money was not yet read●▪ which made us put out again, and lie all Night at th● Cape before the mouth of the Port: Next day came t● us a Knight of Maltha in a Bark, wherein he brought us ten thousand pieces of Eight, and received the Prisoner's from us. On the fifth, we anchored at Ottoqua, i● order to victual our Ships; on the seventh, two of 〈◊〉 Men died.  
On the Eighth, the Indians who had been our Guide●● in our passage from the North to the South-Sea, and who kept close with us ever since, were taken or murdered by the Spaniards upon this Island of Ottoqua, i● revenge for the Service they had done us: On the Eigh● in the Morning we put fifty Men ashore, to see if 〈◊〉 could find the place whereunto the Spaniards had withdrawn themselves, whom we could not find in their H●bitations, that we might know what they had done 〈◊〉 those Indians, but we could find nothing, save their Maney and Baggage, which they had hid in a Vault.  
The same day at Noon Captain Townsley died of his Wounds: We threw his Body into the Sea according to his desire, with such Ceremonies as are usual upon these occasions: On the tenth we weighed and came to an Anchor at Kings-Islands, and two days after, died one of our wounded Men. On the Seventeenth we put out with the little Frigate and long Bark, to sail to the port of Panama, to see whether they had any Ships there that might come to insult us, while our Vessels were a Careening: We had a North-West-Wind, so that we could not reach the Isles of Pericos before the tenth, when we found ourselves under the forts of that Town. We furled our low Sails, and as the Spaniards saw us bring to, they gave us three Guns, after they put up Burgundian Colours upon the Windward Bastion: But when we understood there was no Ship in that place, whereof we might be afraid, we went out a Cruising between Tavoga and Sippilla, we being resolved to watch those two Ships that were to come from Lima, and in the mean time we sent one of our Pirogues to bid our Men careen the Vessels with all Expedition, and that they need fear no danger from Panama. We had very bad Wether in this Channel; It blew round all the points of the Compass, with such violent Whirlwinds, that the Sea grew very boisterous: But on the 28th. the Wether proving more moderate, we discovered a Ship sailing all along the Coast of the main Land, after which we sent two Pirogues in chase: She would have entered into the Port of Panama, but they firing upon her from the Fort, as believing she was one of our Ships, she passed by, and our Pirogues took her: She came from Nato, and was laden with Provisions and Sugars, which she was carrying to our Enemies, who had the Charity to put her back to us.  
On the Eleventh, being not able to see any thing of what we waited for, we failed for the King's Islands, and as the Moon shone bright, we found the Currents very strong there also, which obliged us to anchor in the Channel, with all the Tides contrary to us, from twenty to forty fathom Water: We arrived on the 16●● at the Island where our Ships were careening, and found them all ready done.  
The Sea round about these King's Islands whereof I have spoken so much, is full of a great many very large Whales, who are infested by a Fish they call Espad●●●, that assaults them continually with a kind of Fish-bone, like unto a Sabre, fastened to their Heads, and 〈◊〉 makes those monstrous Animals to give such Leapt and Rebounds, that they raise themselves continually about the Water: But to return from a great Fish to a small one, I shall say, that besides Pearl-Oysters, which 〈◊〉 to be found in those parts in great numbers, there are also others that are exceeding good, and so large, that they are forced to cut them into four parts to 〈◊〉 them, and they are when roasted, exceeding white.  
We departed on the 18th. and sailed for those Islands that are in the Main, where we came to an Anchor on the Nineteenth in the Morning, and on the Twentieth put out with our Galley and two Pirogues to go to a Sugar Plantation which stands two Leagues to Leeward of panarna, giving Orders at the same time to our Ships to come and Anchor there Three Days after us. We possessed ourselves of the said Plantation, and seized all the People belonging thereto, who told us there was a Courier come from Chiriquita to Panama, who reported he had seen Two Ships, and as many Barks, belonging to the Freebooters, Anchor at the Port of that Town, who came for Provision there, wherewith we were somewhat surprised, and could hardly believe those Freebooters would have le●t so good a Coast as that of Peru was, (whither we knew they were gone) to come thither which is much worse; which difference has it rise from another than the abundance and quality of the Provisions that the former produceth, whereof I shall give 〈◊〉 an Account hereafter: We were also informed by these Prisoners, as it was very true, that a Galley which we knew well enough was in Building at Pana●● was finished, that she carried Two and fifty Oars, Five pieces of Cannon, ●and Forty 〈◊〉; that there were, what with those come from Carthagena and Porto Bello, Five hundred Men come to go on Board her and Two Pirogues, and that they watched the opportunity of our passing before their Port, as we had used to do, to the end they might put out in the Night, and surprise us during the absence of our other Ships, whom they supposed to be still a careening. On the 24th. we anchored at Ottoqua, to gather Mace and Rice that were ●till standing on the Ground; and next Day being apprehensive, according to the Report of our Prisoners, that there might be Freebooters at Chiriquita, we sent a Bark thither to give them Notice, if she found it to be 〈◊〉 so, that we would come up to them as soon as we had taken in some Provision along the Coast: we ●ut Nineteen Prisoners on the 29th, a Shoar, and made ●eady to depart with an Easterly Wind: we were got on ●he 30th. in the Morning over-against the Bay of la Vil●ia, we straitened our round Top, being afraid to be 〈◊〉 by it: we embarked in the Evening on our Canoes, 〈◊〉 on the 31st. at Midnight went a Shoar. We were quickly discovered by a Party that went the Rounds, which made us use all the diligence imaginable in order to get into the Town, before they had time to make themselves ready: But our Guide having lead us out of the way, another Party making the Round passed by, who no sooner saw us, but they made all the hast they could to get away, yet we fired upon them presently, which dismounted three of them and one we took Prisoner, who told us we were still three Leagues distant from la Villia, and that we were gone out of our way, that all the People there were at their Arms, and that they had had a Reinforcement of Six hundred Men sent them from Panama. Upon this information we stopped short, and were forced to return back again, because we knew very well that we were discovered, and that so we lost all our Labour. Before we went on Board; we went to eat to an Estancia that was half a League off from the Seaside, from whence the Spaniards brought us back by charging our Rear, from time to time, till that we had rejoined our Canoes, whereon when we had▪ reimbarked, we found ourselves so weary and fatigued, that we deferred till next Day to go and join our Ship, and this being perceived by the Spaniards, they fired so furiously upon us, that we were constrained to go lie at Anchor farther from the Shoar.  
On the 2d. of November, we rejoined our Ships that were cruising in that Bay, 
They beat the Spaniards.  In the Evening we anchored between the Island of Iguana and the Continent over-against some Hattos we saw there, with a Design to go and see for some Provision; to which end we went a Shoar, on the third at Noon, where we found the Spaniards got together, with whom we fought for half an Hour; They killed us one Man, and wounded another▪ But they could not hinder us to go to the next Hatt● where we found no sort of Cattle, for the Spaniards 〈◊〉 carried away, and drove them before them; here we lay this Night, but the Spaniards being unwilling to 〈◊〉 us have any Rest, we were forced at Midnight to march out against them, and made them quit the Field to us.  
On the Fourth we returned on Board our Vessels, having brought only some little Refreshments along wit● us to our wounded Men; and that Evening sailed away with a West Wind, keeping out to Sea to the Fifth 〈◊〉 Noon, when we returned to Land; at Midnight 〈◊〉 steered South Southeast, as near the Wind as we could till the Sixth, that we were brought back to the Shoar; about the middle of the following Night, we discovered a Vessel under sail and joined her: It was the Bark we had sent to Chiriquita, who meeting with very bad Wether, was constrained to put back under the Morn or Cape of Puercos: On the Seventh being not able to double the Morn because of the contrary West Winds, we sent our Galley to Chiriquita, instead of our Bark; we could not double the Morn before the Twelfth: and we had a blast of Wind in the Night that in itself was favourable enough for our Course, but the Currents carried us so to Leeward, that we were still on the Thirteenth Six Leagues to Leeward of the Morn. We steered West North-West, bearing upon the Isle of Tigers, the which stands Six Leagues North and South from the Continent, between the River of St. james and this Morn or Cape of Puercos: on the Fourteenth at Night we were apprehensive lest we should be driven too near the Shoar.  
On the 16th. we arrived at St. John's Island, where we met with our Galley returned from Chiriquita, having found nothing of what she sought for in that Place, which still increased the Suspicion we had already entertained, that the Precedent of Panama had caused a false Report to be spread abroad, that some Freebooters had been there, that so he might get us to quit his Port, and make way by our absence for those Ships that were expected from Peru, to enter into Panama, and this so much the more heightened our Courage, in that we came to understand one Day after another the cowardice and dastardly Nature of this proud Nation, who with her Three Decked Ships mounted each of them with Eighteen pieces of Cannon, and having Four hundred Men on Board, were afraid of pitiful Barks, who had but Four Guns and some Petereroes in all, with which however we waited for them.  
On the Eighteenth we brought our Galleys and Canoes a Shoar in order to clean them; two Days after we departed with an intention to take some Prisoners, from whom we might obtain certain Intelligence of the Truth or Falsehood of any Freebooters having been at Chiriquita, for they might have been gone before we had sent thither, and upon our departure we appointed our Ships to Rendezvous at the Isle of St. Peter, there to tarry till we returned. On the Morning of the 24th. we went a Shoar, Two Leagues to Leeward of the River Pueblo Nuevo, 
The Freebooters take St. Lorenzo.  where, after we had traveled till about Four in the Afternoon to discover some Houses, we saw Two Horsemen, one of whom we dismounted but he made his Escape, and took the other, of whom we asked where we were; And being informed that there was about half a League from thence to a Burrow called St. Lorenzo, we went that way and arrived there in the Twilight: Here we took a great many Prisoners, who told us they had heard of no Freebooters from the time we had taken Chiriquita, which now fully confirmed us in a belief of the Amusement the Precedent of Panama had entertained us with: on the 26th. we returned to the Seaside with our Prisoners, and discovered our Ships that were sailing to the Place of Rendezvous, to whom we sent a Canoe to give them Notice to come and Anchor at an Island which is over-against, and Three quarters of a League distant from the Port of St. Lorenzo.  
This Burrow stands a League and an half within Land, 
A Description of St. Lorenzo.  and is in my Opinion no more than a Village; Its Inhabited partly with Spaniards, and partly Indians, who, as I have already said, have been reduced by degrees, and submitted themselves to the Spaniards: It's a very open Country, and a Man is so far from being sure of what Place he is in, that he would believe himself to be at Chiriquita, when here, so like is the one to the other, as well in respect to the Burrow and Places adjacent, as for the course and disposition of the Rivers, wherewith it is watered.  
On the 26th. in the Evening, we went on Board our Ships with our Prisoners, and agreed with them upon what quantity of Provision they were to give us for their Ransom; on the 27th. we sent the Father or Curate of the Place a Shoar, to dispatch the sending of it: on the 28th. the English who made part of our Fleet desired us to come together in order to make a Division of the Ships and Artillery we had taken, as being desirous to be in a Ship by themselves, which was presently done: On the First of December, we sent a Canoe to the Continent, and the Men that were in her told us, they had seen a Troop of Horse who threatened them at a distance with their Cutlasses, which made us at Night to the number of a Hundred Men go a Shoar to see them: on the Second we waited for them in their Town of St. Lorenzo, but no body appearing, we burned it. As soon as the Spaniards saw the Fire, the Commander of the Place came to offer us a Sum of Money for the Ransom of the Prisoners, which we refused, because we had much more need of Provision: We told them if they did not send us the same, pursuant to the Agreement we had already made with their People, they should have no more to do than to send for their Heads away from the Island. In the said Commander's House we found the following Letter writ by the Tenient of Chiriquita.  
A Letter from the Tenient of Chiriquita, to the Commander of the Town of St. Lorenzo.  
SIR,  
I Have sent you by way of reinforcement all the Men which I could get together: 
The Tenient of Chiriquita's Letter, to the Commander of St. Lorenzo  use your endeavours to take one or other of the Enemy, to the end we may know what they design to do, about which our Generals are mightily concerned: Order the Cattle, to be driven away from the Seaside, and put them into a Place fit to lay an Ambuscade, to the end that the Enemy severing from one another according to their usual manner in order to kill them; It may be so much the more easy for you to secure some one of them: But if you cannot do that, lay an Ambuscade at a Place where you think they will put our Prisoners a Shoar, and let them show you those Persons whom they have observed to be most respected on Ship Board; so that if God gives us the Advantage over them, do not you cut them off, but send them to me; especially interrogate the Women, that you may know whether they have met with some weak Fellow that hath made any Discovery unto them.  
This Letter made us keep more upon our Guard than otherwise we would have done, and we returned on Board our Ships that Evening: On the Third we went in a Canoe a Shoar, to see whether they had brought the Provision agreed upon for the Ransom of their People, but instead of that we saw them busy in raising an Entrenchment near the Place where they expected we should make our Descent, which gave us to understand they pursued the Orders prescribed to them by the foresaid Letter. On the Fourth, we put those Prisoners ashore upon the Island where we had anchored, and left them there, without any further expecting of their Ransom, that so we might secure ourselves against that Ambuscade whereunto we must have fallen, had we sent them to the same Place where we took them.  
In the Evening we weighed and sailed for the Bay of Boca del Toro, with an Easterly Breeze that put us forward: on the Fifth we doubled the Point of Porica, which is Ten Leagues to Leeward of that Bay; at the height whereof we were becalmed till the Tenth; when towards Evening a small Wind blowing from the Sea arose, 
The Bucaniers in great danger of being Ship-wracked.  which brought us to the Mouth of the Bay: But the same was followed by so Terrible a Tempest, that our Ship lay for an Hour in such a manner that she was under Water as far as her great Scuttle; and what amazed us was, that our Ropes, Sheets, and Clulings, were cut so cleverly as if the same had been done with an Hatchet: However, this tearing of our Rigging served us in good stead, for had it not been for that, we had quickly gone to be Meat for Fishes: for our Sails being held by no other than the Wind and Arms alone, the Sails, Yards, yet stretched themselves out along the Masts, and our Ship by little and little happily recovered herself: The Wind was allayed in the Dusk of the Evening by a great deal 〈◊〉 that fell, wherewith we were becalmed; and on the Eleventh we had a Southerly Wind, which brought us to an Anchor in the Bottom of the Bay.  
The Mouth of this Bay of Boca del Toro, is about Four or Five Leagues in extent from one Point to another, and Eight in depth. If you would enter into it with safety, you must keep the Whip of your Rudder to Starboard, because 'tis dangerous to keep to the East side. Here is good Anchorage every where, and also a Covert; one may anchor in the bottom of the Bay, within Pistol shot of Land.  
There are Four Islands contained in it, that stand very near unto the main Land to the East and North-East, but it is not safe to lie near them, because of the many Rocks that are there. Several Fine Rivers discharge themselves into it, and lead us up them to divers Indian Carbets, who have neither Peace nor are in amity with any People whatsoever, no more than those whom I have mentioned when I spoke of Cape la Vella and Boca del Drago; which yet does not hinder the Spaniards from passing their Caravans through the midst of their Country, when they come from Costa Rica to Panama: But then they must be very well guarded; and the great Road through which they pass, is not above Six Leagues from the Seaside.  
On the Twelfth we went to find out Trees fit both to make Canoes of for carrying our Water, and Canoes of War: on the 25th. being Christmas-Day after we had, according to Custom, said our Prayers in the Night, one of our Quarter-Masters being gone a Shoar, in order to take care about our eating some Victuals, (for our Ships being a careening, all our Provisions were then put out) one of our Prisoners, who served us as Cook, stabbed him with a Knife in Six several places, wherewith crying out he was presently relieved, and the Assassin punished with Death.   

CHAP. IU.  
The Freebooters Voyage to the South Seas in 1687.  
ON the First of january, 1687. our Canoes being ready, we left this Bay and failed for that of Caldaira, that we might victual there, and make an end of careening our Ships: we left them there on the Second, after we had given Orders to those who had the charge of them, to come and join us in the Bay, and we embarked Two hundred Men in our Canoes, to crossover to la Cagna, which is a small Island very inconvenient to draw near to, and stands about a League North and South from the main Land, between Boca del Toro and Caldaira. We were six days in our passage before we could get thither, having only put forward in the Night for fear of being discovered: Being come on the Sixth at Night into the Bay, our Guide made us put in under a Covert, and told us that to prevent our being discovered, we should go a Shoar in that Place, 
A pretty adventure of the Freebooters.  which we had no sooner done, but we were conducted into a Marish, in the soundest places whereof we sunk in the Mud to the very Middle, insomuch that Five of our Men of whom we could see no more than their Heads, did not give us a small trouble to pull them out with Cords we made fast to Mangles, which are Trees of that Name growing in this Marish: So that not knowing how we should be able to free ourselves from this wretched Place, we lifted up our Guide to the top of a Tree, to endeavour by the help of Moonlight to discover how far we might be from sound Land: But he finding himself now at liberty, skipped like a Monkey from Tree to Tree, and railed all the while at us, who could neither see him nor do any more that threaten him, which I believe he little mattered. We spent the rest of the Night in making about an Hundred steps in this sweet Place, where we exactly went the Rounds, and from whence we could not come out till break of Day, and not then neither, without being bedaubed all over from top to toe, and having our Arms laden with Mud. When we were in a Condition to reflect a little upon ourselves, and that we saw Two hundred Men in the same Habit, and so curiously equipped, there was not one of us who forgot not his Toil, to laugh at the posture he found both himself and the rest in. At length, after having inveighed against our Guide who had so cunningly saved himself, when he saw us stuck fast in the Mire, we went into our Canoes again, where we cleaned ourselves as well as we could, as we did also our Arms, and after having left our Covert we met with a very pretty River, whereinto we entered and went up it about Two Leagues, where we landed at an Entrenchment. There we found the remains of the Two Ships which the Spaniards had burnt, when an English Freebooter, whose Name was Betsharp, came to careen in this Bay, which made us suppose, 
They take Sancta Catalina, the Town of Nicoya, and a good Booty.  according to the Relation that had been given us concerning it, that it was the Embarking Place belonging to Nicoya. We followed the Road we found there, and marching about Two Leagues, at the end of them we entered, by the help of the barking of the Dogs, into a Burrow called Sancta Catalina, where we took all the Inhabitants Prisoners. Now as we were informed by them there, that there was no more than three Leagues to Nicoya, we mounted sixty Men on Horseback, in order to go thither; but we met halfway with two Horsemen, whom we could not reach, and who returning back with full Speed, gave the Inhabitants notice of our March towards them, in so much that by the time we were got thither, they had already hid all their Effects, and were expecting our coming upon the Place of Arms, from whence we drove them, after we had sustained their first discharge, with which they neither killed nor wounded one of our Men. While we were gathering what Provision we could together, we sent out small Parties into the Neighbouring Places, who brought us some Money, and among other things, the governor's Plate, and all his Movables.  
On the 8th. we left the Town, and went to rejoin our People at Sancta Catalina, where we stayed the remainder of that day: At Night came two of the Enemy's Sentinels thither, one of whom we killed; for they, not knowing we were in the Town, were come to give the Spaniards notice that they saw three Sail of Ships enter into the Bay, and that they were Enemies; but this Intelligence came too late. On the 9th. we left this Place to go join our Canoes again, on which being embarked, we left one of our Prisoners ashore to go and raise the Ransom of those we carried along with us; and on the 10th. we got on board our Ships that ●ay at Anchor in the Bay. We had found among the Governor of Nicoya's Papers three Letters, which were these that follow.  
The Governor or General of the Province of Costa Rica his Letter to the Precedent of Panama; dated May 2d. 1686.  
SIR,  
THis Letter is to let you know of the taking of our dear Town of Granada by Pirates on the Tenth of the last Month: 
The Governor of Costa Rica his Letter to the Precedent of Panama.  They came ashore at a Place where we had no Sentinels, we supposing there was no occasion for it, because the Sea is so high there; they passed on cross a Wood like so many Wild Beasts: We had the good Fortune to have notice of it by our Fishermen, tho' we were already upon our Guard ever since the News we had concerning them from Lesparso and Nicoya. They lay on the Ninth at the fine House of Don Diego Ravalo, Knight of St. james, we were very well prepared to receive them; but the way of Fight practised by these Men did so much astonish ours, that we could not make that Resistance we had promised ourselves we should do: They fell on briskly, singing and dancing, as if they had been going to a Feast; at length, after we had been fought bravely by them, they won the place of Arms, with the loss of Thirty of their Men, according to the Estimate of Don Antonio de Fortuna, a Person of good Experience in War, who came to us some Months before. We are also of Opinion that they have lost their General, for we saw a Man, that distinguished himself from the rest by his Habit, fall.  
After they had stayed for the space of four Days in our Fort, they sent to require us to Ransom the Town and Prisoners they had taken; but we being not very forward to return an Answer to their Proposal, they burned it, and went their ways: Signior Don john de Castilia, Sergeant-Major, went out to observe them with his Men; but not knowing they took away our Artillery, he attacked these Enemies of God and Goodness about a Mile from the Town; but they being resolved to make their way through, or to die upon the spot, slew so great a Number of his Men, that the rest fled, and left their Commanders alone.  
We have taken one of their Men, who told us, they came to our Province upon no other Design, than to know the strength of it, tho' it's not to be doubted, if they had found our Vessels at Anchor, but they would have made use of them to pass, by the way of our Lake, to the North Sea, and have abandoned their Comrades, who looked after their Ships, and their way would have been infallibly by Carthage. Monsieur the Governor takes his Measures thereupon, and continues to Fortify his Retrenchment. I shall give you a more ample Account of this Business by the first Caravan.  
The Precedent of Panama's Letter to the Governor of Costa Rica.  
SIR,  
This is to give you Notice of the Advices I have received from Carthagena, 
The President's Letter to the Governor.  by the way of Puerto Belo. The King of France supposing he had received some Affront from our Nation, sent Eight Sail of ill sorts before Calix, to demand Contribution; and seeing there was so vast an inequality of Force upon this Occasion, we agreed to give him half a Million, to withdraw his Ships, and return to their Ports.  
You know that my Lord Bishop on the 22d. of August forced me to send out three Ships to fight the Pirates, that continued still before our Port, and took all the Barks and Canoes that were coming in. Our Ships surprised them at break of Day, which made one of the Pirates slip his Cable, and this was done, not for to fly away; but through the Skill of the Commander. I saw the Fight from my Ramparts, the Honour whereof I thought infallibly to have appertained unto us. Having seen them draw near the Shoar, I Sent a Chaloop to bring away the Anchor of that Vessel that had slipped her Cable, in order to fasten her in our Port. As soon as ever I saw them ungrappled, I dispatched away two long Barks or Galleys to go and learn the News, and to bring those of the Enemy that survived before me, tho' my Orders were, that no Quarter should be given to any that were found upon Deck, to the end we might rid the World of these Enemies of God and his Saints, who Profane his Churches, and destroy his Servants. In the Evening they sent one of our Men to require me to give up five Men of theirs, that I had Prisoners in my Town, and as my Prince forbade me to do so, I refused it; but these new Turks sent me Twenty Heads, and I bethought myself, that for the preventing of the slaughter of so many Christians, I ought to send them their Men, with Ten Thousand Pieces of Eight, for the Ransom of Ninety of our People, that were almost all wounded, which they sent us out of Three Hundred and Thirty they had taken with them. Thus you see how God is pleased to afflict us on all sides, let us take all for the sake of his Suffering for us.  
The Tenient of Sansonat's Letter to the Precedent of Panama.  
CAptain Francis Grogniet is separated from his 〈◊〉 at Realeguo, 
The Tenient of Sansonat's Letter to the Precedent of Panama.  and gone ashore with an Hundred and Fifty Men upon the Isles of Napalla: We took three of their Men, who told us, that those of them that were gone up towards Panama, had a Design 〈◊〉 return to the North Sea. The Peace we have made with the Indians will do us more hurt than good, we were concerned at least to observe their Motion, and stop up that Passage. Those People seeing no Place whereunto to retire, became as so many enraged Dogs. We had no need of that, for wherever these Irreligious Wretches set their Feet on Land, they always win the Victory. If you please, let them have free Passage, that we may be at rest; they came ten or dozen times ashore, without knowing what they wanted. Send us a Man who understands the way to Sea-fighting, for I am of Opinion, they will never be able to get off from these Islands, and so it will be convenient to go and take them there.  
On the 12th. as we saw no Ransom come, we set ou● to go ourselves to Nicoya to fetch it, where we arrived next day; we sent out several Parties also in search of some Victuals, which the People had hid, and sent one to treat with them about the Ransoming of their Town▪ The Tenient told us, the Governor was gone for Relief to Costa Rica, and that he had no Orders to pay any Ransom farther than what had been agreed on for the Prisoners, which was all ready, and that 〈◊〉 would not have us be impatient, if we received not the same as soon as we desired it, because they having no Canoes, whereby to send the Money to us by Sea, which might have been done in half a day's time (the Passaage was so short that way) had been obliged to have it carried on Mules backs by Land, which was four days Journey. When we had received this Answer, we sent again to tell him, that our Intention was to have been gone next day, but that however, seeing he waited in expectation of Succours, we would wait also; but at length growing impatient that things were so long retarded we went our ways on the seventeenth.  
Two days after, 
The Spaniards pay the Ransom of the Inhabitants of Nicoya.  being the 19th. they came to the Seaside, over-against the Place where our Vessels lay at Anchor, and brought us the Ransom they had promised for the Prisoners, whom we sent ashore at the same time. We gave them a Letter, which we writ to the Governor, wherein we sent him word, if he would let us know when his Reinforcement came, we should not fail to attend him, and that in the mean time, if he did not send us so many Horseload of Biscuit and Maes as we required of him, for the Ransom of the Town, he might assure himself we should go and burn it.  
On the 20th. we weighed Anchor, and went to one of the Islands in this Bay to careen our Vessels. On the 22d. we went off in our Canoes, leaving no more Men with our Ships than were necessary to Careen them, and sought out some Hattoes, where we might get necessary Subsistance, to the end we might lay by, and keep in store those Provisions we had got together on Board, and whereof we should have occasion in the Execution of an Enterprise we had form upon the Town of Queaquilla. On the 22d. at Night we went ashore at Caldaira, where we were discovered by the Sentinels, who, as they made their escapes, set fire unto the Savana's, in order to stop our Passage; however, this did not hinder us to reach the little Town of Lesparso, which had been almost entirely abandoned since the time of our being there before.  
On the 23d. we had the Curiosity, or rather Humour to pursue the first Road that offered itself to our view at our departure, and after we had marched about a League on, we discovered about Two Hundred Horse upon our Flank, and in our Rear: A Spaniard, who was advanced before the rest, made a thousand Mouths at us, and reviled us as much, which gave us an occasion to hide five of our Men, that were behind the rest, in the Grass, that was exceeding high upon both sides of the way, and leave our main Body to march on; so that when our Spaniard, who still followed our People, went to pass forwards, he was quickly dismounted, and we made him make a Grimace in good earnest: We questioned him according to our usual Ceremony, that is to say, by putting him on the Rack, about the place where we were: He told us, we were on the Highway of Carbage, and that all Places were quite forsaken from thence to this Town, which was no less than Seven and Twenty Leagues, out of an Apprehension his Country had, left we should go and force them to grant us Passage to the North Sea, as their chief Officers had caused it to be reported among them. He also gave us Information, that they had Four Hundred Men making their Rounds, whereof the Two Hundred we saw, were of that Number, being detatched to observe the time of our Landing, that so they might retire to a strong Retrenchment they had six Leagues on this side the Town, for to beat us back in case we made that way. Being thus preadmonished, we thought it not convenient to go any further, our Design being no other than, than to know the Country, and to get us some Victuals; so we returned to Lesparso, and on the 24th. rejoined our Canoes.  
On the 26th. we went ashore, under the Guidance of our new Prisoner, who brought us to a Sugar Plantation, where we divided into two Companies to go to two Hattoes, and took all the People we could meet with there, who informed us, that several other Hatlo's and Sugar Plantations in the Neighbourhood, had altogether set out Two Hundred armed Men, who 〈◊〉 gone in the Evening to beat back the Crew of three of the Enemy's Canoes, that had landed at Colebra, where they had killed and wounded divers Spaniards, We presently imagined it must have been Captain Grognist that was come up that Coast, and therein we were not mistaken; we immediately returned back to the Seaside, to go with our Canoes to meet him, and in our way heard the noise of several Canonshot and small Arms, towards the Place where we had left our Ship-Careening, which made us double our Pace, and reimbark in our Canoes.  
As soon as we were got on Board our Ships, 
Captain Grogniet rejoins the other Freebooters.  we found Captain Grogniet with three Canoes there, who with his Crew had been conducted to the said Place by one of our Canoes, whom they had fortunately met in crossing this Bay; and the Firing we had heard, was made by the one and the other for Joy of their meeting together.  
Grogniet told us, 
Grogniet's Adventures.  that he came up this Coast with an Intention to find out an uninhabited Place, to the end he might Land without Opposition, and to fetch 〈◊〉 compass cross the Country, to get the North Sea. We laid the Danger whereunto he must necessarily expose so small a Number of Men before him, (they being no more than Sixty in all) that if he were resolved to undertake so dangerous an Enterprise, it were better he would stay with us until we found a favourable Opportunity to repass together to that Sea, as being better able conjointly to surmount those Difficulties which we might be exposed to thereby. Being overcome with our Reasons, he stayed with us; and after we had given him an Account of the Adventures we had had since our separation from him, he also in his turn entertained us with a recital of his, and told us, he had made several Descents in the Bay of Napalla with various Success, and that among other things in one of those Descents, the Spaniards had taken three of his Men, who had been exchanged some time after for other Prisoners: But that the Spaniards had so far corrupted those three Men with the fine Promises they made them, while they were in their Custody, that upon their Return, they insinuated into their Comrades, in order to betray, they insinuated into their Comrades, in order to betray them, ●●design of going to a very considerable Gold Mine, which was Fourteen Leagues off from the Seaside, and as many from Tinsigal, and that being prepossessed of making their Fortunes there, they had left the Island where they were, to the Number of an Hundred and Twelve Men, and went ashore upon the Continent, with an Intention to go to that Mine, under the Guidance of the Prisoners, who knew the way, and towards which they journyed only in the Nighttime, for fear of being discovered; that those three Men who had been exchanged, and sold their Friends to the Spaniards, pretended they were weary, and had occasion to rest, that so they might not go with the rest; that for all this, they departed two hours after, bringing to the Spaniards, who waited in a convenient Place for them, all the Prisoners that were ashore in the said Bay, and after some time, carried off the Arms and Ammunition of all the rest of our Company that stayed behind upon the Island, who had no mistrust of them, whereof they laded a Canoe; but that the Treachery in the mean time had not had all the projected effect, and that he and his Men got to the Mine without Opposition, because the Spaniards, who had made all things ready for Massacring of them, when going ashore, got thither later than they should have done, and that through the fault of our Renegadoes, who had too much precipitated the departure of their Comrades, whom they thus saved by pressing them on to their ruin: That they had got no great Purchase at the Mines, because there had been Orders given before for saving their Treasure; though after all, it was not above an hour's space that they had got away Four Hundred and Fifty Pounds of Gold, that was all ready prepared. That yet they found some Pounds still left, and took some Prisoners, who were surprised by them, as not expeeting their Company so soon, and that they also did believe they had been defeated by the way, as the Design had been form against them.  
That when they had stayed two days at this Mine, and being intent upon returning with his Men to the Seaside, he met with a Body of Spaniards on the way, waiting his coming, and making a mien as if they would now upon his Return, make amends for the fault they had committed, in not preventing his Descent. Their Commander sent a Trumpet to Captain Grogniet, to know if he were minded to fight; who being answered, that he desired nothing more: The Spaniards sent a second time to tell him, that if he would give up his Prisoners, they would grant him free Passage; But he boldly answered, That if they desired to have them, they must come and fetch them by the help of their Arms; and as for the Passage, he would open his way through in spite of them. That having made themselves ready, the Spaniards had not the Courage to stay for them, contenting themselves only with firing a few Mosquets at a distance, and so fairly took to their Heels, while he pursued his March towards his Canoes, which had, as Good Luck would have it, been left in a Place, where the Renegadoes could not show them to the Enemy.  
He told us moreover, that some time after his return from that Mine, they had been at Pueblo Viego, by the way of a River that runs not above four Leagues, and discharges herself into the Bay of Napalla; that they had surprised the Town, and that after having rested there for some days, as they were coming back to rejoin their Canoes, they had met with an Ambuscade, laid for them under the Covert of a Retrenchment, guarded by Six Hundred Men out of the Garrison of Realeguo, which began to be inhabited again, with whom they had fought a long time: But finding the Spaniards stood to it more tightly than ordinary, they threw themselves into their Retrenchment, where killing all about them that made any resistance, they wrought a great Slaughter amongst them; That one part of them continued Prisoners; while the other fled without any more ado, and forsook their Retrenchment as well as the three Colours they had set up there: That the Freebooters had lost no more than three Men, but that the Spaniards in the heat of the Action killed several Prisoners of the one and the other Sex, which the other had brought away from the Town, who after this went on board their Vessels: That some Months after, not concurring with a Design which Fourscore and five of his Men had taken, of going down towards the Isles of Caly●fornia, he had resolved with the Sixty that remained with him to go up towards Panama, where happening, 〈◊〉 I have told you, to meet us, we gave both him and his Men room in our Ships, where we learned this whole Relation from them.  
On the 30th. we quitted our Ships, and went in our Canoes into several Rivers which discharge themselves into this Bay of Caldaira, and amongst the rest into a ●ery fine one, whereon we went up Ten Leagues, in ●ll which space we always found her of the same depth ●●d breadth. Several Spaniards told us, that a matter of Forty or Fifty Leagues higher there was a Mountain, ●●om whence arises the Spring of this River, and on the ●ther side of the same Mountain arises also a Spring, ●om which runs the River St. john, that discharges its if into the North Sea at the White Point,  
We took a large Canoe, laden with Tallow, in this ●iver, which some time after was of great use to us, by ●ay of Food, as we went to Queaquilla: We also found the Hattoes on this River's side, where we refreshed 〈◊〉 selves till the 6th. of February, when we returned a board our Ships. On the 12th. we departed, in 〈◊〉 to go the third-time and visit Nicoya; We arrived ●●re next day in the Evening, and presently detatched 〈◊〉 Parties to get us Intelligence concerning the Spa●●ards, who never appeared since they had threatened us 〈◊〉 their Succours, instead of the Ransom we required of them for saving their Town, 
The Freebooters burn Nicoya.  which they still refusing to satisfy us for, we burned it this Third time, and on the 17th. went our ways.  
But though we were forced to chastise the Spaniards in this manner, we showed ourselves very exact in the Preservation of the Churches, into which we carried the Pictures and Images of the Saints which we found in particular Houses, that they might not be exposed to the rage and burning of the English, who were not much pleased with these sorts of Precautions; they being Men that took more satisfaction and pleasure to see one Church burnt, than all the Houses of America put together. But as it was our turn now to be the stronger Party, they durst do nothing that derogated from that respect we bore to all those things.  
Nicoya was a small Town, 
A Description of Nicoya.  Pleasant enough taken altogether; Its Churches are very fine, and the Houses as ill built; they have a pretty River there, that runs about one half of the Town round; but when one is within, you cannot know which way it is you have entered, nor how to go out, because of the height of the Mountains wherewith it is surrounded every way.  
We were no sooner gone from this Town, but the Spaniards sent to set Fire to the Roads through which we were to pass, which yet we happily escaped, because they had but just begun to do it: We took one of this Men who was hemmed in between us and the Fire, and who conducted us to several Estancia's, from which we did not return before the 20th. And on the 22d. wept Forty Prisoners a Shoar, who were too chargeable to be kept on Board with us.  
Some Men perhaps may be amazed at what I have said concerning the burning of the Roads, 
How the Spaniards burn the Roads.  but they would be much more so had they seen it as we have done there were two sorts of Places where this burning was wont to be practised, to wit, in the Savana's and Woodsy when the former were set on Fire, whose Grass was almost as high as our Heads, and also as dry in a manner as Powder, we found ourselves so besieged on the right and left side of the Road with the Flame, that it made 〈◊〉 feel it to some purpose, tho' the same were of no long duration; But when these Roads lead through Convert and woody Countries, as in the present Occasion whereof am speaking, and that once fire be fet thereunto, 〈◊〉 may see, according to the course of the Wind, the Country for several Leagues burnt in a little time, to which the dryness of things doth very much contribute, 
They part from the English, and Grogniet again.  the Sun being exceeding hot at that Season.  
On the Twenty third we sent our Quartermaster on Board the English, to make an agreement with them: we proposed to go in Conjunction with them to take Queaquilla (where the Spaniards drove a great Trade by Sea) upon Condition that if we took Two Ships, we should cast Lots who should choose, and that in case there were but one taken, that then we would put Fifty Men of each Nation on board her, till such time as we could take another, which they would not agree to, as insisting upon the First choice: So that seeing we could not bring them to comply, we parted as well from them as from Captain Grogniet and Fifty of our Men who stayed on board him; so that they had an Hundred and forty two Men in their Ship, and we an Hundred and Sixty two in our Frigate, and long Bark.  
On the Twenty fourth we weighed and set fail for Queaquilla, which is the First maritime Town on the South Coast as you go thither from Panama; we made all the sail we could to get thither before the English, who had form the same Design as we had done; we lay by till the 25th. to get out of the Bay, and in passing from the White Cape, we steered South South-West, South and by South-West, and directly South to the 28th. in the Evening, that we had on our Starboard side a West North-West Wind, bearing us to the South, which lasted till the 29th. when we were becalmed in the Night: On the First of March towards Noon arose a pretty fresh Gale from the North, which made us bear South South-West, and South Southeast, till the 4th. in the Morning, when an Easterly Breeze took us and made us bear South; on the Fifth arose a North-West Wind; and on the Eighth at Noon we passed the Equinoctial Line, leaving the Isles of Galapa, which are below to the West, a dozen Leagues to Leeward.  
These are Eight Islands that stand North and South of the Whihe Cape, and East and West from Queaquilla; they are full of Sea Tortoises that land there every Hour of the Day, and you cannot find a Place to tread on or walk along in the Woods, for the great numbers of land Tortoises, Lizards, and Agoutils, that retire thither: The Sea thereabouts is also so fruitful in the production of Fish, that they come to the very Sands to die there, but these advantages on the other hand are encountered with the want of Water, whereof these Islands are entirely destitute.  
The Wind towards Evening came to North North-East, and made us bear East and by Southeast to keep to the Continent; the Wether on the Tenth in the Morning grew very dark, and we having a Southerly Blast, we bore East, and East and by Southeast till the Eleventh, when we were becalmed: on the Thirteenth arose an East Wind, and we bore to the South Southeast upon a tack, and North North-East, and then lay by for some time, because we did not know the Currents: On the 14th. having a North East Wind, we bore East Southeast, and accordingly as it blew fresh we steered East and by Southeast, and East: on the Fifteenth Two Hours before Daylight we had a Storm and then a South Wind, we steered East all that Day, but we had such bad Wether the following Night, that we could not carry our Sails; next Day about Noon the Wether grew better, and an Easterly Breeze presented; we lay by till the Eighteenth at Noon, when we discovered a Ship to Windward of us, to whom we gave chase till the Evening; she proved to be the English Ship that had parted from us when we came out of the Bay of Caldaira, who knowing who we were, put into the Cape, we came to Leeward of her; but she spread out her Sails and got to Leeward of us; after we had given one another this salutation, we put out for Two Hours to see which sailed best, but knowing at last they were the better Sailors, and fearing they might reach Queaquilla before us, we desired them to join with us in our Design, to which when they agreed, we set fail together; we found ourselves much perplexed to know what Latitude we might be in, since we had not seen the Sun for Ten Days together. But it happily fell out, that it appeared on the Nineteenth; our Pilots computed we might be about Five and twenty Leagues to Windward of Queaquilla, and Sixty Leagues from Land; but the Winds varied to that degree, that we could make no way, and many times went contrary▪  
On the 20th. we had a West Wind, and steered East and by Southeast till the 21st, when we were becalmed▪ On the 24th. arose a South Wind, and on the 26th. an Easterly Breeze: at last the Wind persisting to be contrary, we were reduced to great want of Victuals, for we had already been upon our passage longer than our Provision would allow us, to which we may add, that Fish had till now been so scarce, and hard to catch, that we had but little support from them: So that having on the 28th. taken an Account of the remainder of our Victualling, we were forced to retrench ourselves so far as to eat but once in Forty eight Hours: we also wanted Water, and had it not been for the help of Rain, we had certainly died of thirst; but what made us amends for one part of our wants, was that we found ourselves all of a sudden in a Kingdom of large Fishes, such as Emperors, Tunnies, Germons, Galdenies, Negro, Bonitoes, and several others, to whom we gave no quarter, no more that to the Sea Wolf's, who for all their ill smell could not escape us. During that time we bore to the North-East, the Wind not allowing us to keep on our designed Course, that if the worst came to the worst, we might by this course reach the Isle of St. john, pursuant to the Design we had form upon meeting with this contrary Wind, of putting in there, in case the same continued all the way: On the 29th. after we had taken the Latitude, our Pilots computed us to be opposite to the Isle of Platta, Thirty Leagues to Leeward of Queaquilla: on the 30th. being Easter-Day, we were but one degree North Latitude; in the Twi light the Wind began to blow fresh, and bore us East North-East: next Day the Wind came South South-West, we steering East, East and by Southeast, and East Southeast: On the 3d. of April we were becalmed; and as we had for the space of Two Days, by the computation of our Pilots, sailed towards Land; they were of Opinion that the Currents deceived them, of which we made ourselves satisfied by the following manner: On the Fourth the Wether being very calm we furled our Sails, and put out one of our Pirogues, about whose Forecastle we spun Sixty Fathom of our smallest Rope, made fast unto a Grappling Iron, and from that Coast she made from, the Tide ran along her side with as much swiftness as the Current of a River, and bore to the North-East: on the Fifth we caulked our Ships; towards Midnight a South-West Wind presented itself, and we bore Southeast.  
On the 6th. in the Morning we discovered Land both to Windward and Leeward of us, we veered to, lest we should be brought too near, and steered South: On the 8th. we were about Four or Five Leagues off, and our coasting Pilots knew the Place to be Cape Pastao, which is under the Line Thirty Leagues to Leeward of the Isle of Platta; we had all hands aloft, and steered South: On the 9th. we bore to the South Southeast till the Evening, and to the South-West till Ten at Night, when we steered to the South Southeast: and on the IIth. we were got to the height of the Isle of Platta, Eighteen Leagues out at Sea.  
On the 12th. at Noon we saw the Point of Sancta Helena, 
An Account of the English Adventures.  which is Fifteen Leagues to Leeward of Queaquilla, and forms the beginning of the Bay that bears the Name of that Town: On the 12th. at Night we saw Fire to Windward of us; we lay by till break of Day, when we discovered a Ship Three Leagues to Windward of us, and as we were becalmed, we sent Three Pirogues to know what she was; they found her to be a Prize, laden with Wine and Corn, which Captain David had taken as she came out of Nasca, and which was separated from him; he had put Eight English Men on Board to Conduct her, who were to have their Rendezvous in case of a separation, at the Isle of Platta: These Men told us that after they had left St John's Island, they made several Descents, and in several Parts of that Country, among others at Sagua, Arrica, and Pisca, that in the last of these Places, a Relation of the Viceroy of Lima, came at the Head of Eight hundred Men to attack them with Sword in hand, but that they were vigorously repulsed, that they had also taken a great many Ships, which, when they pillaged, they let go again; so that finding they had got to the value of Five thousand pieces of Eight a Man, they had resolved to return to the North Sea, and that as they sailed● away for the straits of Magellan they fell to gaming, whereat many lost all they had got; that they had anchored in the Road which leads to the Isles of Dom Fernandez, that stand upon the brink of the Straight, to which Place came Captain Willnet, an English Man, who had left them long before, and was come thither upon the same Design with themselves of repassing into the North Seas by the same straits; but that Captain David had altered his Resolution, for that those of his Crew who had lost their Money, were not willing to leave these Seas nor the Ship till they had taken another; That as for those who had won, they went on Board Captain Willnet, out of which Ship went also, at the same time, such of his Cr●w as were without Money, in order to go and get some with Captain David, and that so they were come back into the South Sea, to the number of Sixty English, and Twenty French, as Willnet was gone through the Straight, for the North Sea; that Captain Peter Henry was gone for the East-Indies, presently after Captain Suams; and lastly they told us (tho' we had been informed thereof before) that the Spanish Fleet was a careening at Puerto Callao, which, as I have already said, is the Place of Embarking, that belongs to Lima.  
As these Eight English Men did not think that Captain David's Frigate would rejoin them so quickly at the Place of Rendezvous, they proposed going with us to Queaquilla, which we so much the more willingly agreed to, in that they gave us a share of their Victuals and Drink, and a little revived amongst us, that usual merriment that had now for some time been exiled from us, by the abstinences we were forced to undergo, wherewith we were extremely weakened; Then we sailed all Night in their Company steering Southeast and by East.  
On the 14th. we furled all our Sails for fear of being discovered from Land, near unto which we were: About two arose a Fog, by favour whereof we made use of our main Sail of all, as well to come ready Rigged into the Bay, which is Thirty Leagues in length, as to get to Windward of the River Queaquilla, and to spare ourselves also the Labour of rowing so much, for being so extraordinary weak we had not strength to do it.  
We steered all Night Southeast; And on the 11th. discovered the White Cape, which is the Windward Cape of this Bay; about Ten in the Morning, we embarked to the number of Two hundred and Sixty Men on Board our Canoes, after having given our Ships Orders to lay by in the Bay, till they heard News from us. We steered all Day long for the Island Sancta Clara, with which we came up at Sun setting; this little Island is in reality nothing else but a Rock, standing East and West, Six Leagues distant from the Continent; we were obliged to cast Anchor with all the Tides contrary to us, it being impossible to put into this Bay against the Currents, where we found Six Fathom Water: And on the 16th. we found ourselves between Sancta Clara and la Puna, about Five Leagues from the Shoar.  
La Puna is a very pretty Island, 
A Description of the Isle of Puna.  and may be discovered at a great distance at Sea, because of the Form of it, resembling a Cardinal's Cap; It's Twenty Leagues in circumference, and stands East and West, Two Leagues from the Continent, and over-against the Mouth of the River Queaquilla; There is a large Burrough built upon it, where, in former times, were kept the King of Spain's Magazines: Great Ships, that is, such▪ as are Two or Three Decked ones, that cannot come into the River, Anchor between it and the Island: We hid ourselves in this Island all Day, and that with the good Luck of not being discovered by the Sentinels, who were there to the number of Forty of them, though we knew nothing of it: We departed in the Evening, and got more Southerly, that we might not be discovered from the Continent.  
On the 17th. we hid ourselves again in a Covert Place upon the same Island; where after we had got an exact Account from our Prisoners of the State, Situation, and Disposition of the Town of Queaquilla, which we were about to go and take, we disposed of our Forces in the following Order: There were Fifty Men making the Forlorn Hope, led by Captain Picard, who commanded our Frigate, to attack the great Fort: Fourscore Granadiers, commanded by the Captain of our Bark, were to be in the nature of Reserves, and to serve any where as there should be Occasion for them: Captain Grogni●● with the main Body, was to make himself Master of the Town and Port: And Captain George Hewit, who was Commander of the English Ship, with Fifty of his Men, was to attack the little Fort, and a Thousand Pieces of Eight was promised to any one of the Ensigns, whereof I was one, that should pitch the First Colours upon the great Fort: Things being thus regulated, we left our Covert in the Evening, believing we might be able to enter into the River of Queaquilla that Night, before Day light appeared; but for all that, all we could do was to gain one of the Points of the Island, which is over-against the River, for we could have the advantage of the tide's coming in but for three Hours, which was the Reason, that on the 18th. as we put off again, that we might the more readily get under the Covert of the Island; Day overtook us, and so discovered us to a Sentinel, who set a Cottage on Fire as a Signal to the other Sentinels, that were posted at convenient distances on both sides the River, that he saw us, that so these same might advertise the Town of it: As soon as we got a Shoar, we marched cross a Wood to get to the said Fire, where we found some of those that had kindled it; whereof Two were killed, as they ●●ed to save themselves, and a Third was taken, but we could get no Intelligence from him, for he was but a little Boy.  
This day we discovered a Ship entering into the River, we let her pass, being unwilling to come out from under our Covert to fall upon her, for fear of being discovered by those on the main Land, who we supposed knew nothing of us; Because the Inhabitants of Queaquilla had not answered the Fire-Signal which the Sentinel of La Puna had given them. Upon the approach of Night, we made ready, and entered into the River of Queaquilla by one of the two Mouths we found there, and by which goes in and out with the Tide so rapid a Current, that it is enough to carry a Canoe two Leagues in an hour, so that we made four in the space of two hours.  
There are two very fine Islands in the two largest parts of this River (which may be about half a League over) under the Covert whereof we hid ourselves on the 19th. all day long. We made ready in the Evening, and had the pleasure to be carried up by the Current without the use of our Oars, for fear lest the Sentinels, who are always placed on this River's sides, should hear the noise of our Rowing: The Design of our Guide was to ●●ss by and Land beyond the Town, because he knew it was weaker, and worse guarded on that side ●han on the other; But his Project failed him, for the side now going out, was as injurious to us, as before ●t had been favourable, and forced us to go ashore, two ●ours before Day, within Canonshot on this side the Town, from whence we discovered a great many Lights, which they usually keep in their Houses all Night ●ong.  
This Place where we landed is a Country full of Water and Shrubs, across which we were forced to cut 〈◊〉 Way with our Sabres; but we did not know we 〈◊〉 unhappily landed over-against a Sentinel, nor that 〈◊〉 an hour after that, one of our Men, who was left behind to look after our Canoes, struck fire to light 〈◊〉 Pipe with, which he rashly did, contrary to the expr●●● Prohibition we had given him; which being perceiv●● by that Sentinel, he made no doubt but there must 〈◊〉 Enemies near: Because the Spaniards, upon pain 〈◊〉 Death, forbid their People to strike fire in the Night in so much that he presently discharged a small Peter●●●● to give the Fort notice of it, who readily answered the same with a whole discharge of their Cannon. Being overtaken at that instant of time with a Storm of Ra●● we were obliged to put in for shelter into a great Hou●● we found before us, to light the Granadiers Match●● and wait till Day appeared, during which space t●● Enemy ●ired continually from the Town to frighten an● let us understand they were ready to receive us.  
On the 20th. at break of Day we marched out 〈◊〉 Order towards the Town, 
They attack and take Queaquilla.  with our Drums beating, 〈◊〉 Colours flying; and upon our approach, found 〈◊〉 selves stopped by Seven Hundred Men, who attack●● us from under the Covert of a Wall four Foot and 〈◊〉 half high, and of a Ditch, wherewith the same 〈◊〉 encompassed towards the River's side; which made 〈◊〉 presently suppose it to be their Fort, having had 〈◊〉 good Intelligence of the Situation of the Place. Th●● did all they could to repulse us, and presently kill●● some of our Men. Being encouraged with this litt●● Advantage, they had the boldness to Sally out upon 〈◊〉 with Sword in Hand, but seeing we gave them a m●●● vigorous Reception, they fled without any more ad●●● and contented themselves with breaking down 〈◊〉 Bridges, to hinder us from advancing; But this cou●● not prevent our crossing the Ditch, and get to the soc● of the Wall, whereof we rendered ourselves Masters ●●●spight of all the Resistance made by them, who wa● not Proof against our Granades, that drove them ●●●to the very Houses, which are all of them built on ●●●pose for Places of Defence, in case they be attacked and from whence in a short time we also drove the●▪ They fled to the Place of Arms, and entrenched them ●●lves in a strong Caze, which we call a Red●●bt, and ●hich, when they had defended for an hour's time, they ●ere also forced to abandon, in so much that we pursued them from Fort to Fort, till we came to a third, ●hich is the greatest, and most considerable of them ●l: Here they defended themselves a long time; for ●●ey fired continually upon us, by favour of the smoke of ●heir Cannon, which hindered us from seeing them. When ●e were got to the foot of the Pallisadoes, they sal●●d out again with Sword in Hand, and having wounded ●ome of our Men, they took one of them Prisoner, but ●e quickly made them leave him, and to run back into ●heir Fort, after they had lost a great many Men. At ●ast, being weary with about Eleven hours' Fight, and ●ur Powder being now almost spent, we redoubled our efforts in such a manner, that we broke in upon them, ●nd made ourselves Masters of this last Fort, but not without loss on our side, since we had Nine Men killed, ●nd a Dozen wounded. We sent out several Parties at ●he same time to pursue those that fled, who were still 〈◊〉 sight of us, while the other Roman Catholics went 〈◊〉 sing Te Deum in the great Church, after we had first ●ut a Garrison into the Fort.  
The Town of Queaquilla is almost built round about little Mountain, 
A Description of Queaquilla.  whereon stand those three Forts, two whereof are commanded by the third, which is the urgest, and all of them Command the Town. The greatest, which is that against which we had most to 〈◊〉, is no where strong but to the River-ward, and the ●●o lesser ones are upon the Descent of an Hill, which also looks towards the River, and are each of them surrounded with a thin but very high Wall on the out●●de; we found none but Petereroes to defend it: There 〈◊〉 a Communication between these last two and the ●ther by a Covert-way, on each side whereof are two rows ●f Pallisadoes filled with Earth, and defended also with ●etereroes. In the great Fort, which is also beset with Pallisadoes, we found Seven Pieces of Cannon, carrying ●rom twelve to eighteen Pound Ball; but they could not, because of the Elevation of the Place, bring their Guns ●o bear low enough to incommode those that were in ●he Town, unless by thundering against the Houses, ●hey should be buried in the Ruins of them. The Magazines of Powder stand in the middle of the Fort, and are slightly enough built. The Town, as I have 〈◊〉 served, is to the River-ward encompassed with a 〈◊〉 four Foot and an half high, and three Foot thick: 〈◊〉 Streets are very straight: The Parish Churches, as well the Convents, are very curiously built; the Houses 〈◊〉 almost all built with Board's, and founded upon 〈◊〉 for that in the rainy time of the Year, which contin●● from the beginning of january to the end of Ap●●● they are so incommoded, as to be forced to 〈◊〉 Bridges, and raise Banks of Earth in all the Streets, 〈◊〉 keep off the Water and Mud. Their chief Comedy is Cocoe, of which they make Chocolate. We to● Seven Hundred Prisoners of both Sexes in this 〈◊〉 and among the rest was the Governor and his Famil●● He was wounded, as were several Officers and Men● Quality, who fought more bravely than Five thousa●● other Men that defended the Place.  
We found in the Place several sorts of Merchandi●● a great many Pearls and precious Stones, 
They got a ●●st Booty in Queaquilla.  a prodig●●●● quantity of Silver Plate, and seventy thousand Pieces 〈◊〉 Eight at least; tho' there were Three Millions amo●● them when we came thither: But as we were all who●● taken up to make ourselves Masters of the Forts; the laid hold of that opportunity to make their escape along the River, with the greatest part of their most ●●●luable Movables: When our Canoes were come to ●●●chor under the Town, we were not backward to 〈◊〉 Four of them away in pursuit of the Shallops that ●●●ried the said Riches of the Town away, but than it 〈◊〉 too late: They only took Two and twenty Thousand Pieces of Eight, and a Vermilion Eagle gilt, that b● served for a Tabernacle to some Church, weighing Sixt● eight Pounds, and was exceeding Rate, as well for 〈◊〉 Workmanship, as Two great Rocks of Emeralds, where with the Eyes of it were made: There were Fourtee● Barks in the Port, with the Galleys, against whom 〈◊〉 fought at Pu●blo Nuevo, and Two of the King of Spai● Ships upon the Stocks, almost finished: We agree● with the Governor in the Evening about the Price 〈◊〉 his, his Families, the Town, Fort, Cannon, and Shi● Ransoms, they being to give us a Million of Pieces 〈◊〉 Eight in Gold, and Four hundred Sacks of Corn; an● in order to forward the payment of the said Ranso●● which was to be brought from the Town of Quil● ●ighty Leagues off, he desired us to release their Vicar ●eneral, who was a Man of great Authority and Credit ●mongst them.  
We found this governor's House so richly furnished, ●●d filled with such precious Movables, that nothing in europe could be more Magnificent: The Women of this own are very Pretty; but most of the Fathers or ●●●ks live here at great Ease, and in such Familiarity ●ith the Fair Sex, that is far from being a good Pattern ●nd Example unto others: The Fathers hated us to that ●gree, that they persuaded the Women, who had never ●en any Freebooters, we were altogether unlike them, ●hat we were not even of human Form, and that we ●ould both eat them and their Children, which made ●hem conceive so much Horror and Aversion for us, that ●hey could not be dispossessed thereof, till they came to know ●s better. But then I can boldly say, they entertained ●uite different Sentiments of our Persons, and have given 〈◊〉 frequent instances of so violent a Passion, as proceeded sometimes even to a degree of Folly.  
It's not from a chance Story, 
An odd Story of a Spanish Woman.  that I came to know the oppressions wrought in these Women that we were Men ●hat would eat them; For the next Day after the taking of the Town, a Young Gentlewoman that waited upon ●he Governess of the Place happening to fall into my Hands, as I was carrying her away to the Place where the ●est of the Prisoners were kept, and to that end made her walk before me, she turned back, and with Tears in her Eyes told me in her own Language, Senior pur l●amor ●e dios no mi como; that is, Pray, Sir, for the Love of God 〈◊〉 not eat me; whereupon I asked who had told her that we were wont to eat People, she answered the Fathers, who had also assured them, that we had not human ●hape, but that we resembled Monkeys.  
On the 21st. 
Queaquilla fired by accident.  some of our Men who had made a Fire in the Day time, in one of the Houses of the Town, came to the Court of Guard in the Evening without extinguishing of it; so that at Night it set the Town on Fire; but the fear we were in least the same should reach our Court of Guard, whereon was lodged all the Powder in the Place, and part of the Merchandise and Riches of the Town, we were obliged to get all carried on Board the Barks that were in the Port, and to bring all our Prisoners into the Fort; and when that was done, we endeavoured to put a stop to the Fire, which 〈◊〉 burned down one third of the Town, notwithstanding all the pains we took to put it out.  
We returned on the 22d. in the Morning to our Cour● of Guard, and fearing least the Spaniards might refuse to pay the Ransom agreed on for the Town, because of this Accident, we having promised by our Treaty with them not to burn it; we took upon us to believe they were the cause of it, and sent them a Letter, wherein we gave them to understand, we were much surprised at their manner of procedure; That they should after our Agreement with them, come with a mischievous Intention to burn the Merchandise and Corn that were of so much use to us, and that we repented we had not left all the Town to be burnt: That if they did not pay us what we had suffered by the Fire, we should send them Fifty of the Prisoners Heads: They thereupon excused the Matter to us, saying they must be some rascally spiteful People that had done this, and they would take care to satisfy us.  
On the 23d. the Governor furnished us with a coasting Pilot, whom we sent in one of our Canoes to see foe our Ships, (to whom we had given Orders they should lay by in the Bay) to bring them to an Anchor at the Isle of Puna, whither we were to go at our departure from Queaquilla, to wait, for the promised Ransoms: On the 24th. finding one of our Men was Sick with the Stench which the dead Carcases, to the number of above nine hundred, lying up and down the Town, occasioned: We went our ways after we had first dismounted and nailed up the Cannon in the Fort, and carried Five hundred Prisoners, being the best of the Inhabitants, along with us, into our Barks; wherein we arrived with them on the 25th. at Puna, where we found our Ships ready to cast Anchor.  
On the 2d. of May, 
The death of Captain Grogniet.  Captain Grogniet died of the Wound he had received that Day we took the Town, when the Seven hundred Spaniards opposed our entering the Fort, and the same Day died Four of our Men also: On the 4th. we sent our Galley to the Isle of Platta, to see if Captain David's Frigate was come to Rendezvous there.  
The time allowed for the payment of the Ransom of Queaquilla, being expired on the Ninth, we granted them Four Days longer; 
The Spaniards treacherous.  but then we began to be weary of this delay, when a Spanish Bark that was wont to carry us Provision, brought an Officer in her, who desired us not to be impatient, for the Ransom would be quickly paid: Now this Dilatoriness made us begin to suspect very much that there was some treachery in the Case, and that they entertained us with hopes for no other end than to amuse us, till such time as the Enemy were reinforced. And our guess was right enough, as will appear hereafter; insomuch that we were constrained to use such severity towards our Prisoners, which we knew would strike a Terror into our Enemies. We made them through Dice for their Lives, and the Lot falling upon the Heads of Four, we cut them off presently, and sent them to Queaquilla in the same Vessel that had brought the said Officer unto us, by whom we let the Tenient understand, that if the Ransom did not come within four Days, we would send them the Heads of all the rest of the People that were in our Power.  
Our Galley on the 14th. returned from the Isle of Platta, and related that she had been chased about the Point of Sancta Helena by Two Ships, which she could not discover what they were, and this made us that Evening send out one of our Canoes that sailed well to see what those Ships might be: On the 16th. she found they came to join us, they being Captain David's Frigate and a Prize he had taken after the other had been separated from them, which we met before we went to Queaquilla; they came with full Resolution to make a Descent at Paita, in order to get some Refreshments for their Men, who had been wounded in a Fight they had had with a Spanish Ship called Catalina, which they met Fifty Leagues to Leeward of Lima, and was one of those that we had for so long a time waited for before that Town.  
This Ship Catalina was separated from Two more with whom she was returning to the Port of Callao, 
Captain David worsts the the Spaniards at Sea.  when unfortunately for her she met with Captain David's Frigate, that sailed much better than she, and could have taken her, without making as he did Two Days Fight or it, had it not been that the greatest part of his Crew being continually Drunk, failed Twenty times to come up close to board her, and suffered themselves to fall to Leeward because of their ill rigging, as often as they found themselves to Windward of her; which being observed by the Spaniards, they thought by putting up a bloody Flag, they would be quickly brought to strike, but therein they were mistaken, and the quite contrary fell out▪ For David's People growing sober on the Third Day and putting their Tackle and Rigging into better order than before, the Spaniards were so terrified thereat, that they ran a Shoar where their Ship did not keep whole Two Hours: David's Men in a Canoe went to save Two Spaniards who were about swimming to Land, and now having escaped the danger of Drowing, told them that their Captain having had his Thigh shot off with a Cannon Ball, had desired his Lieutenant before his Death to lose no time, but to go without tarrying, to acquaint the Viceroy of Lima, of the dangerous Estate the Frigate was reduced to, that he might send without delay to her assistance.  
Our Canoe which on the 22d. came to rejoin us, and gave the foresaid Information, brought also along with her Captain David's Prize, which he had sent to desire us to get a Main Mast to be brought him from Queaquilla, as somewhat of our Ransom, his having been very much damnified in the last Engagement; And that till it came, he would Cruise without the Bay to prevent our being surprised by the Spaniards.  
I forgot to take notice that this Ship's Crew had at Paita, surprised a Courier that was going from Queaquilla to Lima the third time, to carry the following Letter unto the Viceroy, which clearly made out unto us the suspicions we had entertained before, that the Spaniards deferred to pay us the promised Ransom, that they might have time to prepare themselves to come and pay us in a sort of Coin we had no Occasion for, and which we did not require at their hands.  
A Letter of the Tenient of Queaquilla, to the Viceroy of Lima.  
SIR,  
I Am to inform your Excellency, 
The Tenient of Queaquilla's Letter to the Viceroy of Lima.  the second time, that the English and French are still at Puna; It's several Days since the term they had allowed us for the Redemption of our Prisoners is expired; I have done it on purpose that your Excellency might gain time. They have sent me four of our People's Heads: I will amuse them with some thousands of Pieces of Eight from time to time, (though they have no Reason to be weary) while your Excellency may please to come, and though they should yet send me fifty Heads more, I shall esteem that loss to be much less Prejudicial to us, than to suffer such evil-disposed People to live. Now, Sir, we have a brave opportunity to get rid of them, provided your Excellency lose no time to do it.  
We could not have received a more certain Testimony of the Thoughts and Designs of our Enemies, than ●hose discovered by this Letter unto us, so we took our measures accordingly.   

CHAP. V.  
The remaining Actions of the Freebooters in the South Seas, during 1687.  
THE best Winter Quarters which we had met with in these Seas, 
la Puna their best, Winter Quarters.  and that of longest duration, was 〈◊〉 of the time of our sojourning upon this Island of 〈◊〉 Puna, where for the space of Thirty odd Days that 〈◊〉 stayed here, we lived mighty well; for besides the victuals which the Spaniards brought us daily from Queaquilla, we had brought thither ourselves a great ●●ny Refreshments, neither did we want Charms for 〈◊〉 Ears in this Place, for we had all the Music of the ●own among our Prisoners, which consisted of Lutes, ●heorbs, Gittars, Harps, and other Instruments, I ne●r saw any where else, wherewith they made a very fine consort.  
Some of our Men grew very familiar with our Wo●en Prisoners, who without offering them any violence ●ere not sparing of their Favours, and made appear, 〈◊〉 I have already remarked, that after they came once 〈◊〉 know us, they did not retain all the Aversion for us, ●●●t had been inculcated into them, when we were stranger's unto them▪ All our People were so charmed with this way of living, that they forgot their past 〈◊〉 series, and thought of no more Danger from the Spa●niards than if they had been in the middle of Paris.  
Amongst the rest, 
An Adventure of the Author's, with a Spanish Woman.  myself had one pretty Adventure among the other Prisoners we had a Young Gentlewomen lately become a Widow of the Treasurer of the Town, who was slain when it was taken: Now th●● Woman appeared so far comforted for her loss, ou●● an hardheartedness they have in this Country one 〈◊〉 another, that she proposed to hide me and herself 〈◊〉 some corner of the Island till our People were gone, an● that then she would bring me to Queaquilla to marr● her; That she would procure me her Husband's Offi●● and vest me in his Estate, which was very great: Whe● I had returned her Thanks for such obliging offers, 〈◊〉 gave her to understand that I was afraid her Inte●●●● had not the mastery over the Spaniards Resentme●●● and that the Wounds they had received from us, 〈◊〉 yet too fresh and green for them easily to forget them▪ She went about to cure me of my Suspicion, by procu●●ing secretly from the Governor and chief Officers, pro●mises under their Hands, how kindly I should be use● by them. I confess I was not a little perplexed herewith and such pressing Testimonies of goodwill and Friendship towards me, brought me, after a little Consul●●●tion with myself, into such a Quandary, that I did no● know which side to close with; nay, I found my 〈◊〉 at length much inclined to close with the Offers 〈◊〉 me: And I had two powerful Reasons to ind●●● me thereunto, one of which was the miserable and 〈◊〉 guishing Life we lead in those Places, where we 〈◊〉 in perpetual Hazzard to lose it, which I should be fr●● from by an advantageous Offer of a pretty Wom●● and a considerable Settlement; the other proceeded 〈◊〉 the despair I was in of ever being able to return into 〈◊〉 own Country, for want of Ships fit for that purpose But when I began to reflect upon these things with little more leisure and consideration, and that I reaved with myself, how little Trust was to be given 〈◊〉 the Promises and Faith of so perfidious, as well as ●●●dictive a Nation as the Spaniards, and more especial towards Men in our Circumstances, by whom they 〈◊〉 been so ill used; this Second Reflection carried it againe the First, and even all the Advantages offered me 〈◊〉 this Lady: But however the matter was, I was resolved, in spite of the Grief and Tears of this pretty Woman, to prefer the continuance of my Troubles (with a Ray of hope I had of seeing France again) before the perpetual Suspicion I should have had of some Treachery designed against me. Thus I rejected her Proposals, but so, as to assure her I should retain, even as long as I lived, a lively Resentment of her Affections and good Inclinations towards me.  
On the 23d. we sent one of our Canoes to Queaquilla to carry one of the Fathers thither, they being a People as much obeyed and respected by that Nation, as the Viceroys themselves. The Governor gave this Man a full Power to act as he pleased, even in opposition to the Obstructions which the Tenient made against the Payment of the Ransom aforementioned. After his departure came a Bark which brought us Four and Twenty Sacks of Meal, and to the value of Twenty Thousand Pieces of Eight in Gold: They desired us moreover, to grant them three days time for the Payment of the rest, which we allowed them, but withal threatened, that upon their failure therein, we should seize upon their Fort, and burn their Town and Ships.  
Our Canoe returned on the 25th. who gave us an Account they would pay no more than Two and Twenty Thousand Pieces of Eight for the rest of the Ransom, and that the Tenient would pursue his Prince's Orders, who forbade the payment of any; That he had Five Thousand Men at hand, with which he waited to see if we would put our Threats in Execution. Upon this ●●●●ce and bold Answer, we had a Consultation together, whether we should cut off the Heads of all the Prisoners: The Plurality of Voices, together with mine, was, That it were better we should go and look after the Two and Twenty Thousand Pieces of Eight, than shed any more Blood; seeing also that our Design being to leave these Seas, we had no farther occasion for these Executions to make us be feared; and that after all, we were but too well assured by the Tenient's Letter, that the Spaniards were setting all things in Order, to come and act their utmost Effort against us, which perhaps would administer matter of Repentance unto us, if we still persisted in our Resolution: That therefore we ought to accept of the Offer, and to give up unto them no other than the meanest of the Prisoners, without divesting ourselves of those of Quality, who would be a Security unto us for the rest: That while we waited for them, it was our best way to take them along with us, and put off from the Shoar, steering towards the Point of St. Helena, where we should be out of danger of the surprises of our Enemies, whose Motions we could every way discover at a distance. Things being thus concluded on, we sent our Canoe to Queaquilla, who returned again the 25th. and told us, that next day, the Spaniards would without fail bring us the Two and Twenty Thousand Pieces of Eight to the Isle of Puna, where we than were.  
We put the same day Fifty of our best Prisoners on board our Ships, and at the same time weighed Anchor, and quitted our good Winter Quarters, where we left the rest of our Prisoners, with two Canoes to Guard them, and to wait for the Money promised us; giving our Men Orders to tell those that brought it, that they should send us the remainder of what was agreed on, to the Point of St. Helena, and upon default thereof, that they should see their People no more. Our Canoes on the 26th. in the Evening came to join us, as we lay by to get out of this Bay, and brought us the Two and Twenty Thousand Pieces of Eight.  
Next Night the English Frigate's Prize, 
They join the English, and fight the Spanish Armadilla's.  who thought we lay still at Anchor at la Pruna (from whence she met us about Eight Leagues) came to give us notice, that two Spanish Armadilla's waited our coming out of the Bay, and that David's Frigate lay by, as they did, to stay for us: On the 27th. by break of Day we discovered them between the Isle of St. Clare and the Point of St. Helena, to Windward of us. Captain David●● Frigate, upon sight of us, made up presently to us, and having got all together, we consulted what we were best to do: We put ●ourscore of our Men on board of him, because he had not number enough of his own to manage his Guns; and as we had not Men enough to manage our Prizes, we reserved only but two Ships, and a long Bark, and sent the rest with our Pirogues upon the Flats, where the Spanish Ships could not come, as drawing more Water than they did. We lay by till● Noon, to get the Weather-gage, which yet we could not do, because at this time of the Year the Winds blow from the Sea, and are very fixed, and that besides, as we came out of the bottom of the Bay we could not well hope to gain it, the Spaniards being at the Mouth thereof.  
About Noon our Enemies came upon us, and so we sought till the Evening with our Cannon, which the Spaniards call Gallant Fight, without much hurting of one another: We cast Anchor upon the approach of Night, as they did also about a League to Windward of us: We fired a Gun for our Prizes to come up, which they did, and cast Anchor near us, for their greater Security.  
We sent them back about an hour before Daylight to their former Station, and as soon as ever Light appeared, we made ready, and the Spaniards did the same, but no sooner were we got under Sail, but we were becalmed: Unhappily it fell out that we were without our Pirogues to tow us to Windward, because we had sent them back with our Prizes, to avoid the trouble they might have caused us, and therefore all we could do now, was to make use of our little Canoes, which we had still with us; the Spaniards also towed to Windward, to dispute the matter with us, however, with much ado we got a Cannot-shot to Windward of them; But as they knew better how to bear close up to the Wind in these Seas than we, in half an hour's time they recovered the Weather-gage of us. We lay by till Two in the Afternoon, and seeing we could do no good with them, we put in to the Cape, to wait for two of our Ships, that were behind. In the mean time these Armadillas bore up to us, and when they had got within a good Canonshot, we fought till it was dark Night, they very much shattered us, yet wounded but one Man; we anchored in the Evening as we had done the day before, and they did the same also to Windward of us.  
We remained at Anchor on the 29th. as well as they, till Three in the Afternoon, when they weighed to go and attack the biggest of our Prizes, because she had anchored only on the side of the Shallows, and we made ready to defend her: We came to such a close Fight with them, that our Small Arms, as well as Great Guns, came into play on both sides; yet we lost not one Man, tho' they on their side had a great many killed, which we knew by the Blood that ran out of their Skupper-holes, and at our parting they cried, A la manana la partida; that is, To Morrow to it again.  
On the 30th. both they and we prepared to put out of the Bay, and the Spaniards, who were still to Windward, did all they could to hinder us to get the Weather-gage. We came to an Anchor towards Noon, to disarm one of our Prizes, that sailed very badly, and to fit up another in the room of her, which Captain David gave us, as well as the Twenty Frenchmen that made part of his Crew, and were minded to leave him. We wrought all Night to unrigg her, and when we had so done, we sent her into the Bottom. We put ourselves under Sail on the 31st. and about Two in the Afternoon came to an Anchor, because of the tide's being against us: Presently after, the two Armadillas came up with us, which made us weigh, and then to put in at the Cape, to wait for one of our Prizes, that was far from us, which not being able to join us as soon as the Enemy, her Crew left her, and went into her Pirogue, wherein they came to throw themselves on board one of our Men of War: They had left four Spaniards in that same Prize, who, by the favour of a good Wind, put back into the River of Queaquilla, where they made their Escape, and, what was worst of all, took along with them almost all our Provisions that was in her.  
When we were got within half Canonshot of our Enemy's Ships, we fired upon one another, and that without intermission, till an hour within Night: We received several Canonshot in our Sides, during this Engagement, had almost all our Tackle spoiled, and our Sails sifted, because the Spaniards did all that ever they could to bring our Masts by the board, and indeed the Foremast of the Frigate received five Cannot-shot, and the Mainmast three, but they came only slanting, and, as good luck would have it, we had not one Man killed nor wounded.  
We saw the Enemy on the first of june by break of Day, a League's distance from us; we were not slow to do all we could to put out: About Ten they lengthened their Boltspring-Sails, and returned upon us, but as we saw them bear up towards our Frigate, we thought they intended to board her, and this made us presently put into her the Crew of our long Bark, by way of Reinforcement. As soon as ever the Spaniards were come up, they put out their Burgundian Colours, having till then put out none: When we were come pretty near, they gave us a Volley of Musquet-shot, together with a discharge of their Cannon, laden with Cartouches, but we got clear of them, so that they could not come to grapple with us.  
After we had left them to make all the Fire they could, we gave them a Discharge of all our Cannon, and a full Volley with our small Arms in our turn, and then we were ready to board them; but they finding themselves much damaged, very readily got aloof to hinder us.  
They took up an hour's time to refit, than bore up to us again, renewing the Fight, which lasted till Night; but they had been so well banged; that they had no mind to feel us this time so near, and that day we had three Men wounded.  
On the second by break of Day they were still to Windward of us at about two League's distance, and bore up to us; We having a fresh Gale, put into the Cape, and when they were come within a good Cannot-shot of us, they plied us very tightly with their Great Guns, and then approached within Musquet-shot of us, as believing we were now out of Condition to make any longer Resistance: But as we had a better Advantage of using our Fusils, we made so great a fire upon them, that they were forced to close up their Portholes, and bear up to the Wind. We received Sixty Cannon shot this day in our Sides, whereof two Thirds were between Wind and Water; besides which, all our Rigging was torn, and we had two Men wounded, whereof myself was one.  
About two hours within Night they made a show of coming to board us, but finding we were as well prepared to receive them by Night as by Day, they bore upon the Wind: We spent some part of this Night at Anchor to stop up our Cannon's Mouths, which otherwise might have sent us into the Deep.  
We were astonished next Morning at break of Day that we could not set sight of the two Armadillas, with whom we had made ourselves ready to renew the Fight, and in all appearance they grew weary of it before us, tho' they had so great an Advantage as that of the Wind, which yet, as we heard since, could not secure them from losing a great many Men, and having their Ships at least as much shattered as ours: So that supposing well with ourselves that they had steered their Course to Port Calla●, we steered ours for the Isle of Plaita, where we anchored in the Evening, and continued there two Days to caulker our Ships.  
We had, during th●se several Engagements, brought up upon our Decks, the Governor of Queaquilla, and the other chief ● Officers that were our Prisoners, that they might be Witnesses of the Vigour with which ou● Men fought, and the Cowardice of their own People, who durst not enter our Ships, though they came Board and Board with us twice.  
We weighed on the sixth, and sailed along the Coast, that we might find a convenient Place to take in Water▪ This Coast is very level, safe, and very good to Land upon, which is the reason that the same is throughout, as far as Barbacoa, inhabited by the Spaniards: We Anchored between Cape Pastoa and that of St. Francisco. On the Tenth, we put our Prisoners ashore, and gave them their Liberty, being not able ●o go to the Point St. Helena, to see whether their Ransom was come, which I suppose would have been to little purpose, for those two Armadillas had been sent to pay us with Cannon-Ball.  
On the 11th. 
They divided their Booty.  we went about dividing the Gold, precious Stones and Pearls we had found in Queaquilla; but as these things could not be divided, nor easily valued, the Gold not being Coined, and the Stones of different value, we put up all by way of Auction, that those who had Silver might bid for them, and so every Man have his part according as he bade; and as there were several among us who having got considerable sums of Money at Play, were sure, that if it pleased God they should once get safe out of these Seas, their way must be no other than over Land, where the weight of their Silver must hinder or retard their going; they bid for those lewels that kept but little Room, and weighed not much, so excessive a Price, that the Gold alone that was Coined was worth Eighty and an hundred Pieces of Eight an Ounce, and each Pistol Fifteen of the said Pieces: But though these things were sold so dear, we made no more a Division of the Booty of that Town than what came to Four hundred Pieces of Eight a Man, the whole might amount to about Five hundred thousand Pieces of Eight, or Fifteen hundred thousand Livers; which Money, as we were out of hopes to carry along with us, served us to play for on Board our Ships for our Diversion: So that in the Descents we made, we sought now for nothing but Gold and precious Stones, which we did not find so plentiful as Silver; of which, I must be plain, we made so little account, that we thought it not worth our while to take along with us a great quantity of Plate and other things, whereof the Town of Queaquilla was full: We also neglected to send a Canoe after the hundred Caons' of Coined Silver, each consisting of Eleven thousand Pieces of Eight, which the Spaniards had sent away to the other side of the River, when we were engaged with them, and which were yet in sight of us when the Fight was over. There is such a vast quantity of that rich Metal in this Country, that most of those things we make in France out of Steel, Copper, and Iron, are made by them in Silver: This indifference in us gave some of their People many time's occasion to intermix with us, to Pillage from their own fellow Citizens what we neglected, and of which they were not so squeamish as we, or rather so put to it for the Carriage of them, they being in their own Country, and we far from ours.  
On the 12th. Captain Davids' Frigate left us, 
Captain David sails for the North Sea.  he designing to go and Careen at the Isles of Galapas, and then to sail away for the Straight of Magellan, in order to return for the North Sea; But as for us, our Vessels were so small, and withal so bad, that it was impossible we should get up higher than the Coast of Peru; neither could they also, contain such a quantity of Water as we had occasion for, which is very hard to come by on that Coast, where you must go two or three Leagues up the Country before you can meet with any. These Difficulties made us resolve to return to the Western Coast, that so we might endeavour to find out a way also to return to the North Sea, but that must be no other than over Land.  
Before I leave this Coast, 
An Acount of Peru.  I cannot but take Notice, that Peru is one of the richest Countries in the World, not only in respect to the great quantity of Gold and Silver which the Spaniards dig out of the Mines they possess there, but also upon account of the great Fertility of the Earth, that produceth to the tilers of it three Crops every Year, as well of Corn as Wine; and that besides those Fruits that are peculiar to all America, you have also many of those here which grow in France, in so much that this great Diversity of Species' is the occasion that you have continual Supplies of fresh Fruits in all the Seasons of the Year.  
The Inhabitants of this Country reckon but two Seasons, which divide the whole Year into a Summer of Nine Months, and a Winter of three, during which, it freezes oftentimes very hard on the Mountains, though the same is hardly discernible in the Plains: Amongst their other Cattle they breed Sheep, that weigh two hundred and fifty, or three hundred Poundweight: These Animals are of great use to them, having the very same Instinct as Camels. They make them carry Jars of Water, Oil, or Wine, which are a sort of Earthenware made like Sugar-pans, two of which holds about five and thirty Quarts, and when empty, weigh as much as the Liquor that fills them: When they are minded to fill them, these Sheep will kneel down, and as soon as they are full, get up very gently; when they are come to the place whither they are to carry them, they lay them down in the same manner, and so continue till they are discharged of their Burden.  
We weighed on the 13th. and on the 15th. Anchored twenty Leagues to Windward of Point Mangla, we put ashore in a Canoe, where we surprised a Watch of fifteen Spanish Soldiers, who were set upon the side of a curious River; the Entertainment we gave them, forced them to own unto us that they were to guard the River, which they called Elmeralda, because of the many Rocks, or great pieces of Emeralds which their Countrymen take up there, and that we might in the space of Eight Hours go very easily from the Mouth of it in our Canoes, to surprise the Town of Quitto, but not so by Land, because than we must fetch a Compass of Fourscore Leagues through a Country full of Inhabitants, who would not fail to oppose us; and for these Reasons it was that they endeavoured all they could to keep from Strangers the Knowledge of these Advantages: This Town of Quitto is well Peopled, and was formerly the Capital of the Kingdom that bears its Name, but now it depends upon the Government of the Viceroy of ●ima.  
On the 17th. we got ready and sailed away for the 〈◊〉 del Gallo, which stands at the Mouth of the little Bay of Barbacoa, an hundred Leagues to Leeward of Queaquilla. On the 19th. we discov●●ed by break of Day, a Ship, whom we chased, and towards Ten in the Forenoon took her; she was a Bark come from Panama ●o go and buy Negroes, which the English in jamaica 〈◊〉 them by the way of Puerto Bello, and which they were going to Trade with at Paitas; they get very considerably by these Blacks, for the English sell them to the Spaniards for four and five hundred Pieces of Eight, a Man and are worth three and four hundred with them. We Anchored on the 20th. at the Isle of Gallapo, where we examined the Prisoners we had taken in the said Bark, who told us, that the Galley of Panama was gone into the Bay of Mapallo in quest of the French Men that were gone ashore upon those Islands, which I have already said, are there, and that in her return she was to carry the Precedent of Guatimala and his Wife to Panama.  
On the 25th. we weighed and sailed for the Isle of C●cas, which stands North and South of Realeg●o, an hundred Leagues distance: We had a South-west Wind, and sailed West, Northwest: On the 30th. we discovered Land, we pinched upon the Wind, that we might know what place it was; we found towards Evening, 'twas the Isle of Malpalla that stands forty Leagues Southwards of that of St. John's, and from thence we sailed to the Bay of Mapalla instead of going to the Isle of Cocas, from whence the Wind blew, and consequently was contrary to us.  
From this day forward to the 11th. of july we had the same South-west Wind, which allayed not but when it blew from the East and South: On the 13th we took our Latitude, and found we were thirty Leagues out at Sea from Realeg●o, and steared North to get to Land: On the 16th. at Noon we discovered the Mountains, and put into the Cape for fear of being discovered: On the ●7th. we sent two of our Canoes to endeavour to take some one Prisoner, that so we might know how things were before we brought our Ships into the Bay.  
In the Evening our Canoes having discovered what Coast it was, returned, and told it was St. Michael's Bay, whether the Currents had driven us in making the Cape, and which we took for that of Mapalla, whither we would have gone, and which stands fourteen Leagues to Windward of the former, which might the more 〈◊〉 have been mistaken from the Sea, in that the Mountain●● of these two Bay●● are very like one another. We lay by to Windward of i● in the Night, and on the 18th. 〈◊〉 out our Canoes, and continuing at the Cape till the 20●● we made use of them to go and join our Friends at 〈◊〉 of the Islands: As we entered in on the 23d. we 〈◊〉 taken with a breeze of Wind that separated us from 〈◊〉 another, and of five Sail, whereof our Fleet consisted, we had no more than two of the least and weakest of our Ships left together, but we did not lose sight of the other three, tho' they were got very far to Leeward, and overtaken with a Calm. In the mean time we Anchored at the Isle of Tigers, which is the nearest to the Mouth of it.  
On the 24th. about Eight in the Morning we discovered three Sail of Ships that doubled the Point of Harina, which is to Windward of that Bay, and Ten Leagues to Leeward of Realeguo; we presently fired a Paterero to call in our Canoes who were ashore to take in Water▪ As soon as they were come on Board, we made ready and bore up to those Ships with a full Wind, though we had then but very little of it.  
Those three Vessels, which were a Galley and two Pirogues, 
The Free-booter's Fight with some Spanish Vessels.  bore also towards us, though they saw us 〈◊〉 but as soon as we were got out and discovered by them, they doubled the Cape upon us with their Sails and Oa●●▪ and the two Pirogues that sailed better than the Galley, got behind us, and fired fifteen Canonshot upon us▪ but as our Arms could reach them, these Pirogues were forced to fall a Stern, and to wait for their Galley: When she had joined them, they held a Council, and then put out to Attack us, our Ships not being able to give us any Relief, put to the Cape to wait for us; we fought them all along till we had rejoined our Vessels, which we did about two in the Afternoon, when the Spaniards left us, to go bury their Dead upon the Island where we had been to take in Water when we first discovered them; they did us some Damage in our main Mast and Rigging, and wounded few of our Men: Towards Evening a Wind arose from the Sea, and we sailed in quest of them, but they kept to the Shoar.  
On the 25th. we passed round the Island in search for our Canoes, which the Enemy's Galley sought for also, rightly imagining they were ashore, as not having seen 〈◊〉 with us during the Action: About two in the A●●●noon they discovered us, and coming out from under their Covert, gave us the Signal, which we on our part answered; they had hid themselves there for four Hours, expecting our coming, and had a full sight of the Engagement, but could not possibly any more than the 〈◊〉 of our Ships, come in to our Assistance. The Spani●●ds who saw us take them with us, durst not hinder it, though they were at Anchor very near them, than we attempted with one of our Ships to Board the Enemy's Galley, but she saved herself upon the Flats, where our Ships could not come near her. On the 26th. we Anchored at an Island in the Bay, where we put two of our Vessels to Careen, while the other three guarded them. On the 28th. we saw a Canoe under white Colours, crossing from the main Land to the Islands, where one of ours met and took her: It was a Spanish Captain, who believing us to be his own People, came to congratulate the Commander upon the Victory, which he from the Shoar thought they had got over us. We put him upon the Wrack, to know whether he came not by some wile or other to draw us into a Snare laid for us by the Galley, 〈◊〉 the Greek Captain had formerly done; But he solemnly protested it was not so, and informed us, that there 〈◊〉 a Pirogue with thirty Men in the same Bay where we were, who were gone ashore some time since, and 〈◊〉 fought in the race of Savannas against six hundred Spaniards, whose Captain, called done Albarado, who was accounted the bravest and most valiant Man in the Province, they had killed, and that when we had met with their Galley and two Pirogues, there had Eight ●●ndred Armed Men come, not with a design to look after us, but to fight those thirty French Men, who could not be conquered by his six hundred Countrymen; in admirable instance of the Valour of the Spaniards in those 〈◊〉.  
The Day of Mapalla is a very curious place, and full of 〈◊〉 great Lands, 
A Description of the Bay of Mapalla.  not inferior in Beauty to those of 〈◊〉; they were formerly Inhabited, and there are still 〈◊〉 Burroughs there which the People have forsaken, by 〈◊〉 of the Descents of the Freebooters: As for Anchorage, it's very good here, but no good shelter to be found in this place from any corner of the Wind, great Blasts whereof come over those great Mountains that are at the bottom of it, so that there are very few Cables that are proof against them.  
On the 6th. of August, 
Other Adventures.  one of our Men, who was Hunting upon the Island where we were Careening, found two Men who had been there for the space of Eight Days to observe our Motions, and who taking us to be Spaniards, durst not come near us: They were two French Men belonging to the Pirogue of which the forementioned Officer spoke to us, and who had defended themselves so valiantly against the six hundred Spaniards; we found them to be of the number of Fourscore and five, who had separated themselves under Captain Grogniet, to go to Callinfornia; they presently gave Notice to the other Eight and twenty, who came and joined us, and of whom we learned that they had saved themselves upon this Island, after they had been chased a whole Night by the Spanish Galley, that did not sail so well as their Pirogue. They told us also they had gone down a matter of forty Leagues to Windward of Acapulto, without being able any more than once to go ashore, and that then they ran a great risque, so boisterous is the Sea in those Parts, wherewith they were so discouraged, that they had forsaken fifty five of their Companions, in order to come and find us out, and left them to continue their Course for Callinfornia.  
Having made an end of our Careening, on the 10th. we made every thing ready for our Departure, after we had given those thirty Men room in our Ships: We sailed from the Coast of Acapulto with a design to find out the other fifty five Men spoken of, who were to make a Descent there, and to rid them from a miserable state whereunto, in all appearance, they had gone to plunge themselves, without any hopes of Retrieve, being too small a Company to find out Provisions (whereof they stood in great need) in the best Peopled Country upon the Continent, where also it could not be believed they should arrive, having but a little sorry Bark under them, that could not carry them far without splitting in two.  
We had at our Departure an Easterly breeze, wherewith we were favoured till we came to the height of Sansonnat; from the Fifteenth to the One and twentieth we were be calmed all along in the Daytime, and the Winds were so high in the Nights, that we could not carry our Sails; on the 22d. we had a pretty good Gale from the Southeast; and on the 27th. we drew near Land, to know where we were: We found ourselves to Windward of the Bay of Tecoantepequa, and put out our Canoes to go in thither, while at the same time we appointed our Ships to Rendezvouz in the Port of Vatulco, which is twenty Leagues to Leeward: We came very near Land in the Evening, but the Sea runs so high along that Coast, that it was impossible to go ashore.  
On the 29th, we found an Embarking-place, where there was a very strong Entrenchment guarded by a considerable number of Spaniards, and supposing it would cost us dear to go ashore in that place, we sailed two Leagues to Leeward, where the Sea was somewhat more pacific, but found here also about three hundred Men upon an Eminence waiting for us: We detached fifty of ours to go and meet them, but the Spaniards after having made a foolish Discharge fled; However, we took two of their Number, and asked them, whither that way led, upon which we were; they told us it would bring us to the Town of Tecoantepequa, according to whose Name that Bay was called, and that we had but four Leagues to it: We lay next Night upon the Road, under the Canopy of Heaven, according to our usual Custom; next day, which was the thirtieth, we resolved to go to the said Town, and directed our Course that way, in such a manner, that about two in the Afternoon we had a sight of the place from an Ascent, which is about half a League off.  
As it is encompassed and beset every way with Eight Suburbs, 
Their Adventures i● their march to Tecoantepequa, which they take.  it seemed to be so large, that we were a long time deliberating with ourselves whether so small a number as we were aught to go thither, as being no more than an hundred and fourscore Men, whereas there was three thousand of the Enemy in the place: In the mean time the extreme necessity we were reduced to for want of Provisions, pressed us to advance, and would not let us deliberate long upon the Danger that lay before us, so that all our Apprehensions being reduced to the fear we had of starving to Death, we pursued our March to go and confront our Enemies.  
When we had marched about half an hour, we found ourselves near the Town, and upon the brink of a great and very rapid River, which separates it from four of the Suburbs that adjoin to it; this River we crossed over, being up in the Water to the middle, in spite of the Spaniards who were entrenched on the other side, to dispute the Passage with us, which they were forced to leave open for us, after a good hours sharp Dispute: As soon as we were Masters of the Entrenchment, we entered the Town, where after we had fought hand in hand with the Enemy, like Men enraged with Hunger, we became Masters of the place of Arms about four in the Afternoon: But our Work was not yet done, for the Enemy having again entrenched themselves in a very fine Abbey, built in the manner of a Platform that commanded the Town; we went to the number of Fourscore Men to dislodge them, which was so readily executed, that having chased them thence, we made our Court of Guard of it, and then every one endeavoured to satisfy that Hunger wherewith we were extremely pinched.  
When we were got into this Town, 
A Description of Tecoantepequa.  we found it yet much more spacious and larger than it appeared to be unto us, from the forementioned Ascent; its Houses are well built, the Streets very straight, and the Churches exceeding stately and Ornamental: The Abbey of St. Francis, from whence we drove the Enemy, appeared more like unto a Fort than a Religious Convent, and it was built to serve for that use in case of need.  
On the 31st. we sent to require them to Ransom their Town, or else we would burn it; we had no Answer returned, which made us conjecture they had a mind to come and Attack us, for which they had so much the more Advantage, in that the River which began from the time that we passed it, to overflow, was about to 〈◊〉 us in; wherefore we decamped and lay in one of the Suburbs that stands on the other side, where we continued to the third of September; when we departed to return to our Canoes, without reaping any Advantage by the taking of this Town: We reimbarked on the fifth, and went to join our Ships in the Port of Vatulco, where we arrived the Ninth: On the 15th. we went off again in our Canoes without a Guide, and having landed, marched ten or a dozen Leagues up the Country, where we took divers Villages, and in one of them the old Governor of Merida with his Family, who was retired to this place, and who promised us a quantity of Provision for his Ransom, in expectation whereof we carried him on Shipboard, where we arrived on the 25th. The same day about Ten in the Morning we discovered a Ship, and put out with our Canoes to know what she was; she bore to the Cape, and put up Spanish Colours, but as the Sea ran very high, and that our Canoe could not well weather it, we returned again into Port. Now this Ship believed 'twas her Colours that hindered us to come on Board her, wherefore she took the same down, and put up a white Flag in the room of them; we 〈◊〉 the same time fitted up our Galley to go and hale her, but she could never get out of the Port, whereupon she failed away, and as our Ships were much out of order, we could not follow her. She was, undoubtedly, a Frigate built in the North-Sea, but it was impossible for us to know what Nation she belonged to.  
The Sea being calm on the 26th. we went with our Galley about twenty Leagues to Windward of Acapulto, to see if the abovementioned Ship were not put in to Port, we judging by her Rigging she wanted to put in somewhere to Land; But we returned without any News of her: We waited till the fourth of November for the Ransom of the Governor, which we did not overmuch press for, as finding in this Port and Parts adjacent, plenty of Victuals, particularly of Tortoises, which we had there in great Numbers, and Hattoes, that are to be met with 〈◊〉 and down frequently here, furnished us with all other Necessaries; besides that we had here a place of Security from the Insults of the Spaniards.  
It's impossible to go ashore from Sansonat to Acapulto, 〈◊〉 it be in the Ports, or Bays; and though that which they call the Salt-Pits be difficult of Access, because of the smallness of it, and that the Sea there runs very high, yet they esteem it a Bay for all that: It's the next you meet with after Sansonnat, and stands twenty Leagues to Windward of that of Tecoantepequa, which the Spaniards set down also for a Bay in their Charts, though, it be so far from being deep, that it can scarce be distinguished from the rest of the Coast: There is a Lake at the bottom of this last place bearing the same Name, with which it had formerly a Communication, but whose Mouth at present is stopped up by a Bank of Sand which the Waves have driven thither: This Lake hems in 〈◊〉 Islands that are not far distant from one another, and all of them very near the Mouth thereof: Some years since the Hourqua of Acapulco that went to the East-Indies, in its return entered into this Lake through the Bay, and we understood that Some Spaniards had entered by the other end of it into the River of Vastaqua, that discharges itself into a Bay of New Spain, and consequently to the North-Sea.  
When this Hourqua returns from the Phillipine Islands, 
An Account of the Hourqua.  where the Spaniards drive a great Traffic, 'tis one of the richest Vessels that sails upon the Ocean; it's of a prodigious bigness, and built so strong, that she is afraid of nothing but Land and Fire, she is provided with forty of pieces Cannons, whereof one half is of no use to her, for her Lading makes her sink so deep in the Water, that her Battery between the two Decks is rendered useless: She goes out yearly from the Port of Acapulco, convoyed with a Patach of Twenty-eight Guns, and laden with several sorts of Merchandizes that she carries to the Inhabitants of those Islands, who by way of barter for the same, give a great deal of those curious China, and japan-ware we see in Europe, and what is yet more valuable, Pearls, Gold-Dust, and precious Stones.  
This Ship had great Advantage in making this Voyage, that is, that in making choice of a proper Season, she goes, and returns in a Twelvemonths time, comprehending the while they stay in that Country, without being put to the trouble of veering about, and sifting the Sails: & 'tis beyond dispute, that she cannot be met with by any that wait for her, before the Port of Acapulco at a certain season of the year, which I shall take no notice of here, for Reason I have spoken of in the beginning of this Journal.  
I shall not forget also to remark in this place, that 〈◊〉 will be so much the more easy to take her, in that when she returns from those parts with the Patach, all her Crew are in so sickly, and dying a Condition, that 〈◊〉 four hundred Men that make up the Compliment, the●● is not one fourth of them in a Condition to defend it and this Distemper which they call Scorbut, never 〈◊〉 them in their return from the Phillipines', insomuch, 〈◊〉 a Ship which goes from the North-Sea with a design 〈◊〉 look after this Hourqua, might in less than Eighteen months' time, bating the Perils and Accidents she might be liable to at Sea, return with immense Riches.  
About twenty Leagues to Leeward of the Bay of Tecoantepequa stands the Port of Vatulco, 
A Description of the Port of Vatulco.  so small, that it cannot contain above ten or a dozen Ships, but yet they must have an Anchor fore and aft, for if they had no more than an Anchor out at the Forecastle, they would fall foul upon one another, in endeavouring to avoid it upon the change of Wind or Tide.  
At the entrance into the Port, which is very narrow, there is a Whirlpool to Leeward, which the Spaniards call Bofadera, whereinto the Water enters in so violent a manner, that it makes a noise that may be heard above four Leagues off.  
Four Leagues lower there is another Port where you cannot Anchor with safety, because of the Rocks, whereof the bottom of it is full: In the passage to it stands a great Rock, called the Fourillon, which is all over as well as continually so covered with those sports of Birds which we had before seen in the River of Villia, that there remains nothing of the Surface of it to be seen; and a little further is an Island, called Sacrifice.  
About Eight Leagues lower, there are three small Ports of a League's distance one from another, whereof that called the Angels is the best; it's no difficult matter to find the passage to it, provided you ●ail along the Shoar, but it's impossible to perceive it from the Main; there is a Rock stands at the Mouth of it that has an hole therein resembling a large Gate: From this Port to Acapulco, which is sixty Leagues off, we have no Harbour.  
The Country which extends itself from the Bay of Salt-pits as far as Acapulco, is that upon the South-Sea that is best Peopled, and where there are moreover several famous and very rich Towns; more Gold Mines are also found there than in Peru, though the Metal is not so fine; and those of Tinsigal alone, are more valued by the Spaniards than the Mines of Potosi, and therefore 〈◊〉 not without reason that this Western Coast is called by the Name of Costarica, though in our Geographical Maps they bestow this Name only upon a small part of this vast Tract of Land.  
On the 7th. 
The Freebooters take the Town of Muemeluna.  we went to make a Descent upon a little Town, called Muemeluna, which is Eight Leagues to Windward of Vatulco, and Six up the Country, about four Leagues from the Sea side, and two from the Town; we found a very strong Entrenchment made upon a Rock that stands upon the River, but the Spaniards therein made no great Resistance, no more than in the Town where we completed our Victualling: The Prisoners we took, told us, that about a Month before they had seen a Frigate pass by, that sent a small Canoe with seven or eight Men in it to their Embarking-place, where they found some Spaniards, who made them Embark again with so much Precipitation, that one of their Men was drowned, and whom, indeed, we found dead upon the Shoar, whither the Sea had thrown him, with his 〈◊〉 lying some paces from him, which should not have 〈◊〉 so long there, no more than the dead Carcase, if the Spaniards had espied it: For they believe themselves revenged, when they cut into pieces, or burn the dead Body of an Enemy; and we were assured, that when we buried any of our Men in their Country, they dig them up when we were gone, if they knew the place, for to exercise their Cruelty upon those Carcases, which when alive they could not make us feel.  
We returned on the 16th. aboard our Ships, and on the 20th. being not able all along the Coast to hear any News of the Five and Fifty Men we were in quest of we weighed Anchor, and directed our Course for the Bay of Mapalla, where we were minded to agree upon the place by which we were to repass to the North-Sea: On the 21st. we had a Northwind that carried us to 〈◊〉 Latitude where the West Winds Reign, and this continued to the 23d. when we were becalmed: On the first of December at Night we had a Storm which separated us one from another, and thus we continued alone▪ and without any Water, for all our Casks were run out, whereby we were reduced to the greatest Extremeity ● though we were but two Leagues from the Shoar: But 〈◊〉 was impossible for us to go ashore, for it's a Bank of Sand that reaches from the Bar of St. Mark as far a● Sansonnat, for the space of about Fourscore Leagues where the Sea breaks with great violence: Believing ourselves on the Sixth to be to Windward of this Bank, Armed our Pirogue to go near the Shoar, and look ou● for a place where the Sea was Calmer; next day one of our Men being more in patient than the rest, and egged on with Drought that tormented him four days, swum to Land, but thinking to return in the same manner, he was drowned without our being able to succour him, notwithstanding all the cry he made unto us to save him: On the 9th. in the beginning of the Night we thought to have seen a little Bay, before which we Anchored, that we might know in the Morning what it was, during which time we heard the firing of about six hundred Mosquets on the Land. As soon as Daylight appeared, on the 10th. we saw that what we took for a Bay was a kind of a Covert that stands Fifteen●Leagues to Leeward of Sansonnat, where we could see no likelihood of entering in. In the mean time we saw a very pretty Ship upon the Stocks in that place, which made us conclude there must of necessity be a Passage for her to come out; we Anchored pretty near the Rock, to wait for a Tide, during which time, a Wind blew from the Sea, and we adventured with the help of our Sails and Oars to get in, where we were saluted with three Waves that half filled our Pirogue in the very sight of the Spaniards, who watched our entering in.  
We put up to one side of the said Covert, and fired for the space of half an hour upon their Magazines, built by the side thereof, without their returning us one single shot; But at last we being tormented with violent Drought, which we were desirous to allay what ever it cost us, we hoist up our Sail, and run up our Pirogue before them, who believing we were going to their Town, that was but half a League off, they went off. But as we were no more than two and twenty Men, instead of running after them, we improved their Flight, in filling our Casks with Water, and to furnish ourselves with what Provision we found in the Magazines, and some of that Ship's Rigging which were more necessary for ours; but not daring all at once to lad our Pirogue with them, for fear of sinking in her Passage out; we spent the Night on the other side of those Magazines, that we might be under Covert from the Surprises of our Enemies, for we computed very well by the six hundred Musket shot we had heard, that there was a great many Armed Men in that place.  
On the 11th. we departed from under the Covert, to go and ●oyn our Ship, which we found on the 12th. in the Morning lying at Anchor Eight Leagues to Windword of 〈◊〉, where she had found the Sea somewhat more favourable: We spent that day to take in Water, and sent twenty Men to take a Village that was about half a League from the Seaside, from whence we returned the sanie day with some Refreshments, that put 〈◊〉 into our Ship's Crew, now much weakened with the Thirst they endured, as well as we who were in the Pirogue, as also with Hunger, which failed not to waste us away, though we had Victuals to satisfy the same; but we durst not eat for fear of being made dry: We weighed Anchor in the Evening with a West Wind, and on the Fifteenth arrived in the Bay of Mapalla, 
They arrive at Mapalla.  where we found the rest of our Vessels at Anchor near one of those Islands that lie within it.  
I am to observe, that as long as we were going up this Coast, that continually in the Nighttime there blue Winds from the Land, 
Some account of the Winds in these parts.  which were very favourable to Sailors, provided they were not far out at Sea, for Ten Leagues off there could be but very little of it felt, and there are certain Seasons when it blows so violently, that they are obliged to lower their Sails, and even to furl: On the 17th. 
Consultation about returning to the North-Sea.  we had a Consultation together about what Passage, according to the Prisoner's Relations, was less dangerous for us, to return to the North-Sea over Land; it was thought our best way was by Segovid, seeing we had no more than sixty Leagues to go before we came to the head of a River, upon which they told us, we might go down to the North-Sea whereunto it discharged itself; and that in the way we were to take by Land, we could have no more than five or six thousand Men to deal with, and that the way was very good to carry our wounded and sick Men along with us: But we were not fully convinced of the sincerity of this Advice, we sent two of our Canoes to Shears to take some other Prisoners, that so we might see whether they should confirm, or contradict this Information, and thereby be the more fully instructed concerning those things that might be an Obstruction to our Passage, and others that might facilitate the same.  
We went a Shoar on the 18th. to the number of Seventy Men, and marched all day long without meeting one Soul, as we did also the next day till Noon, without any more discovery than in the preceding one, wherewith we were so fatigued, that we resolved to return back again; And here we may add, that the greatest part of our Men were not overcontent to repass by Land to the North-Sea, because of the five or six thousand Men wherewith we were threatened, wherefore we left those that were minded, to return to their Canoes, and Eighteen of us, who found ourselves less weary than the rest, stayed behind: We followed a great Road which we met with soon after they had left us, and had not walked above an hour, when we took three Horsemen, whom, when we had asked where we were, they told us, that about a quarter of a League off there was a little Town, called Chiloteca, wherein there were four hundred white Men, besides Negroes, Mulaters, and Indians, and assured us, we had not been yet discovered: We had a mind to run after our Men, to acquaint them with this Account, 
A handful of Freebooters take Chiloteca,  and engage them to go back with us to the Town; but the Apprehensions we were under of being discovered, and thereby giving the Inhabitants time to put themselves into a posture of Defence, hindered us to do so, and made us undertake perhaps the boldest, most resolute, and if you will, the rashest Action that could be thought of; which was, that being no more of us than Eighteen Men, as I have said before, we should adventurously enter that Town, where we surprised and frightened the Spaniards to that Degree, that we took the Tenient and other Officers, to the number in all of fifty Persons, including the Women, Prisoners: They were seized with such a panic fear, supposing us to be far more numerous than we were, that all the rest would doubtless have been taken and bound by us, had it not been for their Horses, which are always at hand, which they mounted to ride away upon. And so it was as we would have it, for if they had had the Courage to stay behind, they might have cut out Work for us, whereof we had already but too much, which was to watch our Prisoners.  
We asked the Tenient where the Galley of Panama was, 
Being attacked by the Spaniards, they kill their Prisoners  who made Answer, she lay at Anchor in the Embarking-place of Carthage, which is Caldaira, where she waited for us, as hoping we would pass that way to go to the Nort-Sea, and that the King of Spain's Ship the St. Lorenzo was in the Port of Realeg●o, mounted with thirty pieces of Cannon, and four hundred Men on Board, to hinder us to come near that place which they began to settle in again: As we had a desire to lie in th●● little Town where we now were; we farther asked him what number of Men we should have occasion for to guard us, if we should stay there, he told us, there would be six hundred Men next day there, but that they had no more Fire-Arms than for two hundred. The Spaniards, who, during this time, were a little recovered of their Astonishment, being got together, entered into the Town again, and after we have several times conflicted with them, we entrenched ourselves in the Church, where we had put our Prisoners, who seeing us go in with Precipitation, believed their People pursued us close, and were just upon falling on us; which made them so bold, as to run to the Swords, and other Arms we had got together, wherewith they wounded us one Man. We presently got to the Doors, and from thence fired upon them so long, till there were no more than four Men and their Wives left alive of them: At the same time we mounted the Horses which we had taken, and with our four Prisoners of each Sex, went away with as little noise as we could, which the other Spaniards observing, they sent one to treat with us, but we refused, and fired upon him, for fear, if he came too near us, he should come to know how few we went. Next day, which was the 20th. we rejoined our other People, who had rested themselves at an Hatto they had met with in their return, and who gave us Assistance. against six hundred of those Spaniards who followed in the Rear of us; Then we gave the Women Prisone● their liberty: On the 21st. we went on Board our Canoes, and next day reached our Ships, where we interr●●gated our four new Prisoners concerning the Passage w● had projected; but they laid so many Difficulties before us, that we grew almost out of conceit with it: But yet, when we considered, we must either make our way through, or end our days miserably in an horrible want of all convenient Necessaries, 
They resolve to return to the North Sea by Land.  and in an Enem●● Country where we grew weaker every day by the loss 〈◊〉 our Men, we resolved to hazard all to get out of it▪ insomuch, that being no longer daunted at the dangers we were to run in this Passage, and being persuaded it would be better for us to die with our Swords in our Hands, than to pine away with Hunger; We made all things ready for this Journey, and to the end we might cut off from the most Timorous, any desires they might have to return to their Ships, if their Minds should alter, in reference to their going along with us, we ran our Vessels ashore, except our Galley and Pirogues, which we reserved to carry us off the Island where we were to the Continent.  
On the 25th. we form four Companies consisting of seventy Men each, making altogether two hundred and fourscore; and as for the forlorn Hope, we agreed for to draw out ten Men out of each, and to relieve them every Morning: We also made a Contract among ourselves, that those who should be lamed in the Encounters we might have with the Enemy in our way, should have the same Recompense as formerly, that is, ● thousand pieces of Eight a Man, that the Horses we should take, should be divided between the Companies for the ease of all our Men, and for those that were incommoded above any of the rest: That those that straggled and should be lamed, should have no Recompense made them, and that Violence, Cowardice, and Drunkenness should also be punished as formerly.  
Before I leave these Seas, 
The reason of their Necessities.  I'll spare the Reader the trouble of ask how we came to endure so much Hunger, Miseries, and Fatigues in these parts, since I have said upon several occasions, that the Country is so good and pleasant as well as fruitful in the Production of all things necessary for the support and comfort of human Life: As to this, there needs no more than observing that since our separation from the English at the Isle of St. john, we were all along so illy accommodated with Shipping, that we were forced to keep continually to the Coast, and by consequence in sight of the Spaniards, who discovering even the least Motions we made, had almost always time to remove all their Effects out of the way, before we made our Descent, and left us nothing but what they could not carry away, which was many times but very inconsiderable, whereas, had we had but one good Ship to put out far to Sea, they could not have discovered us, and we should have surprised them continually in our Descents, where we could have wanted nothing, not only that was necessary, but also pleasurable, besides the Wealth we must have carried away in a short time.  
This want of Shipping, under which we laboured, we so advantageous to our Enemies, and the consequence thereof they knew so well, that the People of 〈◊〉 sent no more Ships to the Western Coast where we were for fear some of them might fall into our Hands and Traded with one another no otherwise than by Land.  
The same Reason also hindered us to go up to 〈◊〉 Coast of Peru, where we could not have failed of having Ships, seeing they sailed up and down there every day, and drove a great Trade with one another, as knowing we were not so near unto their Country; So that it is easy from what I have remarked to conjecture, that for want of these helps which were of so much importance to us in these Seas; we must also very often stand in need of all those things which we could not but with the greatest difficulty have without them, wherefore to make any thing of it in these Climates, and to raise a considerable Fortune, without much danger and sufferings; there needs no more than to be provided with a good Ship, and for the better conveniency, Victualled for some time, that so there may be no necessity of going ashore to seek it.  
On the 27th. we discovered a Ship passing along between the Islands, which made us send our Galley and Pirogue to see what she was 〈…〉, but as soon as we came 〈…〉 ●hot of her, she took down the white Flag, and put out Spanish Colour's, and withal, gave us ten or a dozen Guns; we returned to the Shoar to give our People notice of it; not doubting, but if that Ship came to an Anchor in the same place, she would destroy our Pirogues: We sent them with our Baggage and Prisoners up to the Flats that are behind the Island where we were.  
This Vessel about Noon came in with the Tide, and Anchored within half a Canonshot of ours that were run ashore, under the Covert of which we fought against them with two pieces of Cannon till it was night, but as the Enemy had no other aim then to ruin our Ships, they put them this first day out of a condition to sail, (which was what ourselves had a mind to) and then put farther off form the Shoar.  
On the 28th. in the Morning they drew nearer again, and began to fight us, which made us shelter ourselves behind the Points of the Rocks that run out into the Sea, from whence our Arms carried aboard them; upon this they were forced to send their shallop under the favour of their Cannon, to take away an Anchor that was nearer to Shoar than their Ship, but being prevented therein, they cut off the Cable that held it, and put off again; At last, concluding with ourselves that this Ship would not leave us so hastily, we sent an hundred Men in the Evening to the Continent before us, that they might endeavour to take some Horses, on which we might lay our disabled Men, with orders afterwards to return and wait for us upon the Seaside in the same place where they went ashore, (which was a kind of a Port we had assigned them) in case they had returned before our Arrival there. And for fear the Spanish Ship should suspect, from the running of ours a ground, the design we had to go to the North-Sea, and that the Men on Board her would send to the Continent to give the People notice to put themselves in a readiness to hinder us; we counterfeited all night long the caulking of our Ships, that so we might fully possess them with a belief, that we were careening them, which wrought so effectually upon them, that in the Morning they failed not to come up to destroy with their Cannon, the Work they fancied we had been doing during the night.  
On the 29th. their Ship took Fire, which made them put farther off, 
A notable amusement to facilitate their scape.  where they extinguished it: On the 30th. we made use of a new Stratagem to amuse our Enemies, and take away all manner of suspicion from them, that we designed to be gone, which was to charge our Guns, Granades, and four pieces of Cannon, whereunto we tied lighted Matches of different lengths, that so having their effect in our Absence one after another, the Spanish Ship's Crew might still believe we were upon the Island, from whence we parted in the Twilight, as secretly as ever we could, with all our Prisoners, whom we reserved for no other use than to carry our Surgeon's Medicines, Carpenter's Tools, and the wounded Men we might have in this Passage.  
On the Ist. of january, 
They Provide for their journey.  in the year 1688, we arrived on the Continent, and on the Evening of the same day, the Party which we had sent before to look for Horses, came thither likewise: They had taken Sixty Eight with several Prisoners, who, without any Violence offered them, told us, they did not think it advisable we should Travel through Segovia, because the Spaniards had Intelligence we had made choice of that Province to 〈◊〉 through: But as we had already resolved upon the Matter, and that our Ships could be of no longer use unto us all that they could say to the contrary, did not hinder us to persevere therein. All our People at the same time packed up every Man his Charge, and put their Silver into Bags, which they thought they could carry with their Ammunition: Those who had too much of the former, gave it to those who had lost theirs at Play, for to carry, conditioning with them, that they should return the one half back to the Owner, in case it should please God to bring them safe to the North-Sea.  
As for myself, 
The Author's Device to save his Treasure.  I must say, I was none of the worst provided, and though my Charge was lighter than others, yet it was not for all that less considerable for the value, seeing I had converted thirty thousand pieces of Eight into Gold, Pearls, and precious Stones. But as the best part of this was the Product of Luck I had at Pl●●▪ some of those who had been losers as well in playing against me as others, being much discontented at the● Losses, plotted together to the number of Seventeen or Eighteen, to murder those that were the Richest amongst us. I was so happy as to be timely advertised of it by some Friends, which did not a little disquiet my Mind, for it was a very difficult Task, for a Man, during so long a Journey, to be able to secure himself from being surprised by those who were continually in the same Company, and with whom he must eat, drink, and sleep, and who could cut off whom they pleased of them, in the Conflicts they might have with the Spaniards, by shooting us during the Hurry, which yet they executed in another manner, as may be seen in d●e place: The apprehensions I had of this Conspiracy did not hinder me to retain so much Judgement and presence of Mind, as to fall presently upon such Methods as I thought most rational and secure for the preservation of my Life, and which effectually saved it, which was to deposit some of what I possessed in the hands of dive● persons, and that in the presence of all the rest, upon condition they should restore unto me such a proportion as I agreed with them for, when we were come upon the Coast of Domingo. By this means I rid myself of the care I should continually have had of keeping upon my Guard, without exposing them much neither, who carried my Effects, the which being divided diversely, and to different Persons, they had to do with too many People to compass their ends. It's true, I paid dear for this Precaution; but what will not a Man do to save his Life?   

CHAP. VI  
The return of the Freebooters from the South to the North-Sea, over the Continent, by another way than that by which they got thither.  
ON the Second day of january, in the Morning, after we had said our Prayers, and sunk our Pirogues, lest the Spaniards should have any benefit of them, we set out, and lay that Night by the Seaside; we stopped next day about Noon at an Hatto to Bait: On the 4th. we lay upon a Platform that extends itself upon the tops of several very high Mountains where the Spaniards, notwithstanding all the precautions we had taken, were advertised of our departure, and failed not to let us have their Company, keeping themselves always in our Flanks and Rear.  
On the 8th. we lay at another Hatto belonging to the Tenient of Chiloteca, about which place the Enemy began to Barricade the Ways: We rested on the Sixth for an hour and better at an Estancia to Bait, and upon a Bed in an Hall there, we found the following Letter directed unto us in these Words:  
WE are very glad that you have made choice of our Province for your Passage through, 
A Letter writ to the Freebooters.  home-wards; but we are sorry you are no better laden with Silver; however, if you have occasion for Mules to carry your Baggage, we will send them to you, we hope to have the French General Grogniet very quickly in our Power, and we will leave you to consider what is like to become of the Soldiers.  
We saw clearly by this Letter, that they knew nothing of the Death of Grogniet, since they believed he was still our Commander, and that they had no knowledge of him, but by the Account that had been given them by the three Men that had run away from him to them, when they failed of getting the Gold of the Mines of Tinsigal.  
On the 7th. we met with an Ambuscade of the Enemy, 
The Spaniards burn the Road.  whom our Vanguard forced to retire, and lay in the Evening at an Hatto: The Spaniards, who left no means unattempted to destroy us, burned all the Provision that was in our way, and also when we entered into any Savannas where the Grass was very dry, they went to Windward o● us to set it on fire, whereby we were very much incommoded, and our Horses were even stifled with the Smoke: As we were sometimes obliged to stay till the Fire had burnt up all, to go forwards, this very much retarded our March, and this was the chief thing the Spaniards aimed at, that their Men might have leisure to finish a Retrenchment, whereof I shall quickly have occasion to speak, which they erected unknown to us at some distance off upon our Road, to which also the Work they cut out for us to remove the Barricadoes of Trees, wherewith they had encumbered the way, contributed very much; Insomuch, that not being able to penetrate into their Designs, we persuaded ourselves that they did all this with no other intent than to chagreen us only, as being not able to do worse unto us; or I should have rather said, having not the Courage for it.  
On the 8th. we passed on to a very fine Sugar-Plantation, and as we were very desirous to take some Prisoners who might inform us of what was done, all our Company filled off, and twenty of us stayed behind in an House, after they had set it on Fire, to oblige the Spaniards to come and put it out, when they saw our Men at a distance from them, and this they failed not to do: But our Impatience being the means of discovering of us too soon, they thereupon fled; yet we firing upon them, wounded one, and took him, by whom we understood that all their Reinforcements were coming together to dispute our Passage, and that we were going to meet them that came from Tinsigal, who consisted of three hundred Men.  
When we had done with this wounded Man, we rejoined our main Body, who had halted to wait for us, and then jogged on till we came to a great Burrough, where we found those three hundred Men, who afterwards were our continual Guard, for they gave us Morning and Evening the Diversion of their Trumpets, but 'twas like the Music of the Enchanted Palace of Psicha, who heard it without seeing the Musicians, for ours marched on each side of us in places so covered with Pinetrees, that it was impossible to perceive them.  
We lay this Evening about a quarter of a League from the said Burrough, upon an Ascent according to our usual manner, who never encamped but upon high ground, or in the Race of Savannas, for fear of being hemmed in. We decamped on the 9th. in the Morning, after we had reinforced our advanced Guard with forty Men more, who were appointed to fire their Muskets at the Entries, or Avenues of the Woods, that we might have a sight of the Spaniards, in case they laid any Ambuscades for us: in the mean time, about ten in the Morning we passed on to a place that was so thin set with Wood, that we might see a considerable distance from us, and seeing no Enemy appear, we did not fire at all: But we did not dream that we were seeking for that far before us, which we had at the sides of us, for the Spaniards who were ranged to the Right and Left of our way, lying on their Bellies, made their Discharges with so much Precipitation, that there was no more than one half of our advanced Guard who had time to answer their firing. They killed us two Men presently, who were turned out of the way, to pass undiscovered of the Enemy; after which we went to refresh ourselves in a little Town that was in our way, and lay half a League beyond it.  
We met with another Ambuscade on the 10th. wherein we were beforehand with our Enemies, and made them leave us their Horses, than went to bait at another Burrow, and lay a little farther.  
On the 11th. 
The Freebooters enter Segovia.  as we drew near unto the Town of Segovia, we met with a new Ambuscade a little on this side it, and when we had forced them with our Fusils to retire, we went into the said Town, being resolved, and disposed to Fight stoutly, as believing if the Spaniards were minded to try us, they would use their greatest Effort in the place, but they contented themselves with firing only a few Musquet-shot at us from under the Covert of some Pinetrees that grow upon the Ascents which encompass the Town whither they were retired: We found nothing there to eat, because they had burnt all the Provision in the place.  
By good luck we took a Prisoner to conduct us to the River we sought for, and which was still twenty Leagues off; for as much as those who had been our Guides as far as Segovia knew not the way any farther.  
This Town lies in a bottom, and is so surrounded with Mountains, 
Segovia described.  that she looks as if she were laid up in Prison; the Churches here are but very indifferently built, and the place of Arms is both very considerable, and very fine; it's an Inland place forty Leagues off from the South-Sea. The way that leads to it from the place where we were, is very difficult, being all Mountains of a prodigious height, to the tops whereof we must creep with great danger, and the Valleys consequently are so very narrow here, that for a League of even Ground you pass over, you have six Leagues of Mountains to go: When we had past these Mountains we felt a very sharp Cold, and were taken with so thick a Fog, that even when day appeared, we could not know one another no otherwise than by our Voices; but that lasted not till above ten in the Morning, when the Whither cleared up, and the Fog went entirely off; and the Heat which succeeds the Cold, becomes there very great, as well as in the Plains, where none of this Cold is felt, till you come directly to the Foot of the Mountains▪ Thus were we forced to endure such contrary Seasons, as well when we Traveled, as when we reposed ourselves, that they exposed us to very great Inconveniencies: But the hopes of getting once into our Native Country, made us patiently to endure all these Toy●●, and served as so many Wings to carry us.  
On the 12th. 
They continue their journey.  we departed from this Town, and went up other Mountains, where we had incredible trouble to clear the ways of those works the Spaniards had prepared to Barricade them up with; we went to lodge in an Hatto, where they fired very much in the Night into our Camp.  
On the 13th. an hour before Sunrising, we mounted along an Eminence, that seemed to us to be an advantageous place to Encamp on; from thence we sa● upon the edge of a Mountain from which we were separated but by a narrow Valley, twelve or fifteen Horse●▪ which we took for some time for Cattle that fed there, whereat we much rejoiced, as being in hopes we should next Morning have good Cheer at the cost of those Animals; and that we might be the more assured of the matter, we sent forty Men thither, who told us 〈◊〉 their return, that what we took for Beefs, were all 〈◊〉 Horses, and that they had observed three Retrenchments in the same place, about Pistol-shot one from another, which raising by degrees towards the middle of the same side of the Mountain, 
The Spaniards entrenched in a most advantageous Post to obstruct their Passage.  fully barricaded the 〈◊〉 through which we were to pass next day, and commanded a small Stream that ran along the said Valley, into which we must necessarily descend first, there being no other way, nor any likelihood of our going on one 〈◊〉 thereof. They saw also a Man, who, as soon as he 〈◊〉 them, severely threatened them with his Cutlass, which he held naked in his Hand.  
These sad Tidings was a mighty allay to our Joy, 〈◊〉 the transformation of those pretended Beefs, on whom our pineing Appetite had depended so much, affected us to a great degree; but these Thoughts were at 〈◊〉 to be laid aside, to make room for to consider 〈◊〉 we should disentangle ourselves from that place, 〈◊〉 that without delay, because the Spdniards, who were ●●●ering together from all the adjacent Provinces, would ●●ckly fall upon our small Company, who must of necessity be overborne by them, if we stayed for them: The ●●ans to effect this were not easily found, and perhaps it ●●uld have appeared an impossible thing to any other 〈◊〉 such as we were, who till then had been successful 〈◊〉 in all our Undertake; and to be plain in the 〈◊〉, we found ourselves now hard put to it: For as I 〈◊〉 to the rest of our People, ten thousand Men ●●ould not be able to force their way through that Entrenchment, without being cut to pieces, as well because of the advantage of the place, as the number of Spaniards that defended it, which we might compute by that 〈◊〉 their Horses; and seeing a single Man could hardly pass ●●one side of it, there was no likelihood we should be 〈◊〉 to do it with our Horses and Baggage, so rough was 〈◊〉 Country: And indeed, saving the Road itself, all the 〈◊〉 was no other than a thick Forest without either ●ays or Paths, full of sharp Rocks in some places, of Quagmires in others, and embarassed with a great many Trees that had dropped down to the Ground with Age: And tho' after all, we should have found out a way to escape across so many Obstacles, there was still an indispensible necessity that we should fight with the Spaniards, that we might be at quiet for the rest of our Journey. This they all agreed to; but, as they objected unto me, that it was to no purpose to represent these Difficulties, which of themselves were but too apparent, without proposing some Method to surmount them, nor to give Counsel without facilitating the execution thereof: 
The Author's Advice about forcing them.  I told them, that for my part, I could not see what else we could do, but go cross those Woods, Precipices, Mountains, and Rocks, how unaccessible soever they appeared to be, and endeavour to surprise the Enemy in the Rear, and to gain the Advantage of the Ground from them, by getting above them, where surely we were not expected; and that I would answer for the Success of the same at the Peril of my Life, if they would undertake it: That as for our Prisoners, Horses, and Baggage, wherewith we were encumbered, we ought not to leave them defenceless, to the Discretion of those Three Hundred Men, who always kept close to us in our March, and encamped every Evening about a Musquet-shot off; That we ought to leave Fourscore Men to Guard them with all necessary Precaution, as you'll hear by and by, and that such a Number was enough to fight with so many Spaniards four times told.  
We took some time to deliberate hereupon, and a● length these Expedients, how hazardous soever they were, being found the most suitable to the Condition we were in, and I may say, the only ones we had left us, we resolved to lay hold of them, and put the same in execution.  
Sc●rce had we projected the Design, and considered the Ascent where we were, the Situation of the opposite Mountain, where the Spaniards had made their Retrenchments, but that above the highest of them we saw a Road, which we took to be the Continuation of that which they had shut up against us, and turning to the Right, went winding about the side of the same Mountain, which yet we could not discover but with difficulty, and by Lights peeping in between the Trees, which would allow us to see but some traces at a distance from one another.  
As we had not hitherto resolved upon which side to pitch, in order to get behind those Intrenchments, whether the right or left, this way decided that point, being well satisfied, that if we could but once cross it, it would 〈◊〉 us directly upon the Enemy: But yet that we might not engage ourselves inconsiderately in this Enterprise, where all things went for us, we sent Twenty 〈◊〉, while we had any Daylight left, to a Place that was somewhat higher than that where we were, to cover ●nother Party, whom we had known by Experience to 〈◊〉 been very ingenious and expert upon several Occasions, that so they might pitch upon those Places, by which we might, in the Night, the more easily get up 〈◊〉 far as that Road, thereby to go and charge the Enemy 〈◊〉 the Rear by break of Day.  
As soon as our Men were returned, and gave us an accounted of what they had observed, we made all things 〈◊〉 for our departure, but we first made that Station 〈◊〉 were leaving, a Place of Arms, where we left our Baggage, all the Prisoners we had, and Fourscore Men 〈◊〉 them, and this, that the Three Hundred Spaniards, who continually followed us, as well as those who were posted behind the Retrenchments, might be 〈◊〉 we had not left our Camp; and we gave the 〈◊〉 that commanded Order to make every Sentinel 〈◊〉 set, or relieved in the Nighttime, to fire his Fusil, 〈◊〉 that he should beat the Drum at the usual hour: 〈◊〉 told him moreover, that if God gave us the Victory, 〈◊〉 should send a Party to bring him off, and that if ●●out an hour after he heard the Firing at an end, he 〈◊〉 not see any Body from us, he should provide for 〈◊〉 own safety as well as he could.  
Things being thus disposed, we said our Prayers as low we could, that the Spaniards might not hear us, from 〈◊〉 we were separated but by the Valley we have 〈◊〉 of: At the same time we set forward, to the ●umber of. Two Hundred Men, by Moonlight, it be●●● now an hour within Night, and about one more 〈◊〉 our departure, we heard the Spaniards also at their ●●yers, who knowing we were encamped very near 〈◊〉, fired about Six Hundred Muskets into the Air to 〈◊〉 us. Besides which, they also made a Discharge at all the Responses of the Litany of the Saints which they sung. We still pursued our March, and spent the whole Night (in going down, and then getting up) to advance half a quarter of a League, which was the distance between them and us, through a Country, as I have already said, so full of Rocks, Mountains, 〈◊〉, and frightful Precipices, that our Posteriors 〈…〉 were of more use to us than our Legs, it bein● impossible for us to Travel thither otherwise.  
On the Fourteenth by break of Day, 
They 〈◊〉 over 〈◊〉 difficult ways to fall on their Rear.  as we were got 〈◊〉 the most dangerous parts of this Passage, and had already seized upon a considerable Ascent of the Mountain, by clambering up to it in great silence, and leaving the Spaniards Retrenchments on our left, we saw their Party that went the Rounds; who, thanks to the Fogs that are very rife in this Country (as I have already said) till Ten a Clock, did not discover us. As soon as they were gone by, we went directly to the Place where we saw them, and found it to be exactly the Road we were minded to seize on: When we had made an Halt for about half an hour to take breath, and that we had a little Daylight to facilitate our March, we followed this Road by the Voice of the Spaniards, who were at their Morning Prayers, and we were but just beginning our March, when unfortunately we met with two Out-Sentinels, on whom we were forced to Fire, and this gave the Spaniards notice, who thought of nothing less than to see us come down from above them upon their Retrenchment, since they expected us no other way than from below: So that those who had the Guard thereof, and were in Number about Five Hundred Men, finding themselves on the outside, when they thought they had been within, and consequently open without any Covert, took the Alarm so hot, that falling all on upon them at the same time, we made them quit the Place in a moment, and make their Escape by the favour of the Fog.  
This so much unexpected Morning Music disturbed the whole Oeconomy of their Designs, 
They prevail against the Spaniards.  and so thwarted their whole Contrivance, that those of the other two Retrenchments drew all without the lowermost, where they prepared to defend themselves; We fought with them a whole hour from under the Covert of the first Retrenchment, which we had got of them, and which exactly commanded them, because of its elevated Situation upon the Mountain: But as they gave no Ground, we began to think that the Shot we discharged, did not reach them, because of the Fog which hindered us to discover them, and that we could not Fire but according to the Discharges that came from them; so that being resolved to lose our Aim no longer, we advanced, and fell directly upon the Place from whence they fired: There we fought them stoutly, and they did not quit the Place, till such time as they saw the butts of our Muskets, and that near them, the sight whereof the Mist had till then taken from them; But then being much terrified, they left us all, and ran that way which was before their Retrenchments, which proved very incommodious for them; because that being the only Place by which they thought we could come at them, they had cut down all the Trees that grew there, and in the adjacent Parts, as well because they might obstruct their sight in this Bottom, as hinder us to come on under the covert of them: And thus the Precaution which they had taken against us, by a choir contrary Effect was turned upon themselves, insomuch that we had so clear a view of them from the Retrenchments we had taken, that we did Execution almost with every Piece we shot. We pursued them after that for some time, still beating them, but at length being weary, both of running and killing, we returned to the Retrenchments where the Five Hundred Men, whom we had put to flight at first, being come back, endeavoured to break in upon those whom we had left to Guard them, but we made them like the rest quickly run away. We were also fatigued mightily in pursuing of them, for besides that the Ground was so extraordinary bad, and hard to pass, they had also augmented the Difficulties, by making use of the Trees which they had felled down, to barricade and stop up even the least Avenue that was near the Place round about.  
We found these Spaniards had so little Mind to give us Quarter, 
The strange 〈◊〉 of the Spaniards.  if they should have the upper hand of us, that even when we took any of them, they would not as much as ask it at our hands, and to some of them we gave Quarter in spite of their Teeth, tho' they did otherwise all that ever they could to save themselves out of our hands: But at this no man ought to wonder, for it's a Maxim amongst them in these Parts, and whereof we have had Experience upon several Occasions, whether it proceed from Pride, or natural Fierceness of Temper, or because of an Oath they take before their Commander, before they go to Fight, that they will never submit to ask Quarter of those, to whom, they have swore they would give none: But we in the mean time being affected with Compassion upon sight of the great quantity of Blood we saw running down into the Rivulet, spared the rest, and went a second time into our Intrenchments, having lost all this while but one Man, and two only wounded. The Spaniards, among others, lost their General, who was an old Walloon Officer, who had given them the Plan of this Retrenchment, that would infallibly have prevailed against us, had we attacked them by the way they expected. In the mean time another old Captain had advised him to secure their Rear, but he saw so little likelihood of danger on that side, that he answered, we must be either Men or Devils; that if we were Men, he defied us to get over any way in Eight days time; but if we were Devils, though he should take never so much care of himself, he must still be taken.  
However, at the solicitation of the said Officer, he sent a Party that way to go the Rounds, and to Post the two Sentinels we spoke of, as they thought most convenient. The General being searched, there were several Letters found in his Pockets, which had been writ to him by the Governors of the Province, that set forth particularly the Number of Men they had sent him; and one, among others, from the General of Costa Rica, who expressed himself as follows.  
A Letter written by the General of the Province of Costa Rica, to the Commander in Chief in the Retrenchments, Dated January 6th. 1688.  
SIR,  
I Thought I had made a good Choice, 
The General of Costa Rica his Letter to the Chief Officer.  when I committed to you the Conduct of an Affair which ought to re-establish our Reputation, if you have th● better of the Enemy, as you induce me to believe you will; I was preparing to send you Eight Thousand Men, if you had not sent me word that Fifteen Hundred was enough. I do not doubt but a Person that hath served so long as you have done, will take care of your Men, especially since you have to do with a People, from whom there will no Honour redound to you by overdoing them.  
According to the Relation you have given me of your Retrenchments, it's impossible but those People, with the help of God, must be destroyed: I Advise you to put a Thousand Men into them, and Two Hundred near unto the River, by which they hope to get unto the North Sea. In case any of them save themselves cross the Mountains, Don Rodrigo Sarmado, the new Governor of Tuisigal, aught to be at the Head of Three Hundred Men, to fall upon the Rear, as soon as ever they are engaged, for certainly their Baggage must be there. Take good Measures, for those Devils have a Cunning and Subtilty that is not in use amongst us.  
When you find them advance within the shot of your Harquebuses, let not your Men fire but by Twenties, to the end your firing may not be in vain, and when you find them weakened, raise a Shout to frighten them, and fall in with your Swords; while Don Rodrigo Attacks them in the Rear. I hope God will favour our Designs, since they are no other than for his Glory, and the Destruction of these new sort of Turks; Hearten up your Men, tho' they may have enough of that according to your Example; They shall be rewarded in Heaven, and if they get the better, they will have Gold and Silver enough, wherewith these Thiefs are laden.  
After we had sung Te Deum upon the Field of Battle, by way of Thanks unto God for this Victory, we mounted Sixty Men on Horseback to go and give notice to our other People of the Success the Almighty was pleased to give us. We found them ready to begin another Engagement against the Three Hundred Spaniards, whereof we have spoken, who, as soon as they heard that Action at the Retrenchments begin, and saw how few Men we had left behind in our Camp, were easily induced to believe we had made our Attack by that disadvantageous way I have spoke of, as supposing it impossible for us to do it in any other Place▪ and that therefore our Ruin must be inevitable; Insomuch, that instead of entering directly into the Place, which, considering their Number, they could have carried in a moment, they had so little Courage, that they contented themselves to send an Officer to our Men that guarded the Baggage, to Parley with them, whom they stopped for a time, in expectation of some News from us, that so they might return an Answer conformable to the Intelligence they received. And thus the Platform I had laid whereon to ground the sufficiency of Fourscore of our Men for that Work, or rather the Cowardice of the Enemy, was fully confirmed.  
They told us, that as soon as we had begun the Fight, those Three Hundred Spaniards advanced a little, and having got upon an Emmence that commanded our Camp, they alighted, and sent them the said Officer to make the following Harangue to them.  
I come hither from my General; 
A Spanish Officer's Sp●●ch to a part of the Free booters.  you say, you do not question but you have Force enough, and that you are Men of Courage, which you have let us know whenever you have been minded to make yourselves Masters of our Country; yet you are not to doubt but the great numbers of Men we have got together, will overpower you. We are to let you understand, there are a Thousand Men in that Retrenchment against whom they are gone to fight, where they are worsted; that we are Three Hundred Men in this Place, and that Two Hundred are posted near to the River you go and seek, to wait for those of you who escape out of the Fight: Wherefore if you will give yourselves up Prisoners of War into the Power of our General, who is a Man of Honour, we will be Friends, and we will let you pass to your own Country: But as to those of your Men whom ours have taken alive, their Almoner, yesterday after Prayers, begged Quarter for them, for the Honour of the Holy Sacrament, and Glorious Virgin, which has been promised unto them.  
Our Men hearing him talk at this rate, were already somewhat alarmed, as fearing what he said was true▪ but as soon as they saw us come at a distance, they took Courage, and returned him as fierce an Answer, like Men who had no fear upon them, to this purpose.  
Though you had had Force enough to destroy two thirds of our Number, 
Their bold Answer.  we should not fail still to fight with the remaining part; yea, though there were but one Man of us left, he should fight still against you all.  
When we put ashore, and left the South Sea, we all resolved to pass through your Country, or die in the Attempt; and tho' there were as many Spaniards of you as there is Grass in this Savanna, we should not be afraid, but look upon you always in our Opinion Cowards, and we will pass on, and go where we will in spite of your Teeth.  
The Officer being dismissed upon our arrival, mounted his Horse to return from whence he came, and observing we were booted, and mounted upon his Companions Horses who guarded the Retrenchments, he shrunk up his shoulders, by way of amazement, and road as fast as he could to carry the News to his own Party. As soon as he was got to them, who were not above a Musquet-shot off, we advanced, and fell upon them, to put them out of Condition all at once to follow us any more: We received their first Firing, to which we made no return otherwise than with our Pistols and Cutlasses, 
They defeat the Spaniards.  and that unhappily for them who had not yet got upon their Horses, for we cut a great many of them to pieces, insomuch that God crowning all the Advantages we had had in the rest of our Engagements, by the Success we had in this last, we let the rest go, detaining only their Horses; 〈◊〉 when we had broken all their Arms, we with our Baggage rejoined our main Body, who stayed still upon the Place to Guard the Retrenchments. We had no more than one Man killed in this Engagement (as 'twas in the other) and two maimed.  
We asked some of the Prisoners, whom we had taken, several Questions, and they told us, among other things, that we should still meet with another Retrenchment upon the Road, about six Leagues distant from those we quitted, which made us fear, with very great reason, lest the Fugitives should go and possess themselves of it, with a design to dispute our Passage once more: And indeed we saw Fire upon the top of a great Mountain, which they had made for a Signal to gather their scattered Troops together, and those who out of the fear they were in, might perhaps hide themselves for Eight Days together, had it not been for this, as believing us still at their heels: But we prevented their Design, so we lay two Leagues from thence to cut off their Passage▪ there being no other way than this by which they might get thither, and whose sides were still less accessible the farther you went on, than they were behither the same We had cut the Hams of Nine Hundred of their Horse before, that so they might be made unfit to pursue us; we took much about the same Number of them with us to ease our Journey, till we came at the River we were in quest of, and to kill and salt them upon our arrival, that so they might serve us for Food in that long Passage.  
On the 15th. we passed by the forementioned Retrenchment, 
They get to a River, and build Piperies.  which was not yet finished, without any Resistance, this proceeding in all appearance from the Terror which the noise of our Victory had struck into the People, and lay at an Hatto three Leagues beyond it. On the 16th. we lay at another six Leagues farther; and at last, on the 17th. which was the sixteenth day sin●● our setting out, we came to the so much desired River, and presently entered into the Woods that grow upon the Banks thereof, where every one fell to work in good earnest to cut down Trees to build Piperies, wherein we might go down the same.  
Some perhaps may think that these were some commodious Vessels, wherein to carry us with ease down the River, but there was nothing less than that in it. What we called Piperies, were four or five Stocks of one kind of Tree, which they called Mahot; it's a light floating sort of Wood, which, after we have taken off the Bark, we join and tie together, instead of Cords, with a sort of Lines that grow in these Woods, and cling like Ivy unto every thing that is near them, and especially to Trees, to the height whereof they mount; and when these Pieces are set together, they put two or three Men upon them, according to the bigness of the Pipery, and this is all the Equipment we make thereof.  
The surest posture we can find ourselves to be in, is to stand upright thereon, tho' they sink two or three Foot under Water; and you may judge by what follows, whether the continual apprehensions of Danger we were in, were well or ill grounded.  
We built ours no bigger than to hold two Men, that so they might the more easily pass between those very harrow Rocks we foresaw, by those that already presented themselves to our view, we must meet with before we got unto the Seaside. When this pretty Flota was in a condition to put out, we dragged it to the Riverside, after we had furnished ourselves with long Poles, to keep up from being driven too violently upon the Rocks, where we were apprehensive we should be carried by the violence of the Stream, as it came also frequently to pass.  
This River springs in the Mountains of Segovia, and discharges itself into the North Sea at Cape Gracias a Dios, after having run a very long way in a most rapid manner cross a vast number of Rocks of a prodigious bigness, and by the most frightful Precipices that can be thought of, besides a great many Falls of Water, to the Number of at least an Hundred of all sorts, which its impossible for a Man to look on without trembling, and making the Head of the most fearless to turn round, when he sees and hears the Water fall from such an ●eight into those tremendous Whirlpools. In short, the whole is so formidable, that there are none but those who have some Experience, can have right conceptions of it: But for me, who have passed these Places, and who, as long as I live, shall have my Mind filled with those Risks I have run, it's impossible I should give such an Idea hereof but what will come far short of what I have really known of them.  
'Twas therefore upon this dangerous River that we went down, 
A strange way of floating down the River.  suffering ourselves to be carried along at the will of the Stream, in these pitiful Machine's, whereof the greatest part was under Water, as has been said before, two or three Foot, insomuch that we were almost always up to the middle therein: But this was nothing in comparison of the rapidity of it, which many times ●urried us, in spite of all the resistance we could make, into the bubblings of foaming Water, where we now and then found ourselves buried with our pieces of Wood, which made many of our Men tie themselves thereon, as being in hopes, the Wood, that floated, would bear them up still upon the Water, but in this some of them were mistaken.  
But as for those great Falls, they had, to our good Fortunes, at their entrance and goings out, a great Basin of still Water, which gave us the Opportunity to get upon the Banks of the River, and draw our Piperies ashore, to take off those things we had laid on them, which, as wet as we were, we carried with us, leaping from Rock to Rock, till we came to the end of the Fall, from whence one of us afterwards returned to put our Pipery into the Water, and let her swim along to him who waited for her below: But if he failed to catch hold (by swimming) of those pieces of Wood, before they got out of the Basin below, the violence of the Stream would carry them away to rights, and the Men must then be necessitated to go and pick out Trees to make another.  
We thought at our setting out to go down the Water all together, to the end, that in case of any Accident▪ one might give Assistance to the other; But at the end of three days, when I knew the danger we exposed ourselves to in this way of Swimming together, which had already been the occasion of our losing many Piperies, I set myself against the design of our continuing thus together, by demonstrating to all our Men; That now we had no Spaniards in these Parts to conflict with, but only the Difficulties of this dangerous River, it was convenient on the contrary to allow every Crew of us to advance a little before the other, and to keep as it were in a Line successively, that so in case the first were carried (as indeed it came to pass) by the violence of 〈◊〉 Stream upon the Rocks on the brink of the Water, whereof the River is full in an infinity of places; they might have time at least to get off before the arrival of the next Pipery, which had already wrought so much Disorder by the Wrecks that had been occasioned by their falling foul on one another, that all of us were in manifest danger of perishing.  
I afterwards found, as well as several others of our People, who had made Trial hereof, that this foresight was not useless to us; for my Pipery happening to be cast upon such a Place, I was forced to untie the pieces of Wood, and to straddle upon one piece, while my Companion did the same upon another, and so leave ourselves to be carried down in this manner at the pleasure of the Stream, till it pleased God that we should meet with a Place, as we did indeed, that was not so ripid, where we could go upon the Bank of the River, which we could not have done if others had immediately followed us. I also advised, that those who went down first, should take care to set up in the most dangerous Places a Flag or Banner at the top of a long Pole, that so we might discern it afar off, not so much to give notice to those who were hindermost, that there was a Fall in such a Place, for these would make themselves to be heard almost a League off, but to signify to them what side they were to put to land, which should be that where the Flag stood. These Methods being put in practice, saved the Lives of a great many Men, though for all these Precautions, several were also lost.  
The many Bananiers which we found along the Banks of this River, 
Their Food.  was almost the only Food that kept us from starving; for our Arms being continually wet, and our Powder all spoiled, we could not possibly go a Hunting, tho' there is very good Game there; For as to the Horseflesh which we had salted, we were forced to throw it away in two days time, for it would not keep in the Water any longer.  
These Bananiers have partly been planted by the Indians, who dwell along the sides of this River, and partly by the overflowing of the Waters, which having dragged them along, and then left them dry, they took Root again, and so have multiplied.  
Some days after we found, 
Of the Indians in these Parts.  when we began to go down the River, some Carbets of an Indian Nation, called Albaovins, whom we chased to get their Victuals; there are a multitude of others, who dwell farther from the brink thereof on the opposite side to the former, and those of the one Bank have neither War nor Commerce with those of the other.  
It was in this Place that those of our Men who had lost their Money by Gaming, 
The Freebooters Murder one another for their Money.  put their cruel Design in Execution, and where I came to know that the warning formerly given me, was too true: For these Wretches being gone before, went and hid themselves behind the Rocks that are upon the brink of this River, by which we must necessarily pass. As every Man endeavoured to save himself as well as he could, and that for the Reasons already given, we went down the River at a distance one from another, and without any mistrust, they had but too much Time and Conveniency to pick out and Murder five Englishmen, whom they knew to be some of the best furnished with Booty, of which these Assassins entirely deprived them. My Companion and I found their Bodies upon the River's side; and I must freely confess, that such a Spectacle would have struck no small Terror into me, if I had been still the bearer of my win; I bless God with all my Heart, that inspired me with a Design to quit my Treasure, being then exposed, in going down the River as I was last after the English, to the Treachery of those Villains, where I must infallibly have run the same risk as they had done. None of our People knew any thing of this Murder, but when we were got all together farther down, I told them what I had seen, which was fully confirmed, as well by the absence of the dead Men, as by that of the Assassins, who durst not come and rejoin us, and whom we never saw from thenceforward.  
On the 20th. of February we found the River large●, and more spacious than before, and met with no more Falls therein; But the same was so encumbered with Trees and Bamboes', which the Floods carried thither, that our wretched Machine's could not be kept from overturning; but the depth of the Water in these Parts being a means to moderate the rapidness of it, there were not many drowned.  
At last, 
The River proving good, they build Canoes.  when we were gone down some Leagues farther, we found the River very good, the Stream very gentle, and no likelihood of our meeting any more Rocks nor Trees, tho' we had still above Sixty Leagues to the Seaside. Wherefore now finding ourselves freed from those Perils and Dangers which we had been exposed to in such terrible Places, where Death in the most frightful shape presented itself continually to our view, every one began to resume fresh Courage, and conceive good hopes of the remainder of the Voyage; insomuch that being now all of us assembled together in the same Place where those who had gone before stayed for them that came after, and that we had now before us how we should go quite through with the rest of our Voyage, we agreed to divide ourselves into several Companies, each consisting of Sixty Men, to build Canoes out of Mapou Wood, which sort of Trees grow in great numbers upon the Banks of the said River.  
Having with wonderful Diligence finished four Canoes by the first of March, for the use of an Hundred and Twenty Men that were of us in one Canton, we put them into the Water, and embarked thereon, without staying for an Hundred and Forty more, who were finishing theirs; the ardent desire we had to be as soon is possibly satisfied, whether we should really be able to reach the North Sea, egged us mightily to put on; for according to the Idea we had conceived of our Passage, we were apprehensive of being carried back into that of the South, as not being able to think we could be so Happy as to recover the sight of a Sea by which we might be carried home to our Native Countries, and which we had for so considerable a time longed for.  
The English, 
The English get first to the Seaside.  who would not make any Canoes, had got in their Piperies before us to the Seaside: Here they met with an English Boat from jamaica at Anchor, whom they were very forward to press to go and ask Leave of the Governor of that Island for their safe coming thither, because they had gone out without any Commission; but that Vessel ● being unwilling to go thither, without they laid down Six Thousand Pounds Sterling by way of Advance, and they being not in a condition to run the hazard of such a Sum, because many of them had lost their Money, as several amongst us had done, which they would have carried with them, by the over-setting of the Piperies, they stayed with the Moustick Indians, that dwell some Leagues to Windward of the Mouth of this River, and who are very kind to them, because of the Trinkets they bring them from Ia●●●a.  
Thus that Boat proving to be of no use to these English, they politicly bethought themselves to send us word hereof, as hoping we, in acknowledgement of this Kindness, would obtain leave of the Governor of St. Domingo for them to retire, and be proteceted in that Island. This News we received by two Moustick Indians, whom in a Boat they sent to meet us Forty Leagues up the River, and who told us, that there should no more than Forty Men only come down, because that ●hip could contain no more, by reason of the smallness of it, and its scantiness of Provision: But for all this, the Hundred and Twenty that made up one of our Companies, went down together, for every one pretended to be of the number of the said Forty.  
Though this River we are now leaving, is by some Spanish Maps made to run directly fourscore Leagues, 
The length of the River.  and then to fall into the North Sea, yet we have computed the same to run above Three Hundred, being almost always carried to the Southeast for to go to the North.  
We happily arrived on the 9th. at the Mouth of the River at Cape Gracia de Dios, and entered into the Sea, which with much Satisfaction we knew to be that of the North, where we were obliged to wait for the English Ship that was at the Isles of Pearls, which are a dozen Leagues distant from that Cape to the East: Here we stayed till the 14th. with the Mulasters that live in these Parts, and who fed us for some days with Fish.  
This Cape, which stands on the Continent, hath been inhabited for a long time by these Mulasters and Negroes, 
A Description of Cape Gracia de Dios.  both Men and Women, who have greatly multiplied there, since a Spanish Ship, bound from Guinea, freighted with their Fathers, was lost by coming too near the Shoar, which is very dangerous in these Party: Now, those who had escaped the Shipwreck were courteously received by the Moustick Indians living about this Canton, who were well pleased with the loss of that Ship, and of the Spaniards their Enemies that were in it.  
Those Indians assigned their new Guests a place to grub up, 
Of the Indians of these Parts, and their manner of Living.  where they built themselves Cottages in the finest Country of Savanna's, that reach along the River from the Mouth of it for five or six Leagues upwards. Here for their Sustenance they Plant Maes, Bananiers, and Magniots, which the Indians gave them; They also taught them to make a most Nourishing sort of Drink, which they call Hoon; they prepare the same of a Fruit that is produced on the top of a kind of a Palmtree, which grows naturally in these Woods, and never exceeds ten Foot in height: Each of these Trees bears no more than one Bunch or Grape, but most of them are a full Load for one Man: Its Grain is of the same form and thickness as an Olive; some of them are yellowish, others reddish, and containing in a very hard stone an exceeding oily Kernel: They pound the Fruit, Stone, and Kernel all together, boiling the same afterwards in Water, and this makes up all the Composition: When the same is grown cold, or but lukewarm, they put what quantity they are minded to drink into a Calabass pierced through with small holes like unto a Skimmer; this Drink, besides that it is very Nourishing, and fattens very much, is also a pleasanter Liquor than any that is to be met with among the other Indians the same being only peculiar to this Nation.  
The Mulasters are all a very tall People, and go altogether naked, saving their Privy-Parts, which they cover, Nature having provided for them upon the Account a kind of greyish stuff, which they pull from a Tree, called the Bastard-Palm, the top of whose Stock is wrapped up in some Fathoms of it, from the first rising of its Branches some feet downwards, according to the thickness of each of these Trees: This stuff is also a great help to them to make Coverlets, wherewith to cover them in the Night; and some of those People who live more at ease, wear Shirts and Drawers, which the English bring them from jamaica. They are the boldest People in the World for exposing themselves to the Perils of the Sea, and undoubtedly the most expert in the Art of Fishing: They'll commit themselves to the Waves in these little Boats, or such like, which an able Seaman will scarce venture to do, and here they will stay for three or four days together, being no more concerned, let the Wether be what it will, than if they were made of the same piece as their Boat; and provided they can but once set sight of the Fish, tho' swimming never so low in the Water, they will not fail to take him, so dextrous are they at this Work.  
They many times do our Freebooters a Kindness, when they take them on Board with them, upon Condition of letting them have a share of what Booty is got, which must be exactly performed unto them: For if you once deceive them, you must no longer expect their Assistance; and this Temper is peculiar almost to all the Indian Nations in these Parts, that they will never go again, when once you have broke your Word with them.  
The Ancient Mousticks, who gave these Men I have spoken of, Entertainment, live about ten or a dozen Leagues to Windward of Cape Gracia a Dios, in those Places they call Sambay and Sanibey: They are very slothful, and neither Plant nor Sow but very little, a●● lie all day on their Amacks, which are a kind of movi●● Beds, in their Ajoupas or Baracks, while their Wife's w●● upon them in every thing as far as they can serve them and when they are pressed with Hunger, they go a Fishing in their Boats, at which they are also very skilful and when they have taken any, they eat them, and g●● not out any more till Hunger returns upon them again.  
As for their Clothing, it's neither larger, nor mo●● sumptuous than that of the Mulasters at the Cap●● There are but a few amongst them that have a fixe● abode, most of them being Vagabonds, and wand'ring along the Riverside, and having no other House to shelter themselves in but a Latanier-leaf, which they manage so, that when the Wind drives the Rain on the one side, they turn their Leaf against it, behind which they lie, and this Skreens them against the Wether When they are inclined to sleep, they dig a hole in the Sand, where they lie, and then cover themselves therewith; and this they do to keep themselves from the stinging of the Mousticks, wherewith the Air is generally very full: They are little Flies, that are sooner 〈◊〉 than seen, and have so sharp and venomous a sting, 〈◊〉 where they alight, they seem to have fiery Darts wherewith to prick Men.  
These poor People are so tormented with those mischievous Infects, when they see them not, that their Bodies appear like Lepers, and I can assure it for Truth, as knowing the same on my own Knowledge, that it 〈◊〉 no small pain to be attacked with them; For besides th●● they caused us to lose our Rest in the Night, it was the● that we were forced to go naked for want of Shirts when the troublesomeness of these Animals made us 〈◊〉 into despair and such a Rage, as set us besides ourselves.  
When these Indians go a Journey, tho' never so sh●●, they take their Wives, Children, Dogs, and Fawns▪ which they breed 〈◊〉, all along with them: It's a Custom I have observed to be ●●eld among all the Indi●● Nations on the Terra Firma of America, and those speak of live as brutishly as any of the rest, yet the● are not so Cruel and Savage, because of the Society they have with the English, who have no other aim than to endeavour to bring them under, and Mailer their Country, where they have a great many Habitations● already.  
On the 14th. 
Fifty of the Freebooters get on Board the English Vessel.  the Vessel which I said was gone to the Isles of Pearls, arrived at the Place where we were, and came scarce to an Anchor, but we all crowded to go on Board, because we were to draw Lots who should embark: But about Fifty of us, for all that, being more vigilant than the rest, made a shift to enter her, who thinking it unadviseable to go ashore again, to commit to Chance a thing we were already in Possession of, and for to prevent a greater Number from entering in, we being already piled as it were on the top of one another, we weighed Anchor, and departed.  
The Master would have carried us to jamaica, but we not knowing how matters stood between France and England, whether it were Peace or War, engaged him to carry us to St. Domingo, for Forty Pieces of Eight a Head: We went to take in Water at the Isle of Pearls, and on the 16th. left the same.  
On the 17th. we doubled the Island of Catalina or Providence, as the English call it, where the Spaniards had formerly a very fine Fort and small Town, which were taken by the French and English, under the Colours of the last. On the 18th. we went to cross the Channel, ●ho ' it blew a strong Easterly Breeze. On the 24th. we ●ame to Land at Los jardinos, which are a great many small Islands near unto that of Cuba: And on the 29th. we took in Water at Port Portilla (in the Isle of Cuba) which is not inhabited.  
On the 30th. we anchored to the South Southeast of the Burrow of Baracoa, in the same Island, where we surprised the Hunter's belonging to that Place, whom we obliged to sell us the Victuals they had took, by giving them their own Price for it: But this our Liberality towards them proceeded from another cause, and that was, that we were uncertain whether our Nation was at Peace or War with the Spaniards, since we had no Intelligence here 〈◊〉 from any French Country how things went with them.  
On the 6th. of April we touched at Nippas', which is 〈◊〉 small Burrow on the Coast, Seven Leagues distant from Petit Guavis, that so we might hear some News of our own Country while we road at Anchor there. There were some of our People, so infatuated with the long Miseries we had suffered, that they thought of nothing ●●se but the Spaniards, insomuch that when from the Deck they saw some Horsemen riding along the Seaside, they flew to their Arms to fire upon them, as imagining they were Enemies, tho' we assured them we were now come amongst those of our own Nation.  
We left this Port on the 4th. and went to Anchor in the Port of Petit Guavis, 
Their arrival at Petit Guavis.  from whence we had departed almost four Years before, and before we came near the Fort, I went to Monsieur Dumas the King's Lieutenant, to require him to grant us Protection and Idemnity in the Governor Monsieur de Cassy's absence, by Virtue of an Amnesty the King had been pleased to send to those that made War upon the Spaniards since the Peace, which being concluded on since our departure, it was impossible we should come to know it in such remote Places, and where we were thought to have been entirely destroyed.  
Lastly, When we were got all ashore to a People that spoke French, we could not forbear shedding Tears for Joy, that after we had run so many Hazards, Dangers, and Perils, it had pleased the Almighty Maker of the Earth and Seas, to grant a Deliverance, and bring us back to those of our own Nation, that at length we may return without any more ado to our own Country; Whereunto I cannot but farther add, that for my own part, I had so little hopes of ever getting back, that I could not, for the space of Fifteen Days, take my Return for any other than an Illusion, and it proceeded so far with me, that I shunned sleep, for fear when I awaked, I should find myself again in those Countries, out of which I was now safely delivered.   

A Relation of a VOYAGE MADE BY THE Sieur DE MONTAUBAN, Captain of the FREEBOOTERS on the Coast of Guiney, in the Year 1695.  
With a Description of the Kingdom of Cape Lopez, the Manners, Customs, and Religion of the Country.  
A Letter to Monsieur—  
SIR,  
A Relation of the Voyage made by Captain Montauband, commonly called Montauban, is at last come to my hands, and I have sent you the same in print: There is no doubt but you will admire, as well as I, how much his Prudence and Courage have been instrumental to deliver him from many unhappy Accidents, where another must infallibly have perished. You will remember as soon as you begin to read, to have seen some of his Men at Bourdeaux, in the Year One Thousand Six Hundred Ninety and Four; from thence it was he departed the following Year to undertake the Voyage you are here presented with: He gave chase to several Ships he met with in his way; he fought with a Frigate carrying Thirty sour Guns, at Cape Verde; he met with an English Ship of Twenty Guns, at Cape St. john, which he took after a short Fight; after which, he took a Brandenburg Caper, and sailed away for Angola; near the Shoar he met with the English Guardship, being a Frigate carrying Fifty four Pieces of Cannon, this Ship he fought for Five or Six Hours, and both of them very ●ravely boarded one another, and as he was about to make himself Master of the said Ship, the English Captain set fire to his Powder, and so both the Ships blew up into the Air with a terrible crack.  
You will have the pleasure to contemplate, in the Perusal of this Book, (as if you stood upon the Seaside,) this tremendous Shipwreck; as also, see how the Sieur de Montauban, together with Fifteen or Sixteen of his Men were saved. He suffered Hunger for above Three Days together, and at last arrived at Cape Lopez, from whence he went to visit the King of that Country, of whose Court and Kingdom he has given us here a Description: He speaks also of his Reception, and advances a Project how to settle the Roman Catholic Faith in those Parts: He stood for Surety at the baptising of a Son of Prince Thomas, the foresaid King's Son. He went on board a Portuguese Ship, in order to his Passage to Europe; An English Man that was his Friend, took him aboard his Vessel, and carried him to Barbadoes, where he was confined to his Chamber by Colonel Russel who was Governor of those Islands: He was freed from thence, and went to Martinico, where he saw Monsieur de Frontenas, General of the French Islands. From thence he got into France, being very uncertain whether he shall return to Sea again. But, Sir, all these Adventures are set forth in so natural and easy a Style, that you cannot but infallibly observe the Sincerity and Generosityo● the Author. It's true, our Seafaring Men are not so polite as those that live ashore, and that proceeds for want of Society and Conversation; but to make amends for that, they are an hundred fold more sincere than the other. And thus, Sir, do not think a Seafaring Man will impose upon you; for myself, I have several times heard Montauban in Person give a Relation of this same Voyage, but I could never observe that he varied in any one thing at any time; and the free and generous Air wherewith he delivered those brave Actions he has performed in Fight, would persuade you of the Truth of what he hath related. It's not for any Ostentation that he has written this Account; he has in the very beginning thereof declared openly enough, that he had no other End in doing it, than to give a Minister of State an Account (as he calls it) of his Campagne. In short, if you are dubious in respect to the Fight where the Sieur de Montauban was Shipwracked, you may recollect yourself, and find you have read the same in the Gazettes of September and October this present Year. I am,  
SIR, Your most humble and most obedient Servant, B—  

A Relation of a Voyage made by the Sieur de Montauban, Captain of the Freebooters, on the Coast of Guiney, in the Year 1695.  
SINCE I have so often felt the malignant Influences of those Stars that preside over the Seas, and by an adverse Fortune lost all that Wealth which with so much Care and Trouble I had amassed together, I should take no manner of pleasure in this place to call to mind the Misfortunes that befell me before the Conclusion of the last Campagne, had not a desire of serving still both the public and particular Persons, as well as to let His Majesty know the Affection and Weddedness I have always had for his Service, made me take Pen in hand to give Monsieur de Phelipeaux an Account of such Observations as I have made; wherein he may also find with what eagerness I have penetrated to the remotest Colonies of our Enemies, in order to destroy them and ruin their Trade.  
I was not willing to swell up this Relation with an Account of all the Voyages I have made, and all the particular Adventures that have befallen me on the Coasts of New Spain, Cartagena, Mexico, Florida, and Cape Verd, which last Place I had been at Twenty Years ago, having begun to use the Seas at the Age of Sixteen.  
I could also have added hereunto the Campaign I have made in One Thousand Six Hundred Ninety and One, when being Commander of the Ship called the Machine, I ravaged the Coasts of Guiney, entered into the great River Serelion, and took a Fort from the English, where they had Four and twenty Pieces of Cannon; which I caused to be split, that they might be of no farther use unto them.  
But I am desirous to confine myself to give an Account of my last Voyage, because it is the nearest, and that which is yet fresh in the Memory of the Public, Notice and some Information having been given thereof by the Noise made in France and elsewhere, of the burning of my Ship, and the terrible Crack it made in the Air.  
In the Year One Thousand Six Hundred and Ninety Four, after I had ravaged the Coast of Caraqua, I went up to Windward towards St. Croix, where I understood that there were some Merchant Ships, with a Convoy, to come from Barbadoes and Nevis, and bound for England; and upon the same Information I resolved to sail up to the height of the Bermudos, hoping to take this small Fleet, and so to make a good Booty of it. I was scarce got thither, but that I saw them appear, and sailing directly towards me, without any Apprehensions of Danger upon them: But I presently attacked their Convoy, called the Wolf, and took her, with Two more of the Merchant Ships laden with Sugar, the rest having made their Escape during the Fight. As I was carrying my Prize into France, I met with another English Ship of Sixteen Guns, coming from Spain, and bound also for England, that after a short Fight struck, and which I carried to Rochel, where the Admiralty adjudged the same to be good Prize. When I had sold this Ship, I carried my Three other Vessels to Bourdeaux, where I arrived in September, One Thousand Six Hundred Ninety and Four; and these last also being condemned as good Prizes, I made it my Business presently to find out Merchants that would buy them.  
In the mean time, my Freebooters, who had not seen France in a long time, finding themselves now in a great City, where Pleasure and Plenty reigned, were not backward to refresh themselves after the Fatigues they had endured while so long absent from their native Country. They spent a world of Money here, and proved horribly Extravagant. The Merchants, and their Hosts, made no Scruple to advance them Money, or lend them as much as they pleased, upon the Reputation of their Wealth, and the Noise there was throughout the City of the valuable Prizes whereof they had a share: All the Nights they spent in such Divertisements as pleased them best, and the Days in running up and down the Town in Masquerade, causing themselves to be carried in Chairs, with lighted Flambeauxes at Noon Day; of which Debauches some died, while Four of my Crew fairly deserted me: So that now seeing I lost my Men, notwithstanding all the Care I had taken, and strict Injunctions I had laid upon them, I thought it advisable for me to be gone from thence as soon as I could, that I might keep the rest together.  
In the first place I supplied the room of those whom I had lost, with as many Bourdeaux young Men, who in a short time became as expert as the old ones; for you are to observe, I made it my continual Care and Business to teach my Men to shoot, and my so frequent exercising of them, rendered them in a short time as capable of Shooting and handling their Arms as the oldest Sea Freebooters, or the best Fowlers by Land.  
When I had revictualled my Ship, that carried no more than Thirty four Pieces of Cannon, I left Bourdeaux, in the Month of February, in the Year One Thousand Six Hundred Ninety and Five, with an Intention to go and cruise on the Coast of Guiney in Africa. I got up to the Azores, which are Thirty seven Degrees North Latitude, and cruised thereabouts for the space of Eight Days, without any Purchase: From thence I passed to the Canary Islands, which are in Twenty five Degrees North Latitude: We discovered the Peak of Tenariff a great way off, which they say is the highest Mountain in the World. They report these Mountains had their Names from Dogs, which the ●●tins call Canis, and which the Portugu se found here in great Numbers upon their first Arrival. I cruised round about them for Fourteen Days, in expectation of meeting with some Dutch Ships which I was informed were to come that way; and it proved to be really so: For the said Ships came thither, but they got into Port before I could reach them; and this made me sail away for the White Cape, and the Isles of Cape Verd, that are between Fourteen and Eighteen Degrees North Latitude. Upon my Arrival there, I found Two. English Ships lying at Anchor in the Road of the Isle of May, which made me put out my Shallop to know what they were, and the same informed me that they were Two Interlope●● carrying about Thirty Guns each. I resolved to board and take them; to this end I lay by to come nearer them, but as we bore upon one of the Points of this Island, these Ships did not think fit to tarry for my coming up; but smelling my Design, they made all ready, and left their Cables and Anchors in the Road at which their Shallops lay.  
I pursued them all Day, but Night coming on, I lost sight of them, and returned to the Road from whence they were gone, in order to take away the Cables and Anchors, and to sink the Shallops fastened by them. When I had so done, I sailed away for the Isle of St. Vincent, to caulker my Vessel in that Place, and to take in Water and Wood This Island also is one of those of Cape Verd. Here I stayed for the space of Eight Days, at the end whereof, understanding by a Portuguese Bark, that there were Two English Ships, carrying from Twenty to Thirty Guns, at the Isle of Fugo, one of which was resitting there, because of a Fight she had been engaged in with some other Ships, I presently weighed Anchor, and sailed away for the said Island, which is not far distant from that of St. Vincent, being in hopes to meet with the Enemy in that Place: But upon my Arrival, I understood by a Portuguese, that they were gone away, Four or Five Days before, in the Night, without saying any thing of the Place whither they were bound, from the said Island of Fugo, or Fire-Island. I thereupon steered my course for t●e Coast of Guiney, and first discovered the Cap● of Three Points, where I met with the Guardship, which was a Dutch Frigate, carrying Thirty four Guns, and cruised out at Sea. She quickly discovered me, and made directly towards me, in order to know what I was: As I had also on my part perceived her, and was in hopes to come close and fight her, I hung up Dutch Colours, that I might not frighten her away, but give her an Opportunity to come up within Canonshot of me. When I saw her near enough, I put up French Colours, and gave her a Signal to strike, but instead thereof, she, without any more ado, very bravely gave me a Broadside, and at the same time received one from me. We continued to fight one another, in this manner, from Morning till Four in the Afternoon, without my being able to get the Weathergage, nor come up near enough unto her, to make use, to any purpose, of my Fusils, which are the chief Arms in such Ships as ours be; nor to hinder her by the Favour of the Wind which she had of me, to go and Anchor under the Fort of the Cape of Three Points, where there were Two Dutch Ships more fitted out for Men of War, one whereof carried Fourteen and the other Twenty eight Pieces of Cannon. I presently thought these Three Ships had joined together, in order to come out to fight me, which made me lie by thereabouts, for a whole Day, in expectation of them. I anchored also within a League of the Shoar, hoping at length, that they, being spighted at my insulting of them in this manner, would be eager for Revenge: But all this to no purpose; and in all Appearance, the Guardship had already found herself so ill treated, that she had no occasion for a second Fight. A small Portuguese Ship that passed by soon after, told me these Ships were the same that had forced the Sieur Rey, Captain of the King's Flute, called the Deep, to leave that Coast; which also was confirmed afterwards unto me by the Sieur Rey himself, at the Prince's Island, where I met him.  
Seeing therefore that the Enemy would not fight, and considering with myself it was not advisable for me to attack them under the Cannon of the Fort, I resolved to go to Cape Lopez, and to Prince and St. Thomas Isles: In my Passage I discovered Cape St. john that stands on the Continent of Guiney, as well as the Cape of Three Points, and I happened to meet with an English Ship of Twenty Guns, that had Three hundred and Fifty Negroes, Elephants Teeth, and Wax on board it, which did not cost me much pains to take her. The Captain told me he was come from Ardra, where he had taken Five hundred and fifty Negroes on board, but that they had slain some of them, because they had mutined against his Ship's Crew, and that some more of them had made their Escape to Land in his Shallop which they secretly stole from him. Ardra is one of the principal Town▪ in Guiney, standing upon the Seaside, and the usual Residence of a Prince who governs a great Country in this Part of the World.  
From thence I went to Prince's Isle, in sight whereof I took a small Brandenburg Caper, mounted with Eight Pieces of Cannon, and carrying Sixty Men. She cruised about this Latitude, and took all the Barks she could light on, without distinction of Nation or Colours. When I had done this, I went into the Port, in order to clean my Ship, which was foul enough, and that I might clear myself of the English Prize I had taken, I sent her away to St. Domingo, in America, to have the same condemned, under the Command of the Sieur de Nave, and a sufficient Number of Men in her, whom I picked out of my own Crew. But some time after, I understood she was retaken by some English Men of War that were before Little Goara.  
In the mean time, that my Men might not be idle, I gave my Officers Orders to see my Ship careened, while I myself with the Brandenburg Caper which I had taken, and Ninety Men whom I put on board her, went out to cruise, and continued at it for Six Weeks, upon the Coast of Guiney, or about the Prince's and St. Omer's Islands, without meeting any Enemy. Whereupon I returned back into the Road of the first of these Isles, where I revictualled my Ship as soon as possibly I could; and when all things were ready, I weighed Anchor, and sailed directly for the Isle of St. Thomas, there either to sell, or truck the Caper I had taken, which last I chose to do for some Provisions, because I had not enough to go and cruise long upon the Coasts of Angola, whither I had resolved to go and spend Five or Six Months, in order to avoid the English Ships they were fitting out at the same Town of Guiney, which consisted of Three Men of War, and a Fireship, and were designed to go in quest of me, cruising about St. Thomas, where they thought I should continue.  
As I left St. Thomas, I saw a Ship at Anchor, sailed towards her, and gave her chase a long time; but I could not prevent her getting to land at the Isle of St. Omer, and staving to pieces in striving to take her; I lose an Hundred and fifty Pounds of Gold Dust which this Dutch Interloper had got in trading on this Coast.  
This being over, I sailed for the Coasts of Angola, which is Two hundred and fifty Leagues on the other side of the Line: There I arrived on the Twenty second of September, and understood, when I came within Three Leagues of the Port of Cabinda, that there were Two English Ships with Negroes on board in that place. As I was to Leeward of that Port, I bore out to Sea, in hopes next Day to have a South-West Wind that usually blows from the Seaward, to help to recover the Port. When Day appeared, I saw a Ship under English Colours bearing upon me, whom I did not presently take to be a Man of War. But some time after, I discovered she carried no less than Four and fifty Guns. I used all the Art I could to amuse her, and for that end, I hung out Dutch Colours, that I might also the more easily come near her, while she on her part was not backward to amuse me, and by the Guns she fired from time to time to assure me of her Friendship, endeavoured to come up with me. When I perceived my Enemy's Design, I took upon me to make a show of waiting for him, and sailed but very slowly, that I might make him believe my Ship was heavy laden, or that I was encumbered for want of Sails and Hands. We kept in this manner, from Break of Day till Ten in the Forenoon. He gave me a Gun, from time to time, without Ball, to assure me what he was, and as he supposed my Friend; but finding at last I did not answer him, on my part, in the same manner, and that we were now within Canonshot of one another, he gave me one again with Ball, which made me presently put up French Colours, and answer him with another▪ Hereupon the English Captain, without any more ado, gave me Two Broadsides, which I received without returning him one again, tho' he had killed me Seven Men; for I was in hopes, if I could have got somewhat nearer to him, to put him out of Condition ever to get away from me: I endeavoured to come within a Fusil-shot of him, and was desirous to give him an Opportunity to show his Courage, in boarding me, since I could not so well do the same by him, as being to Leeward. At last, being come by degrees nearer, and found him within the reach of my Fusils, which for that end I kept concealed upon the Deck from his sight, they were discharged upon him, and my Men continued to make so great a Fire with them, that the Enemy on their part began quickly to flag.  
In the mean time, as their Ship's Crew consisted of above Three hundred Men, and that they saw their Cannon could not do their Work for them, they resolved to board us; which they did, with a great Shout, and terrible threatenings of giving no Quarter, if we did not surrender. Their grappling Irons failing to catch the Stern of my Ship, made theirs run in such a manner, that their Stern run upon my Boltsprit, and broke it. Having observed my Enemy thus encumbered, my Men plied them briskly with their Smallshot, and made so terrible a Fire upon them, for an Hour and an half, that being unable to resist any longer, and having lost a great many Men, they left the Sport, and ran down between Decks, and I saw them presently after make Signals with their Hats of crying out for Quarter. I caused my Men thereupon to give over their firing, and commanded the English to embark in their Shallops, and come on board of me, while I made some of my Crew at the same time leap into the Enemy's Ship, and seize her, and so prevent any Surprise from them. I already rejoiced within myself for the taking of such a considerable Prize, and so much the more, in that I hoped, that after having taken this Vessel that was the Guardship of Angola, and the largest the English had in those Seas, I should find myself in a Condition still to take better Prizes, and attack any Man of War I should meet with. My Ship's Crew were also as joyful as myself and did the Work they were engaged in with a great deal of pleasure; but the Enemy's Powder suddenly taking fire, by the means of a Match the Captain had left burning of purpose▪ as hoping he might escape with his Two Shallops, blew both the Ships into the Air, and made the most terrible Crack that was ever heard. It's impossible to set forth this horrid Spectacle to the Life; the Spectators were themselves the Actors of this bloody Scene, not knowing whether they saw or saw it not, and not being able to judge of that which themselves felt. Wherefore leaving the Reader to imagine the Horror which the blowing up of two Ships above Two hundred Fathom into the Air must work in us, where there was form as it were a Mountain of Water, Fire, wrack of the Ships, Cordages, Cannon, Men, with a most terrible Clap made, what with the Cannon that went off in the Air, and the Waves of the Sea that were tossed up thither; to which we may add the cracking of Masts and Board's, the rending of the Sails and Ropes, the Cries of Men, and the Breaking of Bones: I say, leaving these things to the Imagination of the Reader, I shall only take notice of what befell myself, and by what good Fortune it was that I escaped.  
When the Fire first began, I was upon the fore Deck of my own Ship, where I gave the necessary Orders; now I was carried up upon part of the said Deck so high, that I fancy it was the height alone that prevented my being involved in the Wreck of the Ships, where I must have infallibly perished, and being cut into a Thousand pieces, I fell back into the Sea (you may be sure) giddy headed enough, and continued a long time under Water without being able to get up to the Surface of it. At last, falling into a Debate with the Water, as a Person who was afraid of being drowned, I got upon the face of it, and laid hold of a broken piece of a Mast that I found near me. I called to some of my Men who I saw swimming round about me, and exhorted them to take Courage, hoping we might yet save our Lives if we could alight upon any one of our Shallops. But what yet afflicted me more than my very Misfortune, was, to see Two half Bodies who had still somewhat of Life remaining in them, from time to time mount up to the face of the Water, and leave the place where they appeared all died with Blood. It was also much the same thing, to see round about me a vast number of Members and scattered Parts of men's Bodies, and most of them spitted upon Splinters of Wood At last, one of my Men having met with a whole Shallop among all that Wreck that swum up and down upon the Water, came to tell me that we must endeavour to stop some Holes therein, and to take out the Canoe that lay on board her: We got to the number of Fifteen or Sixteen of us who had escaped, near unto this Shallop, every Man upon his piece of Wood, and took the pains to loosen our Canoe, which at length we effected. We went all on board her, and after we had got in, saved our chief Gunner who in the Fight had had his Leg broke. We took up Three or Four Oars, or pieces of Board's which served us for that purpose; and when we had done that, we sought out for somewhat to make us a Sail, and a little Mast; and having sitted up all things as well as possibly we could, we committed ourselves to the Divine Providence who alone could give us Life and Deliverance.  
As soon as I had done working, I found myself all over besmeared with Blood, that ran from a Wound I had received in my Head at the time of my fall; we made some Lint out of my Handkerchief, and a Fillet to bind it withal out of my Shirt, after I had first washed the Wound with Urine: The same thing was done to the rest that had been wounded, and our Shallop in the mean while sailed along, without making Land, or our knowing where we were going: And what was still more sad, was, that we had no Victuals, and we had already spent three days without either eating or drinking. One of our Men being greatly afflicted both with Hunger and Thirst at the same time, drunk so much Salt Water, that he died of it: Most of our Men vomited continually, whether it were that they were incommoded with the Water that got into them when they fell into the Sea, as it will happen if they drink of it out of mere Necessity. As for myself, I was incommoded for a long time: I afterwards swelled up mightily, and my Excrements came from me in the form of small Buttons; and I attribute to a Quartan Ague, that seized on me soon after, the Cure of my Dropsy, and Recovery of my Health, that by degrees returned to me: I make no enumeration of the other Inconveniencies which so dangerous a Fall brought upon me, such being unavoidable to a Man that fell into so great a Fire: All my Hair, Face, and one side of me were burnt with the Powder; and the same Fate attended me, as usually does Bombardiers at Sea, and that was, to bleed at the Nose, Ears, and Mouth. I do not know whether this be the e●●ect of the Powder or no, by swelling up those Vessels which contain the Blood in our Bodies, to such an extraordinary degree, that the ends of the Veins open and let it out; or that the great noise, and violent motion that is wrought in those Organs, makes the same happen. But let it come which way it will, since there is no room here for a Consultation of Physicians, as long as we were dying of Hunger, nor to inquire what became of the English, when we had so much difficulty, and hardly could save ourselves, we continued our Course up the Current with the help of our Oars, because we knew the same came from the Port of Cabinda: But as the Wind was against us, we could never get thither, and were forced to be satisfied to get to the Cape of Corsa if we could, which stands a dozen Leagues from that of Cathersna, where we could not Land because of a Bar, that renders the Coast unaccessible. That was our Design, but Hunger hindered us to put the same in Execution, and we were forced even to overcome the Obstacles which Nature laid in our way, by running ashore in spite of the Bar: This we performed at last (after much difficulty) being in hopes to find there some Negroes that might furnish us with Victuals. One of our Company presently landed, in order to go and seek out somewhat to satisfy our Hunger; and by good Fortune found in a Pond sticking to the Branches of Trees, some Oysters, whereof he came presently to give us notice. We went all up to the very Pond along a Channel of the Sea, where we were no sooner come, but we eat lustily of the Oysters with a very good Appetite: We opened them with the few Knives we found in our Pockets, lending the same from one to another very charitably and readily. When we had spent two days in that Place, I divided my Men into three small Companies, and sent them up into the Country to seek for Victuals and Houses, with Orders to return again in the Evening to the Shalloop: I went out myself also as the rest did; but we could find neither any House, nor the least sign of any Men in those Parts. All that we could see were great Herds of Bufflers, as large as Oxen, who fled so fast from us, that we could not possibly come near them: Wherefore having spent all the Day in this manner, and got nothing, we returned to our Shalloop to eat Oysters again, and resolved next day to leave this Place, and go to Cape Corsa, to Leeward of which there is a large Port, where Ships that sail that way put in to furnish themselves with Water and Wood The Negroes that live in the Country having notice of the coming in of Ships by the firing of Cannon, come thither also with Provisions, and Barter the same for Brandy, Knives, and Hatchets. They are forced to live remote from the Sea, because all that Coast is very Marshy. As soon as we were got to the said Cape, we heard a great noise, made 〈◊〉 the Negroes, who came thither to sell Wood to the ●hips that lay at Anchor in the Port: I looked amongst ●hem, to see if I could find any one whom I knew, for 〈◊〉 they had often brought me some Wood, and other Refreshments in the course of my former Voyages, I was in hopes to find some or other that would know me again: But tho' I knew several of them, it was impossible for me to persuade any of them that I was Captain Montauban, so much was I disfigured with my late Misfortune; and all of them took me for a Man that would impose the belief of it upon them: I thought fit to tell them in their own Language, whereof I understood a little, that I was ready to die with Famine, and prayed them to give me somewhat to eat, but it signified nothing; so I desired them to carry me to Prince Thomas, who is Son to the King of that Country, as hoping he might call to mind the favours I had formerly showed him.  
I carried all my Company with me to that Prince; we were first brought to the Dwellings of those Negroes, where they began to be a little more tractable, and gave us some Bananiers to eat, which are a sort of Figs longer than a Man's Hand. Next day we got to the Prince's Habitation, but I was in so pitiful a Condition, that I could never by the signs I gave, make him know me, tho' I spoke to him in his own Language, as also in the Portuguese Tongue, which he understood very well. It fortuned one day that going together to bathe ourselves, he saw a Scar upon my Thigh, that was the effect of a Wound I had received with a Musquet-ball; he told me that he must immediately know, whether I was Captain Montauban or no; and that if I were not the Man, he would cut off my Head: He asked if ever● I had a Scar with a Musquet-shot in my Thigh, which when I had showed him, he presently embraced me, and said, he was exceeding sorry to see me in that Condition, and immediately caused Victuals to be distributed among my Men, and divided them into several Habitations, with strict Orders to the Negroes, with whom they were quartered, to take the greatest care they could of them. As for me, he kept me with himself, and made me always eat at his own Table: When I was a little brought into Order, he said, he would carry me to see the King his Father, who lived five or six Leagues off, that is, about ten or a dozen from the Seaside. I let him know how great the Favour and Honour was he did me, and prayed him at the same time that I might have the Liberty to let my Freebooters go along with me, and grant us some Pieces of Stuffs, to put ourselves in as good Equipage as we could, in order to appear before so great a Prince; all which he allowed me, and three days after, we went all together in a great Canoe, and passed up the River of Cape Lopez, because the Country is so full of Marshes, that you cannot go by Land.  
Being arrived at the King's Habitation, which is a Village consisting of Three Hundred Booths, covered with Palm-leaves, wherein the King keeps his Wives, Family, Relations, and some other Negro Families, whom he loves best; I was lodged in Prince Thomas his House, and all my Men were distributed into other Habitations. We found all the People in great Lamentation, because the Chief of their Religion, whom they call Papa, had died that day, when they were to begin the Funeral Obsequies, which were usually to last for seven days for Priests of that Quality. This same Person was had in great Esteem and Veneration by all the People, they looking upon him to be an Holy Man. As the King is in Mourning, and sees no body all the While that this Funeral Ceremony lasts; Prince Thomas bid me have patience, and not to go out of my Lodgings for to see the King, because that was the Custom of his Nation.  
However, I could not forbear going to see the Funeral Solemnity, where I saw nothing else but a great Concourse of People standing round the dead Corpse. I was in the mean time very well fed by Prince Thomas his Orders, who was gone to see his Father: They did not let me want Bananiers, Elephants Flesh, and River Fish, tho' all of it came without either Bread or Wine, as you may well suppose. My Men were treated in the same manner in their respective Quarters all the time we ●●aid there.  
At the Eight Days end, Prince Thomas came, in order to carry us before the King: He is a large Negro, well enough made, and about Fifty Years old, who, to do ●●e the greater Honour, according to the Relation given of me to him by his Son, came out of his House to resceive me, and advanced some steps to meet me. He was ●pported by four or five Women, which gave him a kind of an Air of Grandeur in a very cumbersome and fantastic manner: He was guarded by several Negroes, who were armed with Lances and Fusils, which they discharged from time to time with no great Order: There were several Trumpets and Drums marched before him, at the Head of which Company there were also several Standards carried, alike in colour to those used in Holland. He had no other clothes than a piece of Cotton Stuff, streaked with white and blue, wherewith part of his Body was covered, the same being several times folded round about him.  
He gave me many Demonstrations of his Friendship, he also stretched out his Hand to me, saying, it was the first time he had ever done so to any Man before me. Being come to his House, he sat at his Door, and made me take Place on the one side of him, as his Son did on the other. He asked me several Questions concerning the Greatness and Power of the King my Master; and when I had told him, that he alone waged War against the English and Dutch, whom himself knew, as having seen them often at the Cape of Lopez, that he also warred against the Germans and Spaniards, who were more Potent Nations than the English and Dutch; He told me, he was pleased with my Account, and that he would drink the King of France's Health. Presently they brought him some Palm-Wine, which is not unpleasant to drink, and his Wives served him in a great Crystal Glass. As soon as he began to take the Glass, the Negro Men and Women lifted up the Right Arm, and held the same in that posture very silently till he had done drinking: But when it was over, they made a great noise with their Trumpets and Drums, and discharged all their Muskets, or I should have rather said, Fusils.  
Prince Thomas then asked me what the King of France's Name was, and having told him, Lewis le Grand, he said he had a mind I should hold 〈◊〉 Child of his, of about Seven or Eight Months old, 〈◊〉 Baptism, and that I should give him the Name of Lewis le Grand, which made me smile a little at the Humour. He told me also, that the first Voyage I should make into his Country, he would give the Child to carry to France for a Present for the King, to whose Service 〈◊〉 devoted him, being very desirous he should be brought up according to the Custom of the Country, and Cou●● of so great a Prince. I also promised on my part, th● the first time I came to the Coast of Guiney, I shou●● not fail to come and put him in mind of his Promise, that so, upon my Return into France, I might be capable of making the greatest Present that could be unto the King, in presenting him with the Son of Prince Thomas. And assure him, said the same Prince, that I am his Friend, and that if he has occasion for my Services, I'll go myself into France with all the Lances and Fusils belonging to the King my Father, which was as much as to say, with all the Force of the Kingdom. The King presently pursued the Discourse, and assured me he would go thither in Person, if there was need for it; and with that, all the Negro Men and Women raised such a Shout as much surprised me; and this was scarce over, when the Fusileers made a general Discharge of their Arms, the Trumpets and Drums went to it again, and those who carried the Lances set themselves a running from one side to another with such horrible Outcries as frighted me. I was really ignorant of the meaning of all this, and could not be satisfied till I saw the King drink the French King's Health a second time, with the same Ceremonies as at first. Prince Thomas drank it also, and all of us were commanded to do the same. This being over, the King ordered Two Wax Cakes to be brought, whereof he made me a Present, desiring me to accept of them as a Token of his Friendship, and then he went into his House.  
The Audience being thus over, Prince Thomas carried me along with him into all the Parts of the Village whither he went to visit his Friends, and we went the succeeding Days to see several other Villages that are scattered up and down the Country at about Five League's distance from each other.  
These People, the greatest part of whom had never been at the Seaside, and consequently had not seen any White People, ran from all Quarters to see us, and brought us more Fruit, with Bufflers and Elephants Flesh, than we could eat. As for the Elephants of this Country, they are not altogether like unto those in the East-Indies, whereof they are a different Species, as are also those of Cafala, near Zanguebar, on the Eastern Coasts of Aethiopia: The Negroes eat of their Flesh with a good Appetite, and like the same better than any other; hereof they provide their best Feasts, and those who were minded to honour us most; brought it unto us instead of that of Bufflers which I prefer much before it.  
As they were not able to comprehend the Difference there was between the Colour of their Faces and ours, they would frequently put their Hands upon our Faces to see if the white Colour would go off; and it was the Fortune of many of us, to meet with Hands scrubbed with Knives, so as that many times we were hurt with them, which yet we durst not complain of. Prince Thomas, when he saw that, commanded all his Attendance that they should suffer none to come to rub and scrape us with their Fingers in that manner, and spoke aloud to all the People that came to see us, that all Strangers were White as we were; and that if the Negroes went into another Country, they would seem to be as odd coloured there as we were in Guiney. He laughed also from time to time to see the People run in that Fashion after us, as if we had been some unknown Animal; And I am not certain whether he were sorry to see us thus incommoded with the Importunities of those Negroes, or that he took some pleasure to see the Folly of his Country Men, as I have done many a time, to behold all their extravagant Humours.  
At last, after a Journey and Diversion together of Three Days, the Prince brought me back by another way to take my Leave of his Father: The King caressed me a thousand times, after a most obliging manner, according to the Custom of his Country, and made me promise I should give him a Visit the first time I returned into Guiney. Then we embarked in our Canoes, and next Day came to Prince Thomas his Village, where he continued to treat us after the manner he had been used to do. Here he spoke to me again, that he would have me stand Witness for his Son at his Baptism, which I did with so much the more pleasure in that I was helpful to make a Christian, and sanctify a Soul.  
But as I was dubious whether the Priest of the Town knew how to baptise the Child, or that he could remember the Words he ought to say at the Administration of that Sacrament, I desired the Prince to send for a Priest out of one of the Portuguese Ships, which he presently did, to Cape Lopez: So that one came from thence in Two Days time. The Portuguese were the People that brought the Christian Religion first into these Countries. It's true, they have not kept the same up there as they ought to have done; but the Difficulties that obstruct that good Establishment, proceeds, without doubt, from hence, that Men must dwell in a Country that is no better than Savage, where the Air and their Victuals are ●ot so agreeable to Strangers. To give Religion a sure footing in these Regions, it's necessary that the Europeans have fixed Habitations, or build Towns there; that they instruct the Negroes in the Truths of the Christian Faith, and that they send out Missionaries from time to time among these poor Wretches. This might very easily be done, because these People are very docible, and readily apprehend the Truths which you would teach them, as having lived without any Faith at all or any Idea of another Religion, for a long time. These Negro's being once become Christians, you might make Priests amongst them of their own Nation, who might be furnished with Books for the Ceremonies of the Church, and a Catechism for the Rule of their Faith, until they were capable to read the New Testament. It is necessary also, that a Bishop were constituted in this Town, who should take care to send Priests to the Dwellings of the Negroes, up and down the Countries, and to build Oratories in the most populous Places. The Christian Religion might in this manner be settled in Guiney, and so become less subject to be ruined by the Wars which Strangers make there. The Christians also who dwell in the Kingdoms of Fess and Morocco might be reform, and a Correspondence settled between the Priests of that Nation and those of Guiney, that so they might be assisting to one another, for the keeping up of Religion on all the Coasts of Africa. It was in a manner not unlike unto this, that Christianity established itself among the Gentiles, who were an hundred fold more averse to our Faith than the Negroes of Guiney. The Priests of this Country are for the most part no Priests at all, as having never been Ordained by any Bishop, and constituted themselves in the room of those that were deceased in their Country. And thus it is that they have nothing in a manner that savours of Christianity, tho' they have Ceremonies enough, and some appearance of a Sacrifice.  
But to return to our Baptism: The Portuguese Priest being come, Prince Thomas his Son was baptised, and named Lewis le Grand, in pursuance to the Intention of his Father: A Negro Woman, and one of his Relations, served as Godmother, and I for Godfather. I was told this Lady was called Antonia, and that she had been thus named by the Wife of a Portuguese Captain at her Baptism.  
Two or Three Days after this Ceremony was over, which was performed with all the Magnificence the Negroes were capable of, Prince Thomas his Guards which he kept at Cape de Lopez to give him notice of the Arrival of any Ships, came to tell him there was an English Ship come thither. I desired him to let me go on board her, that I might return to my own Country, to free myself from those many Inconveniences I still laboured under. But he would not have me commit myself into the hands of mine Enemies, and desired me to have a little Patience till the Arrival of some Portuguese Ships with which he would let me go. In the mean time the Prince went to Cape Lopez, there to exchange Elephants Teeth, Bees-wax, and Negroes, for Iron, Arms, and Brandy, and returned from thence in Ten or Twelve Days.  
He told me, when he came back, that there was a Portuguese Ship come to Anchor at Cape de Lopez, and that I should go down in his Canoe in order to go on board her; that he had recommended me to the Captain, and that I should want nothing that was necessary for my Voyage into Europe.  
I presently gathered my Men together, except Two whom I did not think fit to wait for; for they were gone up into the Country Five or Six Days before, and I knew not where to find them. We therefore embarked on board this Prince's Canoes, after I had taken my leave of him; and upon our Arrival at Cape Lopez, I found the Portuguese Commander to be one of my Friends, with whom I had contracted Acquaintance at the Isle of St. Thomas. I went on board him, and three days after, we anchored at the said Island, the Governor whereof showed me and my Men a Thousand Civilities during a Month's space that we were forced to tarry in that Port. At the expiration of that time came in an English Ship, that had been out upon the Goldcoast: I made Acquaintance with the Captain, and we grew to be such Friends, that I thought myself obliged in Honour to accept of the Offers he made me: He prayed me to go on board his Ship, and assured me I should find all the help imaginable at Barbadoes, whither he was bound, because there were very good jewish Physicians in that Island of his Acquaintance. I embarked therefore on his Ship, with all my Men, notwithstanding all the Reasons given me by the Governor of the Island, to make me suspicious of the Englishman, who was undoubtedly as honest a Man as any of his Country: He was so civil as to give me his own Cabin, with all the Pleasure and Diversion he could think of, for the solacing of my Spirits, under the Afflictions I had from time to time endured.  
Ten days after our departure from St. Thomas, a blast of Wind unhappily made us lose our Rudder, in the room whereof we were forced to set up a spare Topmast, and this proved very detrimental to our Voyage, which lasted no less than three Months.  
Provisions began to be scarce before our Arrival at Barbadoes, so that when we came there, we had no more than what would have served us for three days longer, insomuch that the Captain being concerned that he had taken our Men on Board, ordered our Allowance to be lessened three fourth's of what it should be. When we were got to Port, the Captain went to wait upon Colonel Russel, who is General there, related to him my whole Adventure with the Guardship of Angola, and was much blamed for bringing me to Barbadoes. When the Captain returned on board his Ship, he told me what the Governor had said, who had forbid him upon pain of Death, to let me go ashore: However, he said nothing to me of this Prohibition, but contented himself with only desiring me not go ashore, that it might create no Suspicion in the Governor; which I promised exactly to perform, having no great Concern upon me of seeing a Place again, that I had known so long ago, and being unwilling to create my Captain any Trouble.  
Next day, several jews, that had been driven away from Martinico, having heard of my Arrival, came to see me, and finding I was very crazy, and much out of Order, they sent some Physicians of their Nation to me, who said, I could not be cured, if I were not carried ashore, and thereupon offered to solicit the Governor on my behalf, for giving me leave to go lie in an House in the Town. I drew up a Petition to him, praying him to grant me that Liberty, and promising I would not stir out of the Chamber where I was placed, till I were to reimbark to go for Martinico.  
The Physicians themselves were obliged to be my Securities, and I was at length carried to Mr. jacob Lewis his House, where I was very well looked after all the time I stayed there. Three days after I was brought thither, the Major-General came to see me from Colonel Russel the Governor; he very civilly offered me his Protection, and all those things that could be conducive for the recovery of my Health: The same Major, as also the Captain of the Garrison, came also to Visit me from time to time, tho' I apprehended they came not so much to inspect into the state of my health, as to see if I were in a Condition to be transported out of that Island. Colonel Russel also himself, about ten or twelve days after my Arrival, came to see if I was so bad as they said I was: He came again about seven or eight days after in the Evening, and caused me to be carried out of the Jew's House, where I was, to an English Merchant's. He told me, I should be better accommodated there than at jacob Lewis'; but I thought it was to the intent I might be watched more narrowly, and not converse with so many People. He came to see me next day, and asked, how I liked my new Lodging? I rendered him many Thanks for the Civilities and Kindnesses he showed me, and that he might have no occasion to suspect my Men, I prayed him to shut them up in the Citadel, that they might not run about the Island, and to prevent their making of their Escape.  
He said, he would take care of it, but that I was to understand they were Prisoners of War as well as myself. I made answer, I knew that, and that I thought myself an happy Man, to have fallen into his hands: But that the English Captain, who had brought me to Barbadoes, had given me his Word, I should not be detained, nor any of my Men; That it was upon his Faith given me, and the tenders of Service he made me, that I had embarked, as firmly relying upon those Testimonies of his Friendship he had given me. Then I desired him to grant me and my Men our Liberty, promising I should ever be mindful of the Favour done me, whether it were by restoring of the Prisoners I might take belonging to the Islands, or paying him such a Ransom as he required.  
No, said the Governor, I will have neither your Ransom, nor your Prisoners, and you are too brave a Man, for me to have no Compassion upon your many Misfortunes: I desire, on the contrary, that you would accept of these Forty Pistoles, which I present you with, to supply your present occasion: He gave them me in a Purse, which he had doubtless brought along with him for that purpose; and when he left me, he said, he went to give Orders for to bring my Men together. Next day he sent me two of them, who said, they knew not what was become of the rest, and that they had Orders from the Governor to stay with me. I had the Liberty to send them abroad to get me Necessaries; and at last, finding myself somewhat recovered by the care my Landlord took of me, I told the Officer that came daily to see me, that I desired the Governor to let me go on board the first Vessel that was bound to Martinico.  
Three days after, came a Bark, which the Count de Blenac, General of the French Islands, had sent thither about the exchange of Prisoners: Colonel Russel sent me word she was come, and that I should prepare to be gone. Then it was I had the Liberty to go to his House, to render him Thanks for all the Civilities he had showed me: He told me, he was sorry that by the Laws of War he was bound to allow me no more Liberty than I had, and that he prayed me to use the English kindly, then should happen to fall into my Hands. This being done, I went on board the French Bark, which was commanded by the Sieur Courpon, formerly an Inhabitant of St. Christopher's, and I could never find any more of my Freebooters than those two I have spoken of, whom the Governor sent me.  
We went ashore at Port Royal in Martinico, and I went with my Men to the Town to wait upon Monsieur de Blenac, who was then sick of that Distemper he died of. I gave him a Relation of all my Adventures, and I am sure he was surprised to hear the Particulars of so many Misfortunes: As he would have me stay at his House all the time I tarried in Martinico, he made me every day repeat unto him the manner of my Fight with the English Man of War, and at last finding an Opportunity of getting me transported into France, he sent for the Captain of the Ship who was bound thither, and recommended me to him. He would also have writ Letters by me to Monsieur Phelipeaux, to recommend me to some Employ, but the day before my departure he was taken so very ill, that he could not write, and that day, which was the Tenth of june, in the Evening he died: I was mightily troubled at his Death for several Reasons. He was a Person that took delight in serving every body, who had great Compassion on such as had been persecuted by an Evil Fate, as was my Case, who went forwards with what he knew, who of himself made an offer of those Favours he was minded to bestow, before they were asked of him, and who, in short, was brave as to his Person, Skilful in Maritine Affairs, a good Seaman, knew all the Coasts and heights of Lands in America, was in great Esteem with the King for his Integrity, Wisdom, Justice, and for all his great Services he had done the Government in the way of Commerce, and Discovery of Islands. The day after his Death I embarked on board the Virgin, a Ship belonging to Bourdeaux, and which had been built there, in which Port, after a Passage of ●ot many days, I arrived at last with many different Thoughts, and contrary Sentiments within me. I do not know whether I have bid the Sea adieu, so much has my last Misfortune terrified me; or whether I shall go out again to be revenged on the English, who have done me so much Mischief; or go and traverse the Seas with a Design to get me a little Wealth, or rest quiet, and eat up what my Relations have left me. There is a strange Inclination in Men to undertake Voyages, as there is to Gaming; whatever Misfortunes befall them, they do not believe they will be always unhappy, and therefore they will play on. Thus it is as to the Sea, whatever Accidents befall us, we are in hopes to find a favourable Opportunity to make us amends for all our Losses. I believe whoever reads this Account, will find it an hard Task to give me Counsel thereupon, or to take the same himself.   
FINIS.